Home

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

Contents

1. 14 Characters VAM 15 Characters TEIL TIT 16 Characters 17 Characters 18 Characters TELLE ILLI 19 Characters 20 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14 21 Code Lengths continued 21 Characters 22 Characters 23 Characters TEIL ILLI 24 Characters TELLE TII 25 Characters TL TI 26 Characters 27 Characters 14 22 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code Lengths continued 28 Characters 29 Characters 30 Characters Message Containing A Specific Data String Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific character or data string or contains a specific character or data string There are 5 features e Specific String at Start Specific String Any Location e Any Message OK Rule Belongs to Set Specific String at Start 1 Scan the following bar code 2 Scanthe bar codes representing the desired character or cha
2. Enable Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Disable Emulate Keypad When enabled all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad For example ASCII A is sent as ALT make 0 6 5 ALT Break Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation 4 12 2070 2090 User Guide HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution When enabled this parameter allows replacement of any FN1 character in an EAN128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user See FN1 Substitution Values on page 5 26 to set the Key Category and Key Value Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution Enable Keyboard FN1 Substitution HID Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences When this parameter is enabled the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping see Table 9 3 on page 9 25 Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping Radio Communications 4 13 Simulat
3. 22 Send F23 Key 24 Send PF1 Key TEIL Send PF2 Key Send PF3 Key Send PF4 Key 14 80 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Function Key continued Send PF5 Key Send PF7 Key Send PF9 Key Send PF11 Key Send PF6 Key Send PF8 Key Send PF10 Key Advanced Data Formatting 14 81 Send Function Key continued TULIT I Send PF12 Key Send PF13 Key Send PF14 Key Send PF15 Key TET TT Send PF16 Key TEIL LII Send PF17 Key Send PF18 Key 14 82 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Function Key continued Send PF19 Key Send PF21 Key Send PF23 Key Send PF25 Key Send PF2
4. Code 39 Two Discrete Lengths Code 39 Length Within Range Code 39 Any Length 12 32 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code 39 Check Digit Verification Parameter 30h Enable this feature to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit Enable Code 39 Check Digit 01h Disable Code 39 Check Digit 00h Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Parameter 2Bh Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Enable 01h Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable 00h J NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function Symbologies 12 33 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Parameter 11h Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs char
5. Convert to Lower Case o Convert Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences see Table 11 2 on page 11 13 Enable this parameter to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter Enable Disable Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 11 FN1 Substitution Enable this to replace FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a user selected keystroke see FN Substitution on page 11 11 Enable Disable Send Make and Break Enable this to prevent sending the scan codes for releasing a key Send Make and Break Scan Codes Send Make Scan Code Only 11 12 2070 2090 User Guide Keyboard Maps See the following keyboard maps for prefix suffix keystroke parameters To program the prefix suffix values see the bar codes on page 5 24 2 E S662 PELER TAA 5065 SE 0000060000 2
6. 12 1 Scanning SEQUENCE Examples ctn tpa 12 1 Errors While Scanning iba e eR Rhein Eee pe 12 2 Symbology Parameter Defaults 12 2 C M M 12 7 Disable UPC A m 12 7 Enable Disable UPC E ip tna ka eti xi 12 7 Enable Disable RP T 12 8 Enable Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 2 2222222 10 0 000 12 8 Enable Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 12 9 Enabls Disable Bookland nh etd 12 9 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplement ls 12 10 User Programmable Supplementals 2 04844 80 12 13 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 8 12 13 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format 12 14 Transmit UPC A Check Digit 12 14 Transmit UPC E Check Digit deett Eu 12 15 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 2 12 16 UPC A aurcs We C 12 16 UPC E Preamble ATL rm 12 17 Preamble RE E 12 18 Con
7. G 2 Na Eeira d8 cie P H G 2 Establishing a Bluetooth BT Connection Using Open Bluetooth G 3 Establishing a Bluetooth BT Connection Using the STB2070 Cradle G 4 Using the Scan Item Application with the STB2078 Cradle G 4 Using the Scan Inventory Application with the STB2078 Cradle G 4 Customizing the Home Screen Menu rtt nere hibet rn bs nuu SER EU ERN G 5 Modifying the Startup iom ta pedet G 5 Disabling Scanner d pex eti pu RE Mas toned EX FUE DIEN RA REED G 5 xxii MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Index Glossary Tell Us What You Think About This Guide Introduction This guide provides information about using the MT2070 MT2090 devices i NOTE Screens and windows pictured in this guide are samples and can differ from actual screens Documentation Set The documentation set for the MT2070 MT2090 devices provides information for specific user needs and includes e MT2070 MT2090 Quick Start Guide describes how to get the device up and running part number 72 117308 xx e MT2070 MT2090 User Guide describes how to use the device part number 72 117859 MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide describes how to set up the devic
8. TL TT Send N TL TU DIT Send O Send P TEILT Send Q TED LLLI Send R Send S Send T 14 60 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send V Send X Send 2 Send 0 Send W Send Y Send Advanced Data Formatting 14 61 Keyboard Characters continued TL Nl Send Send Send _ Send Send Send b 14 62 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send d Sende Send f Send g LT JI Send h Sendi Advanced Data Formatting 14 63 Keyboard Characters continued TL TT Send Send Send Send VAM Send n Send 14 64 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send q Se
9. Signature Capture Height Parameter F4h 6Fh To set the height of the signature capture box scan the Signature Capture Height bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 480 decimal Signature Capture Height Default 100 001 480 Decimal Signature Capture JPEG Quality Parameter FOh 5 Scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 005 to 100 where 100 represents the highest quality image JPEG Quality Value Default 065 5 100 Decimal 6 14 2070 2090 User Guide Video View Finder Parameter FOh 44h Select Enable Video View Finder to project the video view finder while in Video Mode or Disable Video View Finder to turn the video view finder off Disable Video View Finder 00h Enable Video View Finder 01h Chapter 7 Customizing the MT20X0 Introduction This chapter includes information about customizing the MT20XO for the end user By default the device launches the shell program Navigator exe which provides access to default demonstration applications The out o
10. 14 42 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 29 Pad Spaces To Length 30 Pad Data with Zeros Stop Pad Spaces To pad data to the left scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros Use Send commands to activate this parameter Pad Zeros To Length 1 Pad Zeros To Length 2 Pad Zeros To Length 3 Advanced Data Formatting 14 43 Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 4 Pad Zeros To Length 5 Pad Zeros To Length 6 Pad Zeros To Length 7 Pad Zeros To Length 8 Pad Zeros To Length 9 Pad Zeros To Length 10 14 44 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 11 Pad Zeros To Length 12
11. 14 76 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Function Key Send F1 Key Send F3 Key Send F5 Key Send F7 Key Send F2 Key Send F4 Key Send F6 Key Advanced Data Formatting 14 77 Send Function Key continued VMI Send F8 Key Send F9 Key Send F10 Key 11 12 Send F13 Key TIUS TDI Send F14 Key 14 78 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Function Key continued TL LLL Send F15 Key Send 16 Key UAT Send F17 Key Send F18 Key 19 UMA A Send F20 Key Send F21 Key Advanced Data Formatting 14 79 Send Function Key continued
12. 02h 2D Symbologies Enable Disable PDF417 Parameter OFh To enable or disable PDF417 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable PDF417 01h Disable PDF417 00h 12 72 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Enable Disable MicroPDF417 Parameter E3h To enable or disable MicroPDF417 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable MicroPDF417 01h Disable MicroPDF417 00h Symbologies 12 73 Code 128 Emulation Parameter 7Bh Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128 A M Code ID Character 01h on page 5 23 must be enabled for this parameter to work Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes if the first codeword is 903 905 2 if the first codeword is 908 909 co if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes 13 if the first codeword is 903 905 14 if the first codeword is 908 909 L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation x NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906 907 912 914 and 915 are not supported Use GS1 Composites inste
13. Do Not Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Disable 00h 12 20 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend Parameter 27h Enable this parameter to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN 8 symbols to make them compatible in format to EAN 13 symbols Disable this to transmit EAN 8 symbols as is Enable EAN JAN Zero Extend 01h Disable EAN JAN Zero Extend 00h Symbologies 12 21 Bookland ISBN Format Parameter F1h 40h If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 12 9 select one of the following formats for Bookland data Bookland ISBN 10 The device reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10 digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward compatibility Data starting with 979 is not considered Bookland in this mode Bookland ISBN 13 The device reports Bookland data starting with either 978 or 979 as EAN 13 in 13 digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN 13 protocol Bookland ISBN 10 00h Bookland ISBN 13 01h ff NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly first enable Bookland EAN using Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 12 9 then select either Decode UPC EAN Supplementals Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals or Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC EAN J
14. Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN Parameter FOh This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar 14 and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol Enable this to strip the leading 010 from DataBar 14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit and report the bar code as EAN 13 For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros this parameter strips the leading 0100 and reports the bar code as UPC A The UPC A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 01h Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 00h 12 68 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level Parameter F1h D8h The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Limited bar codes There is an inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness Increasing the level of security may result in reduced aggressiveness in scanning so only choose the level of security necessary e Level 1 No clear margin required This complies with the original GS1 standard yet might result in erroneous decoding of the DataBar
15. 12 31 code 39 transmit check digit 12 32 0 93 12 34 code 93 lengths 12 34 composite 12 66 composite CC C 12 66 composite 39 12 67 connection maintenance interval 4 23 convert Case rh e en 4 13 convert GS1 databar to UPC EAN 12 64 convert UPC E to UPC A 12 19 convert UPC E1 to UPC A 12 19 coupon report 12 22 crop to address 6 8 data matrix 12 71 data options pause duration 14 8 decode pager motor enable 5 6 decode session timeout 5 15 discoverable mode 4 7 discrete 20f5 12 43 ceci emere E 12 45 DPM eL FUP EE hee ee NES 5 21 EAN zero 12 20 EAN 13 JAN 13 12 9 EAN 8 JAN 8 12 8 emulate 4 11 ONCIYPION 522255252 4 yates exe 4 28 diac EE 5 21 substitution 5 25 951 12 63 GS1 databar expanded 12 64 GS1 DataBar limited 12 63 GS1
16. Pad Spaces To Length 12 Pad Spaces To Length 13 Pad Spaces To Length 14 14 40 2070 2090 User Guide Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 15 Pad Spaces To Length 16 Pad Spaces To Length 17 Pad Spaces To Length 18 Pad Spaces To Length 19 Pad Spaces To Length 20 Pad Spaces To Length 21 Advanced Data Formatting 14 41 Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 22 Pad Spaces To Length 23 Pad Spaces To Length 24 Pad Spaces To Length 25 Pad Spaces To Length 26 Pad Spaces To Length 27 Pad Spaces To Length 28
17. 15 2 Troubleshooting Mee ata ES 15 3 15 3 single Slot Charge Only Gradle 15 7 Single Slot Charge Only Vehicle 15 8 Single Slot Charge Multi interface 15 9 Four Slot Charge Only Ethernet 15 11 Four Slot Charge Only 15 12 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 15 13 Cables 15 14 ED a C NE 15 15 Appendix A Standard Default Parameters Appendix B Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers B 1 n B 3 Appendix C Sample Bar Codes UPC A Re C 1 E 1 i 2 cm 2 EAN S M 2 006 39 re r O C 2 Trioptie Code 39 e M C 3
18. 8 7 8 9 Stop ee ee ee eee ee re 8 10 8 10 Check Receive Errors Se 8 11 Hardware Handshaking 1 escena n tmb Ext eek urea saec a ER IURE RA dns 8 11 Software Handshaking e T 8 13 Host Serial Response 8 15 cuui ua CU ME 8 16 121594942128 eM ME 8 16 Intercharacter Delay ET 8 17 Nixdorf Beep LED Options M E 8 18 Ignore Unknown Characters tierce cta seta E EX e La Fix 8 18 ASCII Character Set for 5 232 0 000000 8 19 Table of Contents XV Chapter 9 USB Interface HR roc 9 1 Connecting a USB Interface 9 2 USB Parameter icd 9 3 USB Host Parameters aste 9 5 USB Devic TYPE E CMS 9 5 CDC COM Port 9 7 Symbol Native SNAPI Status Handshaking 9 7 USB Country Keyboard Types Country 9 8 U
19. 12 73 Redundancy Level T 12 74 Fedundaney Level T ti ROM 12 74 Redundancy Level 2 12 74 Redundancy aiei 12 74 Redundancy Level Mu 12 75 Security Level 12 76 Report VOTO esisin NIME ME NM UM EE ET 12 77 Chapter 13 Accessories INI MIN DEDE 13 1 Maintenance 13 2 T E 13 2 Ju pp er 9 13 2 sisse eles 13 3 Cradle Features 525 e 13 3 Battery Charging in the 2 13 3 Changing the Host Interface eet 13 3 Communication E EEEE 13 4 Sending Data to the Host Computer sess 13 4 WIPE EN 13 5 Miscellaneous LED Indicator Information 13 5 Four Slot CAC ME 13 6 Cradle Features H 13 6 Inserting Devices and Batteries in the 13 6 Removing the Device from the Four Slot Cradle
20. 2 18 PROUT wo 2 19 o 2 19 oc Rep H E E 2 19 2 20 LGC AMOI M 2 20 euro 2 21 lj 2 21 cr 2 21 View Inventory T mcr 2 21 View Inventory Se aa ioi deci oue E 2 22 Save INVentory PCC 2 24 oj c TR 2 25 rcl 2 25 uc e 2 25 Simple Inventory AR m 2 26 liz PR T 2 26 eun m 2 26 Rer HHO 2 27 er mr PR DP 2 27 View 1 dat RU taces UE 2 27 View Inventory IU c 2 28 Save Inventory c M 2 30 e LL 2 30 s Pr PN 2 31 joe TT 2 31 cmd m
21. 12 60 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Transmit US Postal Check Digit Parameter 5Fh Select whether to transmit US Postal data which includes both US Postnet and US Planet with or without the check digit Transmit US Postal Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit 00h UK Postal Parameter To enable or disable UK Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UK Postal 01h Disable UK Postal 00h Symbologies 12 61 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Parameter 60h Select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 00h Japan Postal Parameter FOh 22h To enable or disable Japan Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Japan Postal 01h Disable Japan Postal 00h 12 62 2070 2090 User Guide Australian Postal Parameter FOh 23h To enable or disable Australian Postal scan the appropriate bar code below
22. Skip Back 6 Characters Skip Back 7 Characters Skip Back 8 Characters Skip Back 9 Characters Skip Back 10 Characters 14 36 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Preset Value Use these bar codes to send preset values See Prefix Suffix Values on page 5 24 to set these values Send Prefix Send Suffix Advanced Data Formatting 14 37 Modify Data Modify data as described below The following actions work for all send commands that follow it within a rule Programming pad zeros to length 6 send next 3 characters stop padding send next 5 characters adds three zeros to the first send and the next send is unaffected by the padding These options do not apply to the Send Keystroke or Send Preset Value options Remove All Spaces To remove all spaces in the send commands that follow scan the bar code below Remove Spaces Crunch Spaces To leave one space between words scan the bar code below This also removes all leading and trailing spaces Crunch Spaces Scan the bar code below to disable spac
23. Symbologies 12 79 Security Level Parameter 4Dh The device offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes which include the Code 128 family UPC EAN and Code 93 Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality There is an inverse relationship between security and device aggressiveness so choose only that level of security necessary for any given application Security Level 0 This setting allows the device to operate in its most aggressive state while providing sufficient security in decoding most in spec bar codes Security Level 1 This default setting eliminates most misdecodes Security Level 2 Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes Security Level 3 If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur select this security level Be advised selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis decoding severely out of spec bar codes Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the device If you need this level of security try to improve the quality of the bar codes Security Level 0 00h Security Level 1 01h Security Level 2 02h Security Level 3 03h 12 80 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Report Version Scan the bar code below to rep
24. 2 46 ipiis cp M 2 47 Security Mode M 2 48 2 49 Tunneled Authentication 2 49 User Certificate Selection 2 51 User Certificate Installation UE rep ee 2 52 Server Certificate Selection 2 2 54 Server Certificate Installation 2 54 User Name qe 2 55 PassWord III DEUS 2 56 Advanced 1 MR E OO T 2 57 Credential Cache Options but Eoi 2 58 zs M 2 60 Hexadecimal 2 62 Pass phrase Dialog 2 63 Address 2 65 Transmit POWEP EN 2 67 Battery Usage er 2 68 ee 2 69 Ordering Profiles s s 2 69 2 69 Manage Certificates 2 69 Certificat Properties
25. iit 14 8 Begin New Rule m 14 8 SAVE RUIE screenu E E E 14 9 E E 14 9 Quit Entering RUES MUTET CO 14 9 Rule Sef C T Arm E 14 10 eur 14 11 Code Types odes EU MEE 14 11 87 P 14 18 Message Containing A Specific Data String 14 22 Specific String at Start 14 22 Specific String Any LOCATION aeui ene antic e E UNE 14 23 lt 14 23 Numeric Keypad 14 24 Rule Belongs Dite riri Ses dime 14 26 ACTIONS n 14 27 s c 14 27 Setup ISIS m RM 14 30 Move T 14 31 rs d a 14 32 Skip Ahead ca UA III NEN ce 14 33 Skip Back aec cS 14 34 Send Preset Value EE CU UR 14 36 Modity Data a 14 37 eS 14 37 Crunch All Spaces 14 37 Stop Space Removal
26. Pa C 3 Table of Contents T28 T 4 AER EE C 4 FINEM CT 4 Interleaved 2 of 5 4 PAL 5 TERCER C 5 C 5 ela O00 NUN RU E C 6 US POS soc TER C 6 6 Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes UNDA D 1 LE CINA M E D 2 cR D 3 jesse det D 3 Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes Alphanumeric Keyboard lt lt 1 Appendix F Signature Capture Code Veo F 1 Code Struct re SR MNT ur HT F 1 Signature Capture F 1 CapCode Pattern Structure c 2 Start Stop Patterns MARTE Tr F 2 F 3 8 2102 Am F 3 Additional Capabilities mee P auewons F 4 Signature Boxes d F 4 Appendix G Quick Startup Exercises lugere M G 1 Establishing an ActiveSync Connection G 2 Using the STB2000 Cradle and USB Cable
27. 13 6 Sending Data to the Host 13 7 13 7 LED da 13 7 Table of Contents Four Slot Battery Charger TR 13 8 Lu ME EEUU EIL ID CEDE dS 13 8 Inserting Batteries T T 13 8 Charging Batteries o m ereenn 13 8 LED Indicators JM 13 9 Troubleshooting 13 10 Chapter 14 Advanced Data Formatting 14 1 Rules Criteria Linked to Actions nre 14 1 Using ADF Bar Codes pna t eda pa getto EREE 14 2 ADF Bar Gode Menu Example rm nr rt tmr mee rei dins 14 2 Rule 1 The Code 128 Scanning Rule 14 3 Rule 2 The UPC Scanning Rule 14 3 Alternate Rule Sets D 14 3 Rules Hierarchy in Bar Codes iun ooi ar uro ede Er t decis 14 4 Default Rules cease 14 5 c rer 14 5 Special COMM AMOS acus puisse ter adea mh EEE 14 8 Pause Duration eec
28. 9 8 2070 2090 User Guide USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device North American Standard USB Keyboard German Windows French Windows French Belgian Windows French Canadian Windows 95 98 French Canadian Windows 2000 XP USB Interface 9 9 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes continued Spanish Windows Italian Windows Swedish Windows UK English Windows Japanese Windows ASCII Portuguese Brazilian Windows 9 10 2070 2090 User Guide USB Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data No Delay Medium Delay 20 msec Long Delay 40 msec USB CAPS Lock Override This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device Enable this to preserve the case of the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key Thi
29. 2 45 Coupon report 12 22 cradle connecting 2 epi wee eee Rx RR d 1 11 diagram 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 inserting 1 13 removing scanner 1 13 13 6 supply power 1 12 cradles Ethernet cradle 13 2 four slot 13 1 13 2 13 6 four slot battery charger 13 2 four slot USB 13 8 single slot 13 1 13 2 13 3 LED 13 5 single slot multi interface Bluetooth cradle 13 1 USB cradle 13 1 13 2 ChOPPING n v Re DR 6 7 6 8 D data matrix barcodes 12 71 decode distances MT2070 2090 HD High Density Imager 3 10 MT2070 2090 ML 3 9 MT2070 2090 SD Imager 3 10 MT2070 2090 SL laser 3 9 default parameters 468X 469X 10 3 imaging preferences 6 2 keyboard wedge 11 3 radio communication 4 2 5 232 pb req RE EET 8 3 standard default table A 1 symbologies 12 2 Bl IEEE 9 3 user preferences 5 2 direct part marki
30. 2 71 Import a Certificate M 2 71 Delete e yv iR 2 72 Manage PACS 2 73 PAG Properties M 2 74 2 74 2 74 Moore c 2 76 Operating Mode Filtering 2 76 Reis e c 2 77 Band Selection gt c HH 2 77 61 du en 2 78 Auto PAC Settings 2 78 Change 5 5 P Eaa 2 79 risp M 2 81 Wireless Status m 2 82 Signal Strength E 2 83 DEI Arc sede 2 83 PVA SPATS eit ie EDUC MEIN et 2 85 Table of Contents xi Wireless 2 86 Ser 2 87 Wireless Diagnostics 2 87 ICMP RINO 2 88 Graph c X 2 89 TraceRoute zone cuu dcs NU 2 89 P 2 90 Log
31. 5 20 2070 2090 User Guide Batch Mode Parameter F1 20h Attribute 4 544h The device supports three versions of batch mode When the device is configured for any of the batch modes it attempts to store bar code data not parameter bar codes until transmission is initialized or the maximum number of bar codes are stored When a bar code is saved successfully a good decode beep sounds and the LED flashes green If the device is unable to store a new bar code a low high low high out of memory beep sounds See pages 3 1 and 3 3 for all beeper and LED definitions In all modes calculate the amount of data number of bar codes the device can store as follows Number of storable bar codes 2 000 bytes of memory number of characters in the bar code 3 Modes of Operation Normal default Do not batch data The device attempts to transmit every scanned bar code Out of Range Batch Mode The device starts storing bar code data when it loses its connection to a remote device for example when a user holding the device walks out of range Data transmission is triggered by reestablishing the connection with the remote device for example when a user holding the device walks back into range Standard Batch Mode The device starts storing bar code data after Enter Batch Mode is scanned Data transmission is triggered by scanning Send Batch Data J NOTE Transmission is halted if the connection to
32. Disable Discrete 2 of 5 00h 12 44 2070 2090 User Guide Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 Parameter L1 14h L2 lt 15h The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range v The range for Discrete 2 of 5 lengths is 0 55 One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select D 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar C
33. Parameter poe ed Default Page Number UPC EAN UPC A 01h Enable 12 7 UPC E 02h Enable 12 7 UPC E1 Disable 12 8 EAN 8 JAN 8 04h Enable 12 8 EAN 13 JAN 13 03h Enable 12 9 Bookland EAN 53h Disable 12 9 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 2 and 5 digits 10h Ignore 12 11 User Programmable Supplementals 12 13 Supplemental 1 F1h 43h Supplemental 2 Fih 44h UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 50h 10 12 13 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format F1h AOh Combined 12 14 Transmit UPC A Check Digit 28h Enable 12 14 Transmit UPC E Check Digit 29h Enable 12 14 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 2Ah Enable 12 16 UPC A Preamble 22h System Character 12 16 UPC E Preamble 23h System Character 12 16 UPC E1 Preamble 24h System Character 12 18 Convert UPC E to A 25h Disable 12 19 Table 12 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter Symbologies 12 3 Parameter Number Default Page Number Convert UPC E1 to A 26h Disable 12 19 EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend 27h Disable 12 20 Bookland ISBN Format F1h 40h ISBN 10 12 21 UCC Coupon Extended Code 55h Enable 12 22 Coupon Report Fih DAh New Coupon Symbols 12 22 ISSN EAN F1h 69h Disable 12 23 Code 128 Code 128 08h Enable 12 24 Set Length s for Code 128 D1h D2h Any Length 12 24 GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 OEh Enable 12 26 ISBT 128 54h Enable 12 26 ISBT Concatenation Fih 41h Disable 12 27
34. Stop Pad Zeros Advanced Data Formatting 14 47 Beeps Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule Beep Once Beep Twice Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters Beep Three Times Control Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send S end Control 2 Send Control A Send Control B 14 48 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Control Characters continued Send Control C Send Control D Send Control E Send Control F Send Control G Send Control H Send Control I Advanced Data Formatting 14 49 Control Characters continued TL LI TT Send Control J TUS T IL Send Control K Send Control L VAM Send Control M Send Control N Se
35. FN1 Substitution Values Key Category Parameter 67h Decimal Value Parameter 6Dh The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature Enabling this substitutes any FN1 character 0x1b in an EAN128 bar code with a value This value defaults to 7013 Enter Key When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value set the key category parameter to 1 then set the 3 digit keystroke value See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus Set FN1 Substitution Value 2 Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface Enter the 4 digit ASCII Value by scanning each digit in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes 1 Scan bar code below To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 5 26 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 27 Transmit No Read Message Parameter 5Eh Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message Enable this to transmit the characters NR when a bar code does not decoded Disable this to send nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode J NOTE f you enable Transmit No Read and also enable Symbol Cod
36. 2 104 File Explorer Keypad Usage Ee Ina SE 2 105 Task Manager eT M 2 105 Resetting Mr 2 106 Performing a Warm Boot MT nnt 2 106 Performing a Cold Boot C 2 106 Waking the 2 107 File System Directory Structure 2 107 Chapter 3 Scanning T M 3 1 Definitions c 3 1 CED amp 3 3 Scanning in Hand Held Mode i eate tuv ra be E Rime i e 3 4 Scanning with the MT20X0 3 4 RU err 3 4 Imager AMINO MN E E o ee LS 3 4 Xii MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Laser AIMN Rt 3 6 Scanning in Presentation Mode eios ust per Er be n auus 3 7 Scanning 3 8 oai cei ee LR LIU ed 3 9 Chapter 4 Radio Communications er 4 1 Scanning Sequence Examples sse nenne 4 1 Errors While Scanning 4 1 Radio Communications
37. Keypad Functionality One time blue key functionality see Blue on page 2 7 Unlimited orange key functionality see Orange on page 2 7 Wireless Signals MT2090 Only No wireless signal or not associated Tx Very low signal Y Low signal Medium signal 1 Medium signal Good signal Excellent signal Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 11 Home Screen When the device powers on the first screen to display is the Home screen This screen also launches when you press the Home key see Home 0 space on page 2 6 63 Home au Home i 2 Scan Inventory 2 Scan Inventory 513 Simple Inventory 5 3 Simple Inventory ill 4 MCL 4 ScanToIP tu 5 Image Viewer iu 5 Image Viewer 96 Config 246 Config Menu 2070 2090 Figure 2 2 Home Screen Table 2 3 lists the options available on the Home screen Use the Up or Down Scroll key to highlight an option in the list and press ENT to launch the screen Table2 3 Home Screen Options Option Description Scan Item On this screen the user can scan display and transmit bar code data See page 2 17 Scan Inventory On this screen the user can enter inventory information and send it to a local file in the Windows CE file system See page 2 20 Simple Inventory This is a batch inventory application similar to Scan Inventory It differs in that it transmits data int
38. Send Next 11 Characters Send Next 6 Characters Send Next 8 Characters Send Next 10 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14 29 Send Data continued Send Next 12 Characters Send Next 13 Characters Send Next 14 Characters Send Next 15 Characters Send Next 16 Characters Send Next 17 Characters Send Next 18 Characters 14 30 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Data continued Send Next 19 Characters Setup Field s Table 14 2 Setup Field s Definitions Parameter Move Cursor Send Next 20 Characters Description Page Number Move Cursor To a Character Scan the Move Cursor To Character then any printable ASCII 14 31 char
39. SEED AN E Eden os 1 18 Screen 1 1 18 Lanyard nines e etta hinds tubi bun mu EE Pai 1 19 Chapter 2 Operating the MT2070 MT2090 eR c 2 1 Keypad eT 2 2 Keypad Functionality M 2 3 Keypad Multi tap Configuration 2 7 Using the Keypad to Navigate Applications 2 2 8 ELTE MMV OTE tuf 2 8 Entering Information Using the 2 8 Screen CONS sesime 2 9 Home CIO EO mE 2 11 MENU ge 2 12 cue n cO Oo o 0o m 2 13 Device Stats ien 2 15 Battery M PH 2 15 Table of Contents ix Ke 2 16 e UM D LINE ANE UE 2 16 T 2 17 Quanti d Med 2 17 occ ee teste neh 2 17 ur pen racc nc E 2 18
40. Pad Zeros To Length 13 Pad Zeros To Length 14 Pad Zeros To Length 15 Pad Zeros To Length 16 Pad Zeros To Length 17 Advanced Data Formatting 14 45 Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 18 Pad Zeros To Length 19 Pad Zeros To Length 20 Pad Zeros To Length 21 Pad Zeros To Length 22 Pad Zeros To Length 23 Pad Zeros To Length 24 14 46 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 25 Pad Zeros To Length 26 Pad Zeros To Length 27 Pad Zeros To Length 28 Pad Zeros To Length 29 Pad Zeros To Length 30
41. 00 0440 12 32 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 2 12 33 Mol P 12 34 Enable Disable Code 93 Tm 12 34 Set Lengths for Code 93 aus esent 12 34 Code Ti 12 36 qo XL HN 12 36 Set Lengths for Gode 11 MER E RUNE 12 36 Code 11 Check Digit Verification retira e hae pea dict 12 38 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits ertt ed ser utebare tu RR ER Etre ecd un 12 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF MEO 12 39 Enable Disable Interleaved 2 05 12 39 Set Lengths Tor Interleaved 2 of B 12 40 12 of 5 Check Digit Verification 12 42 Transmit 2 of 5 Check eio Mh t eibi 12 42 Convert 2 of 510 12 43 Discrete 20f5 DTE 12 43 Enable Disable Discrete 2 of D celdas 12 43 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 Of B esee seris eR Io Cbr ER UE EK per E 12 44 Codabar NW Rr 12 46 Enable Disable Ia er RR 12 46 Set
42. J NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously 12 30 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Parameter 56h Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32 J NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 01h Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 00h Code 32 Prefix Parameter E7h Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character A to all Code 32 bar codes J NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function Enable Code 32 Prefix 01h Disable Code 32 Prefix 00h Symbologies 12 31 Set Lengths for Code 39 Parameter L1 12h L2 13h The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 39 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options x NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types
43. USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail Parameter F1h 50h To enable or disable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail scan the appropriate bar code below Enable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 01h Disable USPS 4CB One Code lntelligent Mail 00h Symbologies 12 65 UPU FICS Postal Parameter F1h 63h To enable or disable UPU FICS Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPU FICS Postal 01h Disable UPU FICS Postal 00h 12 66 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide GS1 DataBar The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded and DataBar Limited The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 Parameter FOh 52h Enable GS1 DataBar 14 01h Disable GS1 DataBar 14 00h GS1 DataBar Limited Parameter FOh 53h Enable GS1 DataBar Limited 01h Disable GS1 DataBar Limited 00h Symbologies 12 67 GS1 DataBar Expanded Parameter FOh 54h Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded 01h Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded 00h
44. 14 30 move cursor past specific string 14 30 move cursor to a 14 30 move cursor to last occurrence of string and replace all 14 30 move cursor to specific string and replace 14 30 move cursor to start of data 14 30 numeric keypad 14 24 14 25 pad spaces 14 38 pad 2605 u s sx 14 42 PE 14 1 rules hierarchy 14 4 send alt characters 14 66 send control characters 14 47 send function key 14 76 send keyboard characters 14 52 send keypad characters 14 71 send preset value 14 31 send value 14 36 skip ahead n characters 14 31 skip ahead characters 14 33 skip back n characters 14 31 skip back 14 34 skptoend 14 30 space removal 14 37 special commands 14 8 specific data string 14 22 specific string Index 2 MT2070 MT2090 Set Up Guide any location 14 23 any message 14 23 14 22 rule belongs to set 14 26 turn off ruleset
45. BTExplorer Settings Security Discovery virtual COM Port Profiles BTExplorer Settings Profile Settings Select Deselect All M Serial Port LAN Client vi Dial Up Networking eadset OBEX Object Push OBEX File Transfer Figure 2 137 Bluetooth Settings Profiles Screen The device is loaded with a number of Bluetooth services profiles These profiles can be loaded or removed from memory If a profile is not used it can be removed to save memory 2 102 2070 2090 User Guide To load or remove profiles 1 Navigate to a check box next to the profile 2 Press the orange key on the keypad and press the Space key to select clear the check box NOTE The Serial Port profile is always active and cannot be removed 3 Usethe Tab key to navigate to Select select all profiles or Deselect deselect all profiles and press ENT Configure USB This utility is used to configure the USB protocol which runs when a USB cable is attached to the 20 0 or STB2078 cradle An asterisk appears next to the selection indicates the current setting J NOTE ActiveSync SNAPI SNAPI with imaging apply only to the MT20XO If selected and paired to the cradle HID keyboard is used Retail CDC only applies to the STB2078 cradle If selected and a USB cable is directly connected to the 20 0 ActiveSync is installed When configured in ActiveSync decode data is
46. Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Disable 00h J NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Enable Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter 06h To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below and select an Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following pages Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 01h Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 00h 12 40 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter L1 16h L2 17h The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range The range for Interleaved 2 of 5 lengths is 0 55 One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only 12 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two
47. 3 7 radio communications sequence example 4 1 range iiie ted aet as p UR 3 8 sequence example 5 2 6 2 12 1 screens NOME ive etd eee ere x We vua 2 11 security modes 2 48 Serial Port 4 6 Master fs ne cee ee he 4 4 4 14 4 20 Slave ics ack ee uv REOR ER Gate dw RUE RR 4 4 service information xxiii setup connecting a USB interface 9 2 connecting an RS 232 interface 8 2 connecting keyboard wedge interface 11 2 connecting to an IBM 468X 469X host 10 2 inserting scanner cradle 1 13 installing the cable 1 11 lost host connection 1 16 removing scanner from cradle 1 13 13 6 supplying power 1 12 signature capture 6 11 file format 6 12 esc tirad n In ER ie RU 6 13 JPEG quality iiia bet aod 6 13 Vu 6 13 single slot cradle LED 13 5 single slot cradles 13 3 multi interface Bluetooth 13 1 USB charge only 13 1 single slot forklift cradle 13 1 single slot multi interface cradle 13
48. Advanced Data Formatting 14 69 Send ALT Characters continued Send U Send Alt V Send Alt W Send Alt X Send Alt Y Send Alt 2 TUS T III Send 14 70 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send ALT Characters continued Send Alt Send Alt Advanced Data Formatting 14 71 Send Keypad Characters TL LLL Send Keypad TUS TO Send Keypad Send Keypad Send Keypad Send Keypad TEILT Send Keypad 0 Send Keypad 1 14 72 2070 2090 User Guide Send Keypad Characters continued Send Keypad 2 Send Keypad 3 TEILT Send Keypad 4 MAIN Send Keypad 5 Send Keypad 6 Send Keypad 7 Send Keypad 8 Advanced Data
49. 12 46 EGG Dn dau cba PR rptu pad 12 48 NOTIS EIE 12 48 Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop Characters Detection 12 49 MSI eter 12 50 Enable Disable MSI EE 12 50 Set Lengths for MSI eee eee ene 12 50 MSI Check Digits c 12 52 Transmit MSI Check Digll s DES RP ENDE Eus 12 52 MSI Check Digit Algorithm am Sut 12 53 Chinese 2 0f e 12 53 Enable Disable Chinese 2 2 12 53 Ecco p Rete HH 12 54 Enable Disable Korean 3 07 5 ra adiu er t atta ud 12 54 Inverse TD 12 55 aec Ed cR DT 12 56 US c En 12 56 US ea IM ILU eee 12 56 Transmit US Postal Check 9 12 57 UK oo Fe eee T 12 57 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit iussit tto d 12 58 Japan Postal 12 58 Australian
50. French Canadian Windows 95 98 French Canadian Windows XP 2000 French Belgian Windows 11 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes continued Italian Windows UK English Windows Portuguese Brazilian Windows Spanish Windows Swedish Windows Japanese Windows Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 7 Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize Select Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters The device issues no error beeps Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown character The device issues an error beep Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Transmit Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Keystroke Delay This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts
51. 14 8 specific data string 14 22 turn off rulesets 14 89 14 90 zero removal 14 37 AIM code identifiers B 3 aiming options hand held decode aiming pattern 5 17 snapshot aiming pattern 6 6 snapshot mode 6 6 video view finder 6 14 aiming pattern 3 4 6 6 enabling 5 17 orientation 3 5 3 6 applications BTExplorer 2 95 explorer 2 12 2 104 image viewer 2 11 ED WE ER 2 11 scan inventory 2 11 2 20 2 26 2 32 are m 2 37 7 5 7 6 G 4 scanitem 2 11 2 17 3 4 7 5 7 6 G 4 ned e 2 11 simple inventory 2 11 SAUP uox deed ig Eie G 5 startup default 7 2 ASCII values keyboard wedge 11 13 282 20 9 1 E REDE FERE d 8 19 dcc 9 20 authentication 4 2 4 26 A 2 authentication options 2 49 auto reconnect 4 4 4 14 4 20 4 23 B bar code defaults radio communication 4 2 bar codes adaptive scanning 5 9 AD
52. Output Format Signature Type 1 Size Signature Image 1 byte byte BIG Endian JPEG 1 1 8 0x00000400 0x00010203 BMP 3 TIFF 4 To enable or disable Signature Capture scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Signature Capture 01h Disable Signature Capture 00h 6 12 2070 2090 User Guide Signature Capture File Format Selector Parameter FOh 39h Select a signature file format appropriate for the system BMP TIFF or JPEG The device stores captured signatures in the selected format BMP Signature Format 03h JPEG Signature Format 01h TIFF Signature Format 04h Imaging Preferences 6 13 Signature Capture Width Parameter F4h FOh 6Eh The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the signature capture area For example a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area would require a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to height To set the width of the signature capture box scan the Signature Capture Width bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 752 decimal Signature Capture Width Default 400 001 752 Decimal
53. a 12 23 supplementals 12 10 UCC coupon extended code 12 22 UPG A E 12 7 UPC A preamble 12 16 ueterem RR 12 7 UPC E preamble 12 17 UPGSET eere rer ese ne 12 8 USB connection 9 2 default parameters 9 3 parameters 9 5 USB cradle sss ete eoo ex 13 1 13 2 USB HID over STB2000 charge only cradle 9 19 USB polling interval 9 16 9 17 user preferences parameters 5 2 V video view finder 6 14 wireless companion 2 41 Glossary A Aperture The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit plus parity code representing 128 letters numerals punctuation marks and control characters It is a standard data transmission code in the U S Autodiscrimination The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code After this determination is made the information content is decoded B Bar The dark element in a printed bar code symbol Bar Code A pattern of variable width bars and spaces which represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine readable form Th
54. 12 71 7 is seem em 12 69 microQR 12 72 PDEA417 uae ae t aa 12 68 QR code 12 72 A accessories 1 2 four slot Ethernet cradle 13 2 four slot USB cradle 13 1 13 8 single slot cradle LED indicators 13 5 single slot multi interface Bluetooth cradle 13 1 USB cradle lua n 13 1 13 2 6 a dca d EUR ac s dees Sone CC 14 2 ActiveSync configure 5 2 102 cradle ii dieat do bae E Ss 1 1 1 4 13 1 ESD esr at 1 1 2 102 establish connection G 2 address Bluetoothi eic rm 2 15 Mo FPE 2 15 ADF auis e du 14 1 5 14 1 14 27 movecursor 14 31 send data 14 27 setup fields 14 30 alphanumeric 14 91 alternate rule setS 14 3 bar code list 14 5 bar code menu example 14 2 es eee 14 47 code lengths 14 18 code types 14 11 e Ro ER 14 1 14 11 default rules 14 5 move cursor past a character
55. About Close Figure 2 25 Simple Inventory Screen Menu Transmit Selecting Transmit sends data to the host PC via the configured interface and protocol such as USB HID keyboard On the Simple Inventory screen press Menu gt Transmit gt ENT to send data NOTE Data is not deleted after transmission View Inventory Scroll to View Inventory and press ENT to display a list of the saved inventory items stored in the device Each row in the list includes location quantity and bar code SKU The current inventory stores in a txt or xml file located in the Applications Inventory folder If no inventory items were saved the file does not exist and no contents display If the file does exist the items display in a list view with column headers for location item and quantity The View Inventory screen has several menu options for maintaining information saved in the inventory file 2 28 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide View Inventory Menu The View Inventory menu includes several options to maintain and customize inventory data On the View Inventory screen press the left soft key to display the menu items Press the Up or Down Scroll key to select an option Press ENT to display the appropriate screen Delete Item 75 X Delete All 11123 Transmit Figure 2 26 View Inventory Menu Delete Ensure the item to delete is highlighted on the View Inventory screen then press Menu
56. Customizing the Home Screen View By default the initial view on the MT20XO is the Home screen 2 U 2 Scan Inventory 2 Scan Inventory lt 3 MCL 3 Image Viewer 4 4 Image Viewer 224 Config 5 Config 5 Utilities Utilities Menu Menu 2070 2090 Figure 7 1 Home Screen The contents of the Home screen Navigator exe are driven by an XML file named Navigator xml which resides in the Platform folder on the device Table 7 1 lists the schema or format for the file Table 7 1 Navigator xml Schema Description lt Navigator gt The root element of the Navigator schema lt title gt Title of Navigator schema not used by the application lt show_images gt Used to show or hide icons lt show_numbers gt Used to show or hide numbers lt allow_exit gt Used to enable disable the Close button lt menu gt Used to child element collection of lt item gt in a menu or submenu lt item gt Used to define a child element which contains a lt name gt and command or lt name gt lt menu gt collection lt name gt Displayed name of item element in Navigator exe lt command gt Command line to execute when item is selected and Enter key or hot key number is pressed 71 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Navigator xml File Content lt xml version
57. WARNING This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility that serious personal injury may occur About This Guide xxiii Related Documents The following documents provide more information about the MT2070 MT2090 devices MT2070 MT2090 Quick Start Guide part number 72 117308 xx describes how to get the device up and running MT2070 MT2090 User Guide part number 72E 117859 xx describes how to use the device MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide part number 72E 117858 xx describes how to set up the device and accessories STB2000 SAC2000 Cradles Quick Reference Guide part number 72 117312 describes how to install and operate the cradles For the latest version of this guide and all guides go to www motorolasolutions com support Service Information If you have a problem using the equipment contact your facility s technical or systems support If there is a problem with the equipment they will contact the Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center at www motorolasolutions com support When contacting Motorola Solutions support please have the following information available Serial number of the device Device serial numbers are located on the label under the top of the device Cradles serial numbers are located on the label on the bottom of the cradle Model number or product name Device model numbers are located on the label under the top of the device
58. 4 17 OUT OT Range c 4 18 MT20X0 s Cradle Support eite ebat Steine eom 4 19 Modes 0 id rousse 4 19 Point to Point Communication 1 patet et dit mittet 4 19 Multipoint to Point Communication 2 4 19 Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only 4 19 xli pe 4 20 ee re eee o ee re 4 21 P 7 e E 4 21 Pairing FT 4 22 4 22 Pairing Bar Code Formal SUID D Due e etr EE 4 23 Pairing Bar Code Example ue 4 23 Connection Maintenance Interval eere Etras rt roi ecc mensions 4 23 Considerations Mc R 4 24 Bluetooth Security ee 4 26 Authentication 2 1 88 4 26 Table of Contents xili PIN ceiien a E E 4 27 Variable PIN 28 4 27 p p Un 4 28 Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options eno 5 1 SCANNING Sequence Examples 5 2 Errors While Scanning T 5 2 User Preferences Miscellaneous Options Parameter De
59. Scan Inventory aisle 3 aa 1 Figure 2 41 Scan Inventory Scan Screen 3 Use the keypad to enter a quantity into this field Scanning is disabled when this field is highlighted 4 Scan a bar code to enter data into this field Scanned data in this screen is stored on the FFS system and can be viewed deleted or transmitted to MCL Link 2 38 2070 2090 User Guide 5 Use the right soft key to select MENU The Inventory Menu displays ca Inventory Menu 6 1 View Data 2 Send Data 3 Delete Last BACK OK Figure 2 42 Inventory Menu Screen 6 Select the appropriate option and press the right soft key OK to perform the appropriate action View Data Send Data Delete Last View Data The View Data screen provides a list of all scanned data including the location item quantity date and time On this screen press the right soft key to display menu options to edit a selected record delete a selected record or delete all records CH View Data pi 0 33345 01 70 33345 01 70 33345 01 70 33345 01 70 33345 01 MENU Figure2 43 View Data Screen m eee Send Data Select this option to transmit scanned data to the host PC MCL Link application Delete Last Select this option to delete the last item scanned Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 39 Image Viewer Devices Equipped with Imagers The mage
60. To avoid this conflict users who are going off shift can scan the unpair bar code on page 4 22 to ignore the Connection Maintenance Interval and make the connection immediately available To set the Connection Maintenance Interval scan one of the bar codes below Set Interval to 15 Minutes Set Interval to 30 Minutes Set Interval to 60 Minutes Set Interval to 2 Hours Radio Communications 4 25 Connection Maintenance Interval continued Set Interval to 4 Hours Set Interval to 8 Hours Set Interval to 24 Hours Set Interval to Forever 4 26 2070 2090 User Guide Bluetooth Security The device supports Bluetooth Authentication and Encryption Authentication can be requested by either the remote device or the device When Authentication is requested the device uses its programmed PIN code to generate a link key The device stores this link key upon pairing so you do not have to re enter the PIN code when moving in and out of range switching profiles or switching between devices e g between the cradle and the application Once Authentication is complete either device may then negotiate to enable Encryption m NOTE A remote device can still request Authentication Authentication To force Authentication with a remote device including the cradle scan the Enable Authentication bar code below
61. ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the terminal s memory Series 9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports Ports interface The connection between two devices defined by common physical characteristics signal characteristics and signal meanings Types of interfaces include RS 232 and PCMCIA K Key A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data Also see Encryption and Decrypting L LASER Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation The laser is an intense light source Light from a laser is all the same frequency unlike the output of an incandescent bulb Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy density Laser Diode A gallium arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam This laser type is a compact source of coherent light Laser Scanner A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light LED Indicator A semiconductor diode LED Light Emitting Diode used as an indicator often in digital displays The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor s particular chemical composition Glossary 5 Light Emitting Diode See LED M MIL 1 mil 1 thousandth of an inch MIN Mobile Identification Number The unique account number associated with a cellular device It is broadcast by the cellula
62. to edit a highlighted item Orange Press this key once to enable the orange alpha and N A N A special character keys Press the key again to disable alpha and special character keys and return to default key use When enabled a filled orange circle displays see Screen Icons on page 2 9 When no circle displays orange key functionality is disabled Blue Press this key once to enable functionality of ALT CTRL N A N A v ESC or a function key When enabled an empty blue circle O displays see Screen Icons on page 2 9 When no circle displays blue key functionality is disabled Keypad Multi tap Configuration In mode when the Orange function key is enabled tapped the default sequence of multi tapping a key is lower case first For example multi taps of the 2 key displays b lower case first The multi tap sequence can be changed by modifying the Multitap reg file under the Platform directory on the device For detailed information refer to the MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide p n 72E 117858 xx 2 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Using the Keypad to Navigate Applications The screen is a non touch screen Navigation and control of an application is performed using the keypad Entering Information To enter information Use the keypad Scan bar code data into data fields e Use Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize or copy information from the host c
63. B TL Advanced Data Formatting 14 97 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued D TIL E UT F TELLE H 1 14 98 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued K L M IAM TL P TL Q Advanced Data Formatting 14 99 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued R TIT S TL T TT U TL V Ww X 14 100 2070 2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Y 2 TIU End of Message UI a VAN b VAI Advanced Data Formatting14 101 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued TL f 9 TL i j 14 102MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued k 1 Advanced Data Formatting14 103 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued r TIL 5 t Ww x 14 104MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued y z Chapter 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Introduction This chapter provides suggested maintenance and troubleshooting for the device batteries and accessor
64. Connect a charge cable to the appropriate power source and connect the other end of the charge cable to the device See Chapter 13 Accessories for accessory setup The device starts to charge automatically The charge LED on the device flashes during charging and goes off when the battery is fully charged default See Table 13 2 for charging indications See Table 3 2 on page 3 3 for detailed scanning LED descriptions Getting Started 1 15 Battery Safety IMPORTANT Battery safety depends on the proper selection and of batteries Security Implementation Protection From Counterfeit Batteries Motorola devices are designed to work only with Motorola batteries If you see a battery fault indication on the device display take the following steps Remove the battery and inspect it to confirm that it bears the Motorola name and or logo If there is no Motorola name and or logo the battery is not a qualified battery fthere is a Motorola name and or logo replace the battery and retry charging it If the message remains contact a Motorola service center Motorola Battery Safety Recommendations For Users IMPORTANT Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries and particularly from the continued use of damaged batteries Do disassemble crush puncture shred or otherwise attempt to change the form of the battery Donotlet th
65. Cradle model numbers are located on the label on the bottom of the cradle e Software type and version number e See Figure 2 10 on page 2 16 Motorola responds to calls by e mail telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Solutions Support you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions Motorola is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty If you purchased your business product from a Motorola business partner contact that business partner for support xxiv MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Chapter 1 Getting Started Introduction This chapter lists the features of the device s accessories for the MT2000 Series devices explains how to install and charge the batteries power the cradles and replace the lanyard if purchased Unpacking Carefully remove all protective material from around the equipment and inspect it for damage If the equipment was damaged in transit contact Motorola Solutions Support See page xxiii for contact information KEEP THE PACKING It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment ever needs to be returned for servicing MT20X0 Verify that the equipment listed below is included in the box e MT2070 MT2090 e Lithium ion Li ion
66. Select None when no parity bit is required Odd Even None 8 10 2070 2090 User Guide Stop Bit Select The stop bit s at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream Select the number of stop bits one or two based on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements 1 Stop Bit 2 Stop Bits Data Bits This parameter allows the device to interface with devices requiring a 7 bit or 8 bit ASCII protocol 7 Bit Bit RS 232 Interface 8 11 Check Receive Errors Select whether or not to check the parity framing and overrun of received characters The parity value of received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above Check For Received Errors Do Not Check For Received Errors Hardware Handshaking The data interface consists of an RS 232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines Hequest to Send RTS and Clear to Send CTS Disable Standard RTS CTS handshaking to transmit scan data as it becomes available Select Standard RTS CTS handshaking to tra
67. System Character SYSTEM CHARACTER lt gt 01h System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt gt 02h Symbologies 12 17 UPC E Preamble Parameter 23h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC E preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code 0 for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble DATA 00h System Character SYSTEM CHARACTER lt DATA gt 01h System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt gt 02h 12 18 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide UPC E1 Preamble Parameter 24h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC E1 preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code 0 for USA and transmit no preambl
68. 10 4 Port Address tee 10 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 10 5 Chapter 11 Keyboard Wedge Interface Introductio NER NN E E ee ee 11 1 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge 11 2 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults 11 3 Keyboard Wedge Host 11 4 Keyboard Wedge Host Types iue ie bos po ara eher 11 4 Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes 11 5 Ignore Unknown Characters 11 7 Keystroke Delay Rm P O 11 7 Inira Keystroke Delay etit petenti TRE 11 8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation 11 8 Gaps Lock ON RT 11 9 Caps Lock Override retene neern 11 9 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Convert Wedge Data P 11 10 Function Key Mapping RR NOT 11 10 eR rr 11 11 Send Make and Break Cou M 11 11 Keyboard Maps m m 11 12 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge 11 13 Chapter 12 Symbologies
69. 2 91 User Already Logged IN 2 91 User Logged In 2 91 Enable Disable Radio M J m 2 92 c 2 93 General Parameters RT 2 93 russi m 2 93 Rapid M E 2 94 Duel ee n ME M 2 94 Suh E LIEU TL E ICI 2 95 Establish a New 2 95 Add a Bluetooth Service MM cH 2 97 Turn Bluetooth On Off gt 2 99 Miscellaneous Bluetooth Settings 2 99 Device Info Tab T 2 99 Services cL 2 99 Security Tab P 2 100 Discovery e 2 100 Virtual COM Port CEPIT 2 101 Profiles c MM taas 2 101 Config re USB ctp couette 2 102 nc 2 103 eer 2 103 BI e 2 104 2 104 File Explorer Functionality ett
70. 469X Interface 10 5 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39 Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39 10 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Chapter 11 Keyboard Wedge Interface Introduction This chapter describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the device cradle With this interface the cradle is connected between the keyboard and host computer and translates scanned bar code data into keystrokes The host computer accepts the keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard This mode adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values Indicates North American Feature Option lt J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces do not merge 11 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface Male DIN
71. 802 11 9 802 11 9 802 11 9 802 11 g 55131 802 11 g lid nWEAPIA an v Figure 2 49 Find WLANs Screen The Find WLANS list displays WLAN Networks Available wireless networks e Network Type of network 802 11 a 802 11 b or 802 11 g Channel Channel on which the AP is transmitting e Signal Strength The signal strength of the signal from the AP Highlight a network in the list and press ENT to open a pop up menu which provides two options Connect and Refresh Select Refresh to refresh the WLAN list Select Connect to create a WLAN profile from that network see Manage Profiles on page 2 42 This opens the Profile Entry screen which allows you to set the values for the selected network After editing the profile the device automatically connects to this new profile Manage Profiles The Manage Profiles screen provides a list of user configured wireless profiles Define up to 32 profiles at any one time On the Wireless Companion menu press the up or down Scroll key to highlight Manage Profiles and press ENT to display the Manage Profiles screen Manage Profiles c5 Motorola Wireless Out of Box Magic Figure 2 50 Manage Profiles Screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 43 Icons next to each profile identify the profiles current state Table 2 4 Profile Icons Icon Description No Icon Profile is not selected but enabled Profile is disabled am
72. Belt Holster Device can be carried on a belt Maintenance See Cradles on page 15 2 Batteries Use only Motorola branded batteries and chargers See Battery Charging on page 1 14 and Battery Safety on page 1 15 for detailed battery information Mounting The cradle can be mounted on a desktop or on a wall Refer to the ntegrator Guide for mounting instructions Replace the desk mount cup with the wall vertical mount cup Accessories 13 3 Single Slot Cradles The STB2000 C10007R STB2078 C10007WR and STB2000 F10007R cordless device cradles act as chargers and host communication interfaces for the MT2000 Series cordless devices Cradles can sit on a desktop mount on a wall or mount on a forklift STB2000 F only Any discussion of transmission of information refers specifically to cradles with Bluetooth technology v NOTE Use ONLY a LISTED Motorola Type no 50 14000 5 14Vdc 1 5A min or PWRS 14000 5 14Vdc 1 5A min Direct Plug In Power supply marked Class 2 or LPS IEC60950 1 SELV Use of alternative Power Supply will invalidate any approvals given to this unit and may be dangerous Verwenden Sie NUR ein von Motorola GELISTETES mit der Typnummer 50 14000 5 14 VDC mindestens 1 5 A oder PWRS 14000 5 14 VDC mindestens 1 5 A markiertes Direct Plug In Netzteil das als Klasse 2 oder LPS IEC60950 1 SELV gekennzeichnet ist Bei Verwendung eines anderen Netzteils werden alle f r das Ger t gew hrte
73. Code Character Code Type UPC A UPC E UPC E1 EAN 8 EAN 13 Code 39 Code 32 Codabar Code 128 ISBT 128 ISBT 128 Concatenated Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA Code 11 MSI GS1 128 Bookland EAN Trioptic Code 39 Coupon Code GS1 DataBar Family Matrix 2 of 5 UCC Composite TLC 39 C Al wm D Z Z A S I o gt Chinese 2 of 5 B 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table B 1 Symbol Code Characters Continued Code Character Code Type V Korean 3 of 5 X ISSN PDF417 Macro PDF417 Micro PDF417 2 Aztec Rune Data Matrix 1 QR Code MicroQR P02 Maxicode P03 US Postnet P04 US Planet P05 Japan Postal P06 UK Postal P08 Netherlands KIX Code P09 Australian Postal USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail POB UPU FICS Postal POX Signature Capture Programming Reference 3 AIM Code Identifiers Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three character string where Flag Character ASCII 93 Code Character see Table B 2 m Modifier Character see Table B 3 Table 2 Aim Code Characters Code Character Code Type A Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Code 32 C Code 128 ISBT 128 ISBT 128 Concatenated GS1 128 Coupon Code 128 portion Data Matrix m UPC EAN Coupon UPC portion GS1
74. Issuer Self Issued Time Validity Tuesday August 05 2003 through Friday August 05 2005 Serial Number 2602DFCC D9BA7993 406E2CEO SEF3868C Figure 2 65 Confirmation Dialog Box User Name The user name and password can be entered but is not required when the profile is created If the username and password are not entered in the profile then when attempting to connect the user is be prompted to supply them The entered information credentials is saved cached for future reconnections Whether or not the username and password are entered into the profile affects how the profile is treated during a Profile Roaming operation Profiles are excluded from consideration if they require user entry of credential information If the profile uses an authentication tunnel type of EAP GTC and Token is selected see Password on page 2 56 then you can control certain behavior by whether you choose to enter a value in the Enter User Name field If you enter a value in the Enter User Name field then whenever the Fusion software prompts you to enter credentials the username field in the interactive credential dialog is initialized with the value that you entered when you created the profile If you enter a different value in the username field of the interactive credential dialog it is cached and used to initialize the username field the next time the interactive credential dialog is shown for that profile If you do not enter a value
75. MT2070 MT2090 User Guide 72E 117859 07 Revision A August 2014 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Motorola Solutions Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from Motorola This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis Motorola grants to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Motorola No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Motorola The user agrees to maintain Motorola s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes in whole or in part Th
76. Table 9 2 USB Prefix Suffix Values Full ASCII Code 39 Prefix Suffix Value Encode Character Keystroke 1000 U CTRL 2 1001 A CTRLA 1002 B CTRL B 1003 C CTRL C 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRLE 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRLG 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1009 CTRL I HORIZONTAL 1010 J CTRL J 1011 K CTRL K 1012 L CTRLL 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRLN 1015 O CTRL O 1016 P CTRL P 1017 Q CTRL Q 1018 R CTRL R 1019 S CTRL S 1020 T CTRL T 1021 U CTRL U 1022 V CTRL V 1023 w CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X 1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits USB Interface 9 21 Table 9 2 USB Prefix Suffix Values Continued Full ASCII Code 39 Prefix Suffix Value Encode Character Keystroke 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL 2 1027 CTRL ESC 1028 CTRL 1029 CTRL 1030 D CTRL 6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 A 1034 1035 IC 1036 D 1037 E 1038 IF amp 1039 IG 1040 H 1041 1042 IJ 1043 1044 L 1045 1046 1047 O 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1 keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits 9 22 2070 2090 User Guide Table 9 2 USB Prefix Suffix Values Continued
77. The 5 battery is discharged Normal behavior if the battery is severely discharged The battery must charge at a reduced charge rate until the battery acquires sufficient charge to boot the device This can take up to two hours depending on the level of battery discharge This can be avoided by powering the cradle with the optional external power supply 15 12 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Table 15 6 Troubleshooting the Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Symptom Charge LEDs do not light when device is inserted Possible Cause Cradle is not receiving power Action Ensure the power cable is connected securely to both the cradle and to AC power Device is not seated correctly in the cradle Remove and re insert the device into the cradle ensuring it is correctly seated Extreme battery temperature Battery does not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F 0 C or above 104 F 40 C Device battery is not Device was removed from cradle Ensure cradle is receiving power Ensure device is seated charging or cradle was unplugged from correctly If a device battery is fully depleted it can take up to AC power too soon four hours to fully recharge the Li ion battery Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery Device is not fully seated in the Remove and re insert the device into the cradle
78. The Rapid Deployment RD Client facilitates software downloads to a device from a Mobility Services Platform MSP Console s FTP server This task is generally performed by the system administrator or integrator For more information refer to the MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide To access Rapid Deployment from the Home screen select Config gt Rapid Deployment SCAN BARCODES TO DEPLOY Waiting Figure 2 122 Rapid Deployment Screen MSP Agent Motorola s Mobility Services Platform 3 MSP 3 is a scalable software solution that provides a single point of control for managing large numbers of devices within an enterprise MSP 3 consists of a server based software product and a set of device resident software components collectively called the MSP 3 Client software which enable the management of devices Used together these software components allow you to perform the following tasks e Staging e Provisioning Asset Management e Data Collection and Analysis This task is generally performed by the system administrator or integrator For more information refer to the MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide To access MSP Agent from the Home screen select Config gt MSP Agent MAIN MENU Monitor Processing Force Check In Package List View Client Info Log Menu Hide UI Exit Figure 2 123 MSP Agent Screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 95 BTExplorer BTExplorer is used to configure
79. the user is asked to enter a pass phrase between 4 and 32 characters long on the next page Once the profile is saved the pass phrase is converted into a key and the pass phrase is lost Also if a passkey is used only one key can be set If the Use Passkey check box is not selected then the user can enter up to four hexadecimal keys on the next page Which key is to be entered is determined by selecting a key in the Key Index drop down menu The key index chosen also selects the key used for encryption Note that Fusion sets default values for these keys so that entry is not absolutely required but remember that the keys must match the AP TKIP Select TKIP for the adapter to use the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP encryption method This encryption method is available whenever the Security Mode is not set to Legacy If the Security Mode is set to WPA personal then the user is asked to enter a pass phrase between 8 and 63 characters long on the next page AES Select AES for the adapter to use the Advanced Encryption Standard AES encryption method This encryption method is available for many of the Security Modes If the Security Mode selected is personal the user is asked to enter a pass phrase between 8 and 63 characters long on the next page Table 2 12 Encryption Authentication Matrix Authentication Encryption WPA WPA2 Legacy Pre WPA Personal Personal WPA Enterprise WPA2Z Enterprise Open WEP TK
80. 1 4 4 23 profiles ics 4 4 4 6 radio communications 1 16 scanner services disabling 7 6 G 5 4 26 send data to 5 1 1 16 bluetooth ad hoc mode 2 45 Bluetooth cradle 13 1 bluetooth keyboard emulation 4 4 bullets Re mE xxii C cables installing EXER n 1 11 cache options 2 58 character sets keyboard wedge 11 13 H9 2832 iiy eR oo e s 8 19 USB cueste re rx bb 9 20 charging er emer cabs setae 1 13 LEDS ue x sum RR ane or sce 1 13 spare batteries 1 18 USB 1 12 15 5 charging spare batteries 1 18 cleaning 15 1 15 2 codabar bar codes editing 12 48 codabar a veces sued neck dhe eee ete ean 12 46 12 46 NOTIS editing 12 48 start and stop characters 12 49 code 11 bar codes code 11 Rr em eio 12 36 es 12 36 code 128 bar codes code 128 seus eed eB e dr a e o 12 24 GS1 128 12 26 ISBT 128
81. 1111 O 1112 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 5 S 1116 T t 1117 U 1118 V 1119 W w 1120 X X 1121 Y y 1122 Z 2 1123 1124 1125 R 1126 S The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits USB Interface 9 25 Table 9 3 USB ALT Key Character Set Keystroke 2064 ALT 2 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALT E 2070 ALT 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT I 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALTL 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z 9 26 2070 2090 User Guide Table 9 4 USB GUI Key Character Set GUI Key Keystroke 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI 5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUI A 3066 GUI B 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUI E 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUI J 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P Note GUI Shift Keys The Apple iMac keyboard has apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the ri
82. 2 86 2070 2090 User Guide Table 2 26 Pv4 Status Fields Continued Field Description Lease Obtained Displays the date and time that the IP address was obtained Lease Expires Displays the date and time that the IP address expires DNS Displays the IP address of the DNS server WINS WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations MAC The IEEE 48 bit address is assigned to the device at the factory to uniquely identify the adapter at the physical layer Host Name Displays the name of the device Wireless Log The Wireless Log screen displays a log of recent activity such as authentication association and DHCP renewal completion in time order Save the log to a file or clear the log The auto scroll feature automatically scrolls down when new items are added to the log To open the Wireless Log screen select Wireless Log in the Wireless Status screen The Wireless Log screen displays Wireless Status 4 Wireless Log _ Autoscroll i sing profile 13 54 55 Setting 5510 13 55 06 Connection Timeout 13 55 06 Country code acquired USI 13 55 10 Using profile 101 13 55 10 Setting 550 101 13 55 20 Connection Timeout 13 55 21 Country code acquired USI D i Fila MeForela Miralace Nuk Ray Mani Figure 2 111 Wireless Log Screen Saving a
83. 2070 2090 User Guide Fast HID Keyboard This option transmits USB HID keyboard data at a faster rate 7 NOTE Quick Emulation overrides Fast HID Enable Disable Quick Keypad Emulation This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation Device and if Emulate Keypad is enabled This parameter enables a quicker method of keypad emulation where ASCII sequences are only sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard The default value is Disable This option applies only to the HID keyboard emulation device when Emulate Keypad on page 9 12 is enabled This parameter enables a quicker method of emulation utilizing the numeric keypad The default value is Disable J NOTE This feature is not compatible with Fast HID Keyboard mode Enable Disable USB Interface 9 19 USB HID Over the STB2000 Charge only Cradle This parameter allows HID keyboard mode over the STB2000 charge only cradle Scan HID Keyboard Emulation on page 9 5 default then scan Enable USB HID Over STB2000 Contact below When the scanner is inserted into the STB2000 cradle and the USB cable is connected to the PC the cradle is enumerated as HID keyboard Enable USB HID Over STB2000 Contact Disable USB HID Over STB2000 Contact 9 20 2070 2090 User Guide ASCII Character Set for USB
84. 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 Enter ojo BR 6059 Num Lock Table 11 7 Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 Pg Up 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 11 22 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 11 7 Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set Continued Extended Keypad Keystroke 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Dn Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow Chapter 12 Symbologies Introduction This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features Before programming follow the instructions in Chapter 1 Getting Started To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when the device powers down J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces do not merge Select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connected
85. Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and pairing see Chapter 4 Hadio Communications Getting Started 1 17 Startup When the device is powered on for the first time it initializes The splash screen appears for a short period of time If the device does not power on see Hesetting the Device on page 1 17 MT2000 series 9 Figure 1 10 Splash Screen Suspending Powering Off the Device A suspend menu item is accessible from Home screen On the Home screen press Menu Suspend Resetting the Device See Resetting the MT20X0 on page 2 106 Turning the WLAN Radio On and Off See Enable Disable Radio on page 2 92 Waking the Device See Waking the MT20X0 on page 2 107 1 18 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Battery Removal To remove the battery 1 Press Menu Suspend to turn off the screen and place the device in suspend mode 2 With your thumb press down on the indentation on the battery lock and drag it away from the battery 3 Liftup the back of the battery and pull it out of the battery well Figure 1 11 Li ion Battery Removal WARNING The device is not water sealed when the battery is removed Spare Battery Charging Use the Spare Battery charger to charge spare Li ion batteries See to Chapter 13 Accessories for more information on spare battery charging Screen Protector For added protection from scratches the device includes a protective film over the display
86. Check ISBT Table 42h Enable 12 28 Code 39 Code 39 00h Enable 12 29 Trioptic Code 39 ODh Disable 12 29 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Italian Pharmacy Code 56h Disable 12 30 Code 32 Prefix E7h Disable 12 30 Set Length s for Code 39 12h 13h 2 to 55 12 31 Code 39 Check Digit Verification 30h Disable 12 32 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 2Bh Disable 12 32 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 11h Disable 12 33 Code 93 Code 93 09h Disable 12 34 Set Length s for Code 93 1Ah 1Bh 4 to 55 12 34 Code 11 Code 11 OAh Disable 12 36 Set Lengths for Code 11 1Ch 1Dh 4 to 55 12 36 Code 11 Check Digit Verification 34h Disable 12 38 Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s 2Fh Disable 12 39 12 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 12 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF 06h Disable 12 39 Set Lengths for 2 of 5 16h 17h 14 12 40 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 31h Disable 12 42 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit 2Ch Disable 12 42 Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 52h Disable 12 43 Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Discrete 2 of 5 05h Disable 12 43 Set Length s for D 2 of 5 14h 15h 12 12 44 Codabar NW 7 Codabar 07h Disable 12 46 Set Lengths for Codabar 18h 19h 5 to 55 12 46 CLSI Editing 36h Disable 12 48 NOTIS Editing 37h Disable 12 48 Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop Characters F2h 57h Upp
87. Decode Distances Typical Working Range Label Density English Metric Code 39 5 mil 0 1 11 8 in 0 254 29 97 cm Code 39 7 5 mil 0 1 18 2 in 254 46 23 cm UPC 100 13 mil 0 2 26 3 in 0 508 66 80 cm Code 39 20 mil 0 2 46 1 in 508 117 09 cm Code 39 40 mil 95 0 in 241 30 cm Code 39 55 mil 100 in 254 cm Code 39 100 mil 192 in 487 68 cm Near decode distance is limited by field of view Decode distances are measured under ambient light of 35 5 foot candle in the plane of the farthest bar code Scanning 929 3 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 3 5 MT2070 2090 SD Standard Range Imager Decode Distances Typical Working Range Label Density English Metric Code 39 5 mil 1 2 6 3 in 3 048 16 002 cm Code 39 7 5 mil 0 2 10 6 in 0 508 26 924 cm UPC 100 13 mil 15 4 in 39 116 cm Code 39 20 mil 23 2 58 928 cm PDF 6 67 mil 2 5 6 1 in 6 35 15 494 cm PDF 10 mil 0 7 9 6 in 1 778 24 384 cm PDF 15 mil 14 2 in 86 068 cm Near decode distance is limited by field of view Decode distances are measured under ambient light of 35 5 foot candle in the plane of the farthest bar code Table 3 6 MT2070 2090 HD High Density Range Imager Decode Distances Typical Working Range Label Density English Metric C
88. Displays information about the Imager demo application Close Press the right soft key to close the screen and return Home Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 41 Config To access Config start at the Home screen scroll to Config and press ENT 6 Config Te m6 Config 1 Scanner Settings 51 Wireless Companion 2 Rapid Deployment 772 Scanner Settings 3 MSP Agent 2 3 Rapid Deployment 4 BT Explorer G44 MSP Agent 25 Configure USB 5 BT Explorer 210 Up 56 Configure USB Menu MT2070 MT2090 Figure 2 47 Config Screens Wireless Companion MT2090 Only Z NOTE Some screens and windows pictured in this section are samples and can differ from actual screens The Wireless Companion is used to configure and manage the device s wireless network settings On the Config screen press the up or down Scroll key to highlight Wireless Companion and press ENT to display the Wireless Companion menu Config 51 Wireless 722 Scanner 3 Rapid Depldgs 4 MSP Agent 5 BT Explorer 36 Configure Menu Figure 2 48 Config Wireless Companion Menu 2 42 2070 2090 User Guide Find WLANs On the Wireless Companion menu press the up or down Scroll key to highlight Find WLANs and press ENT to display the Find WLANs screen Find WLANs 1x WLAN Networks Network Type 4 802 11 g 802 11 g 802 11 b 802 11 g
89. Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char acter 1053 5 1054 6 1055 7 1056 8 1057 9 1058 IZ 1059 1060 G lt 1061 H 1062 l gt 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 Suffix Value Keystroke 5 6 7 8 9 x o nm m ololw gt 6 m m oj o vl O z Z OI Z Z 1 keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits USB Interface 9 23 Table 9 2 USB Prefix Suffix Values Continued Full ASCII Code 39 Suffix Value Encode Character Keystroke 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 1092 1093 1 1094 1095 O _ 1096 1097 1098 b 1099 1100 0 9 1101 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H h 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L 1 keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits 9 24 2070 2090 User Guide Table 9 2 USB Prefix Suffix Values Continued Full ASCII Code 39 Suffix Value Encode Character Keystroke 1109 M m 1110 N n
90. However if the unit is placed in an STB2000 cradle with the 12V power supply power up is immediate To insert the battery 1 Insert the battery into the battery well top first ensuring that the battery connectors touch the device connectors inside the well CAUTION Avoid touching the contacts when positioning the battery 2 Push down on the back of the battery until it snaps into place Figure 1 8 Battery Insertion Connect the Cradle IMPORTANT Connect the interface cable and power supply if necessary in the following order to ensure proper A operation of the device and cradle Connecting the STB20XX Cradle 1 Insert the host interface cable into the cradle s USB host port See Figure 1 2 on page 1 4 and Figure 1 5 on page 1 7 2 Connect the other end of the host interface cable to the host 3 lf necessary connect the power supply to the cradle s power port if the interface requires or to allow fast charging of the device 4 Connectthe appropriate cable to the power supply and an AC power source if necessary 5 lfapplicable insert the power supply cable ferrite into the support features on the cradle bottom and run the host and power cables into their respective cable grooves 6 For Bluetooth cradles only pair the device to the cradle by scanning the pairing bar code on the cradle 1 12 2070 2090 User Guide 7 If necessary scan the appropriate host bar code for non autodetected inter
91. IATA 2 OF 5 I20F5 VAAN Code 93 UPC A UPC E 8 13 Advanced Data Formatting 14 13 Code Types continued 051 128 TL UPC E1 Bookland EAN Trioptic Code 39 EE A Code 11 32 ode 14 14 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code Types continued ISBT 128 US Postnet UK Postal Australian Postal Coupon Code US Planet Japan Postal Advanced Data Formatting 14 15 Code Types continued Dutch Postal 4State Postal Post USA MAN PDF417 AA MicroPDF Macro PDF TLLA F Macro MicroPD 14 16 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code Types continued Data Matrix MicroQ UPC EAN Composites MaxiCode QR Code
92. Port Address None Selected 10 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 10 5 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC AT amp IBM PC Compatibles 11 4 Country Types Country Codes North American 11 5 Ignore Unknown Characters Transmit 11 7 Keystroke Delay No Delay 11 7 Intra Keystroke Delay Disable 11 8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 11 8 Caps Lock On Disable 11 9 Caps Lock Override Disable 11 9 Convert Wedge Data No Convert 11 10 Function Key Mapping Disable 11 10 FN1 Substitution Disable 11 11 Send and Make Break Send 11 11 UPC EAN UPC A Enable 12 7 UPC E Enable 12 7 UPC E1 Disable 12 8 EAN 8 JAN 8 Enable 12 8 EAN 13 JAN 13 Enable 12 9 Bookland EAN Disable 129 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 2 and 5 digits Ignore 12 10 User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Page Number User Programmable Supplementals 12 13 Supplemental 1 Supplemental 2 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 10 12 13 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Combined 12 14 Transmit UPC A Check Digit Enable 12 14 Transmit UPC E Check Digit Enable 12 15 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit Enable 12 16 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Combined 12 14 UPC A Preamble System Character 12 16 UPC E
93. Send GUI 9 Send GUI A EA Send GUI B Send GUI C 14 86 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued Send GUI D Send GUI E TIL Send GUI F Send GUI G Send GUI H TDI Send GUI I Send GUI J Advanced Data Formatting 14 87 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued Send GUI K TL Send GUI L Send GUI M TL Send GUI N Send GUI O VIC Send GUI P KAA N Send GUI Q 14 88 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued EA Send GUI R Send GUI S TULIT Send GUI T TEILT Send GUI U Send GUI V TTL Send GUI W Send GUI X Advanced Data Formatting 14 89 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued Send GUI Y Send GUI Z Turn On Off Rule Sets Use these bar codes to turn rule
94. Serial 4 MXA4RN36 Bluetooth 00 23 68 1A F4 51 MAC 00 15 70 D9 ED 0F ADCSvcs 1 0 0 25 Figure 2 8 Device Status Screen x NOTE field applies to the MT2090 only Battery Status This screen displays the device s battery information Current Level 9696 Charging Yes Capacity 2400 mAh Voltage 4 2 V Temperature 28 C Build Date Dec 2008 Refresh Figure 2 9 Battery Status Screen 2 16 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide About This screen displays version and copyright information DAR amy About Ti Version 1 0 9 0 Copyright 2010 Motorola In Windows Navigator exe Figure 2 10 About Screen Suspend On the Home screen see Figure 2 2 on page 2 11 press Menu gt Suspend to place the device in sleep mode To wake the device press any key Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 17 Scan The Scan ltem screen allows the user to transmit bar code data to the host PC To access Scan start at the Home screen scroll to Scan ltem and press ENT Quantity 1 Menu Close Figure2 11 Scan Screen The following options are available Scan a bar code The data displays briefly in the tem field and the bar code data transmits to the host PC Quantity defaults to a value of one and transmits one bar code Key an SKU or bar code data manually using the keyboard Press ENT to transmit the data to the host PC Quantity defaults
95. To access the USB configuration menu from the device s Home screen select Config gt Configure USB This device supports the following host interfaces without communication with a cradle e Standard RS 232 connection to a host USB connection to a host via Bluetooth technology The device autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar codes The following international keyboards are supported for Windows environment North America German French French Belgian French Canadian Spanish Italian Swedish UK English Japanese and Brazilian Portuguese J NOTE USB interface types can also be selected via the USB configuration menu on the device To access the USB configuration menu from the device s Home screen select Config gt Configure USB Out of Box Startup To get the MT2070 MT2090 up and running Insert the rechargeable Li ion battery Connect power to the cradle Insert the device in the cradle e Charge the device Configure the device Getting Started 1 11 Insert the Battery The battery resides in a chamber in the device handle J NOTE f the battery is completely discharged and the unit is powered from a USB or RS232 cable it may take up to two hours for the unit to power up There is no indication to the user of this condition and it may appear that the unit is not charging and or not working correctly
96. To prevent the device from forcing Authentication scan the Disable Authentication bar code below Enable Authentication Disable Authentication Radio Communications 4 27 PIN Code To set the PIN code e g password on the device scan the bar code below followed by five alphanumeric programming bar codes from Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes The default PIN code is 12345 If the device communicates with a cradle with security enabled synchronize the PIN codes on the device and cradle To achieve this connect the device to the cradle when setting the PIN codes If the device is not connected to a cradle the PIN code change only takes effect on the device If security is required between the device and cradle and the PIN codes do not match pairing fails If the PIN codes are not synchronized re synchronize them by disabling security establishing a connection to the cradle and then programming a new PIN code Set PIN Code Variable PIN Code The default PIN code is the user programmed Static PIN Code For connections requiring a variable PIN code commonly HID scan the Variable PIN Code Mode Attempt connection again wait for the prompt to appear on the display and enter the PIN code using the device keypad When variable PIN code mode is selected the device remains in this mode until you change the mode by device set defaults see Set Default Parameter on page 5 4
97. When the device is set up as a Master SPP it initiates the radio connection to a slave device Initiating the connection is done by scanning a pairing bar code for the remote device see Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 23 Slave When the device is set up as a Slave device SPP or HID the device accepts an incoming connection request from a remote device J NOTE The number of devices is dependent on the host s capability Radio Communications 4 7 Bluetooth Friendly Name You can set a meaningful name for the device that appears in the application during device discovery The default name is the device name followed by its serial number e g MT2070 MT2090 123456789ABCDEF Scanning Set Defaults reverts the device to this name use custom defaults to maintain the user programmed name through a Set Defaults operation To set a new Bluetooth Friendly Name scan the following bar code then scan up to 23 characters from Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes If the name contains less than 23 characters scan End of Message on page E 7 after entering the name J NOTE lf your application allows you to set a device name this takes precedence over the Bluetooth Friendly Name Bluetooth Friendly Name Discoverable Mode Select a discoverable mode based on the device initiating discovery Select General Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a PC Select Limited Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a mobil
98. battery Quick Start Guide Cradles STB2000 C10007R Single Slot Charge Only with ActiveSync Verify that the equipment listed below is included in the box e Cradle with desk mount cup installed Wall mount cup e Regulatory Guide 1 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide STB2000 F10007R Forklift Single Slot Charge Only Verify that the equipment listed below is included in the box Cradle with forklift cup installed Metal mounting bracket with isolators e Quick Reference Guide STB2078 C10007WR Single Slot Multi interface Bluetooth Verify that the equipment listed below is included in the box Cradle with desk mount cup installed Wall mount cup e Quick Reference Guide STB2000 C40007R Four Slot Charge Only Verify that the equipment listed below is included in the box Cradle with wall mount cups installed e Quick Reference Guide STB2000 C40017R Four Slot Ethernet Verify that the equipment listed below is included in the box Cradle with wall mount cups installed Quick Reference Guide SAC2000 4000CR Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Verify that the equipment listed below is included in the box e Charger Quick Reference Guide Accessories See Chapter 13 Accessories for a list all accessories available for the MT2070 MT2090 devices Getting Started 1 3 Features Keypad Scan LED MT2090 only can LED Accessory Port Cover Scan Trigger attery Lanyard
99. ensuring it is cradle correctly seated Extreme battery temperature Battery does not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F 0 C or above 104 F 40 C During data Device removed from cradle Replace device in cradle and retransmit communications no data was transmitted or transmitted data was incomplete during communications Incorrect cable configuration See the system administrator Communications software is not installed or configured properly Perform setup as described in Chapter 4 Radio Communications Device falls out of the cradle in the wall mount position Cradle has an incorrect adapter cup Ensure the wall mount adapter cup is installed and not the desktop cup Cradle latches are adjusted incorrectly Remove cradle from the shock absorbing plate by unscrewing 3 screws check that the position of the wall mount conversion dial is set to the wall mount position reattach the cradle to the shock absorbing plate Device does not boot when placed in the cradle The 5 battery is discharged Normal behavior if the battery is severely discharged The battery must charge at a reduced charge rate until the battery acquires sufficient charge to boot the device This can take up to two hours depending on the level of battery discharge This can be avoided by powering the cradle with the optional external power supply Maintenance and Troubleshooting 1
100. enter a leading zero for single digit numbers One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 39 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 39 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 39 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Length Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the device s capability Code 39 One Discrete Length
101. nserting Batteries on page 13 8 Charging begins when the LED indicators on the device and in the cradle s spare battery section start flashing green A complete charge of a fully discharged battery can take up to four hours LED Indicators Table 13 4 Device LED Indicators LED Indication Off No power applied to device battery discharged or removed device is in low power and ready to scan or battery is fully charged and device is ready to scan Note The default state of the LED is off when the battery is fully charged By modifying the BatteryLED reg file under the Platform directory on the device you have the option to enable a solid green LED on a fully charged battery For detailed information refer to the MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide p n 72E 117858 xx Green Flash Device is charging Red Flash Charging problem or data transmission problem Table 13 5 Cradle LED Indicators LED Indication Solid Blue Cradle Power LED Cradle is powered Ethernet Activity LEDs Speed LED 100 10 Primary Port Connection Ethernet cradles only The cradle s green Speed LED lights to indicate that the transfer rate is 100 Mbps When it is not lit it indicates that the transfer rate is 10Mbps Link LED gt Primary Port Connection The cradle s amber Link LED blinks to indicate activity or stays lit to indicate that a link is established When it is not lit it indicates there is no link 13 8 MT2070 MT2090
102. or Static PIN Code Mode Static PIN Code Mode Variable PIN Code Mode 4 28 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Encryption lt J NOTE Authentication must be performed before Encryption can take effect To set up the device for enabling Encryption scan Enable Encryption To prevent the device from enabling Encryption scan Disable Encryption When enabled the radio encrypts data Enable Encryption Disable Encryption Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options Introduction You can program the device to perform various functions or activate different features This chapter describes each user preference feature and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features The device ships with the settings shown in Table 5 1 on page 5 2 also see Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when the device is powered down J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen when using the imaging engine When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces
103. or PWRS 14000 9 2Amax Direct Plug In Power supply marked Class 2 or LPS IEC60950 1 SELV Use of alternative Power Supply will invalidate any approvals given to this unit and may be dangerous three 1 25 8 Phillips head screws for wall mounting if applicable not available from Motorola Four slot charge only cradle STB2000 C40007R four slot charge only cradle charges up to four spare batteries and up to four devices with batteries installed 13 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 13 1 Accessories Continued Accessory Four slot charge Ethernet cradle Description STB2000 C40017R four slot Ethernet cradle charges up to four spare batteries and up to four devices with batteries installed It also synchronizes up to four devices with a host computer through an Ethernet connection An Ethernet cable is required for communication not available from Motorola Battery Charger Four slot spare battery charger SAC2000 4000CR four slot spare battery charger charges up to four single batteries Cables USB Client Charge Cable Cable attaches from device cradle to host PC RS 232 Serial Cable with Power Supply Cable attaches from device cradle to host PC Miscellaneous IntelliStand The IntelliStand provides a hands free method of scanning Lanyard Wrist strap Forklift mount bracket The mounting bracket is used to install the STB2000 F cradle on a forklift
104. scroll to Transmit in this display and press the left or right scroll key to select how to transmit bar code data Together or Separate Delimiter When you select to transmit bar code data Together the Delimiter field displays Scroll to this field and press the left or right scroll key to choose a delimiter method comma semi colon or tab Delay When you select to transmit Separate bar code data scroll to Delay and enter the time in milliseconds to separate the transmission of data Barcode Scroll to Barcode to choose a symbology type Code 128 or Code 39 Clear Delay The number of seconds bar code clears after transmission Cancel Press to cancel settings and return to previous screen Done Press to save settings and return to previous screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 19 About Displays information about the Scanltem application Close Press the right soft key to close the screen and return Home Close Scroll to Close and press ENT to exit and return Home 2 20 2070 2090 User Guide Scan Inventory The Scan Inventory screen allows the user to enter inventory information and send it to a local file in the Windows CE file system Set the file type in which to save the inventory data in Menu gt Options screen gt Format see Figure 2 16 on page 2 21 To access Scan Inventory start at the Home screen scroll to Scan Inventory and press ENT 156 Scan Inventory x Loc
105. selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode an 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan 1 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Length Scan this option to decode 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the device s capability J NOTE Due to the construction of the 2 of 5 symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths I 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for 2 of 5 applications Symbologies 12 41 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 continued 12 of 5 One Discrete Length 12 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths 12 of 5 Length Within Range 12 of 5 Any Length 12 42 2070 2090 User Guide 12 of 5 Check Dig
106. 1 single slot USB cradle 13 2 RUE Eee an 4 4 4 6 snapshot mode timeout 6 6 spare batteries charging 1 18 spare battery Charging xai bm Bye Da Pada cies 1 18 spare battery charger 13 2 Goa woe inte ee ob Ed 4 6 MASON isis el egi b eI A 4 4 4 14 4 20 CT 4 4 standard default parameters A 1 starting the 1 17 SUDDpOFU ii sese rx RR RR x ERROR RU y xxiii suspend 1 17 1 18 Symbol code identifiers B 1 symbology default 5 12 2 T troubleshooting 15 3 tunneled authentication options 2 50 U unlocked pairing 4 21 unpacking Scanner ee heeded aa weds 1 1 unpairing barcodes scs teed Rees 4 22 UPC EAN bar codes bookland EAN 12 9 bookland ISBN 12 21 check digit 12 14 12 15 12 16 convert UPC E to UPC A 12 19 convert UPC E1 to UPC A 12 19 EAN zero extend 12 20 13 13 12 9 8 12 8 ISSN EAN
107. 10 Check Receive Errors Enable 8 11 Hardware Handshaking None 8 11 Software Handshaking None 8 13 Host Serial Response Time out 2 Sec 8 15 RTS Line State Low RTS 8 16 Beep on lt BEL gt Disable 8 16 Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 8 17 Nixdorf Beep LED Options Normal Operation 8 18 Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 8 18 USB Host Parameters USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 9 5 CDC COM Port Emulation Enable 9 7 Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking Enable 9 7 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes North American 9 8 USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 9 10 USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 9 10 USB Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 9 11 USB Ignore Beep Directive Honor 9 11 USB Ignore Type Directive Honor 9 12 Emulate Keypad Disable 9 12 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Disable 9 13 USB Substitution Disable 9 13 Function Key Mapping Disable 9 14 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 9 14 Convert Case None 9 15 USB Transmission Speed Parameters 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 5 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Page Number USB Polling Interval 8 msec 9 16 Fast HID Keyboard Disable 9 18 Quick Keypad Emulation Disable 9 18 USB HID Over the STB2000 Charge only Cradle Disable 9 19 IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters
108. 1092 L 1093 1 1094 N 1095 960 _ 1096 N 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 1100 0 9 1101 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H h 1105 i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1 keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 11 10 Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 17 Table 11 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII Code 39 ASCII Value Encode Character Keystroke 1108 L 1109 m 1110 1111 O 1112 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 5 S 1116 T t 1117 U 1118 V 1119 W w 1120 X X 1121 Y y 1122 Z 2 1123 1124 1125 R 1126 S 1 keystroke bold transmits only you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 11 10 Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits Table 11 3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set Keystroke 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALTE 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 11 18 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 11 3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set Continued ALT Keys Keystroke 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 209
109. 12 59 Australia Post 12 60 Netherlands KIX Code e 12 61 USPS 4 Code lntelligent Mail enne 12 61 UPU FICS ES 12 62 Xviil MT2070 MT2090 User Guide cci qr 12 63 tois ec c e T d 12 63 351 DataBar Limited C HQ 12 63 GS1 DataBar m eciam IT 12 64 Convert GS1 DataBar to 12 64 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 12 65 COMPOSITE 12 66 COMPOSE 12 66 Composite CC A B 12 66 Composite 38 ae 12 67 UPC Composite Mode M 12 67 Composite nn 12 68 ME CV 12 68 Enable Disable PDEP417 trita eiecit Pera 12 68 Enable Disable Micro DPA 12 69 Code 128 12 70 Data a 12 71 NS 12 71 OF Code rc 12 72 uen T 12 72
110. 12 62 Australia Post Format Autodiscriminate 12 63 Netherlands KIX Code Disable 12 64 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail Disable 12 64 UPU FICS Postal Disable 12 65 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 9 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter GS1 DataBar Default Page Number GS1 DataBar 14 Disable 12 66 GS1 DataBar Limited Disable 12 66 GS1 DataBar Expanded Disable 12 67 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN Disable 12 67 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level Security Level 3 12 68 Composite Composite CC C Disable 12 69 Composite CC A B Disable 12 69 Composite TLC 39 Disable 12 70 UPC Composite Mode Never Linked 12 70 Composite Beep Mode Beep as Each Code Type is Decoded 12 71 2D Symbologies PDF417 Enable 12 71 MicroPDF417 Disable 12 72 Code 128 Emulation Disable 12 73 Data Matrix Enable 12 74 Maxicode Enable 12 74 QR Code Enable 12 75 MicroQR Enable 12 75 Aztec Enable 12 76 Symbology Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level 1 12 77 Security Level 0 12 79 Report Version 12 80 User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Appendix B Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers Table 1 Symbol Code Characters
111. 22 DPM Scanning MT2070 DP only F1h 09h Enable 5 22 Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character 2Dh None 5 23 Prefix Value 63h 69h 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 24 Suffix 1 Value 62h 68h 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 24 Suffix 2 Value 64h 6Ah Scan Data Transmission Format EBh Data as is 5 25 FN1 Substitution Values 67h 6Dh Set 5 26 Transmit No Read Message 5Eh Disable 5 27 5 4 2070 2090 User Guide User Preferences Set Default Parameter You can reset the device to two types of defaults factory defaults or custom defaults Scan the appropriate bar code below to reset the decoder to its default settings and or set its current settings as custom defaults J NOTE When programmed to do so certain MT20X0 cradles send parameter updates to the scanner For example if the user sets up custom defaults on the scanner these settings will be overwritten on cradle connection if Parameter Broadcast is enabled Prior to setting custom defaults see Modes of Operation on page 4 19 and Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only on page 4 20 to learn about cradle and scanner settings Set Defaults Scan this bar code to reset all default parameters as follows lf you previously set custom defaults by scanning Write to Custom Defaults scan Set Defaults to retrieve and restore the decoder s custom default settings f you did not set custom defaults scan Restore Defaults to restore the factory default values listed in
112. 5 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL 6 1031 CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 A 1034 B 1035 IC 1036 D 1037 E 1038 amp 1039 IG 1040 H 1041 l 1042 IJ 1043 K 1044 L 1045 1046 1047 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1 keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping page 11 10 Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 15 Table 11 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII Code 39 ASCII Value Encode Character Keystroke 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1055 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 9 9 1058 IZ 1059 1060 lt 1061 96H 1062 gt 1063 J 1064 1065 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 1 keystroke in bold transmits only you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 11 10 Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits 11 16 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 11 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII Code 39 ASCII Value Encode Character Keystroke 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091
113. 56 prefix suffix values 5 23 6096 25 25 lt 4 5 Eds 12 72 radio communication 4 4 4 5 hosttypes 4 4 4 5 4 20 radio output 4 19 reconnect attempt 4 14 reconnect attempt interval 4 15 RS 232 baud rate scient n 8 7 8 16 check receive errors 8 11 dala DIES sco ES 8 10 default table 8 3 hardware handshaking 8 11 8 12 Index 4 2070 2090 Set Up Guide host serial response time out 8 15 host TYPOS user deuce ati a uas 8 6 intercharacter delay 8 17 Pally 224 tes bead es 8 9 RTS line state 8 16 software handshaking 8 13 8 14 stop bit select 8 10 8 16 Sample he Eti C 1 0 5 8 scan data options 5 24 scanner to cradle support 4 19 setdefaults 5 4 signature capture 6 11 signature capture height 6 13 signature capture JPEG quality 6 13 signature capture width 6 13 simulated
114. 6 8 Image Brightness Target White 6 9 JPEG Quality and Size Value i eire nter read eese trix asas e poker 6 9 Image File Format Selector e rtu actions EUR dE esa 6 10 Signature Capture MP 6 11 Output Fil Format 6 11 Signature Capture File Format Selector 22 6 12 Signature Capture abun 6 13 Signature Capture Height 1 iet tta bei nr die 6 13 Signature Capture JPEG Quality 22 6 13 Video View Finder ev cp ES 6 14 Chapter 7 Customizing the MT20X0 E EN 7 1 Customizing the Startup Program usus cate pre sette entes ta as het 7 2 Customizing the Home Screen View 7 3 Navigator xml File Content nai ec ettet etra 7 4 Customizing the Scan or Scan Inventory Program 7 5 Disabling 2000 Scanner Services 7 6 Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface 6 c Ho E TT 8 1 Connecting RS 232 Interface 8 2 RS 232 Parameter Defaults cm 8 3 RS 232 Host Parameters eue breiter cmd bp ries bu nep adr adusta x tav ndi nsee 8 4 RS 232 Host e 8 6 ccWPLrom
115. Bar Codes for numeric bar codes Top Pixel Address 0 479 Decimal Left Pixel Address 0 751 Decimal Bottom Pixel Address 0 479 Decimal Right Pixel Address 0 751 Decimal Imaging Preferences 6 9 Image Brightness Target White Parameter F h 86h Type Byte Range 1 240 This parameter sets the Target White value used in Snapshot Video and Video Viewfinder mode when using auto exposure White and black are defined as 255 decimal and 0 respectively Setting the value to the factory default of 180 sets the white level of the image to 180 To set the Image Brightness parameter scan Image Brightness below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value Leading zeros are required For example to set an Image Brightness value of 99 scan 0 9 9 See Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes for numeric bar codes 180 Image Brightness 3 digits JPEG Quality and Size Value JPEG Quality Parameter 31h If you selected JPEG Quality Selector scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 5 to 100 where 100 represents the highest quality image JPEG Quality Value Default 065 5 100 Decim
116. COM port emulation protocol on both device and cradle Retail CDC Configures the device to use the new Communication Device Class COM port emulation which supports Beep on BEL on cradle only Up Highlight 0 Up and press ENT to return to the Home screen Menu The Config screen menu has the same functionality as the Home screen menu providing access to User Settings Device Status Battery Status and an About screen Press the left soft key to display the Config screen menu press the up or down Scroll key to select an option press ENT to display the appropriate screen Press TAB to exit the menu and return to the Config screen See Menu on page 2 12 for detailed information about menu options 2 104 2070 2090 User Guide Utilities To access Utilities start at the Home screen scroll to Utilities and press ENT The Utilities screen displays aus GY Home Ti 1 File Explorer 2 Task Manager 210 Up Figure 2 139 Utilities Screen Within the utilities submenu the following programs are available for use by developers and integrators File Explorer Task Manger File Explorer Scroll to File Explorer on the Utilities screen and press ENT to display the File Explorer screen aus Tx Application Data BTExplorer Documents Network Platform Close Figure 2 140 File Explorer Screen File Explorer Functionality File Explorer allows the
117. Cause Action MCL Link Designer is not MCL application is not setup to use Use MCL menu and launch MCL Wait command communicating with device MCL Link USB driver is not installed Install drivers from product Web site USB driver cannot open Previous application has virtual COM port open Close the virtual COM port Device not paired to STB2078 cradle Pair device to cradle 15 16 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Appendix A Standard Default Parameters Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Parameter Radio Communications Default Page Number Bluetooth Host Host Type Cradle Host 4 5 Bluetooth Friendly Name Device name and serial number 4 7 Discoverable Mode General 4 7 Country Keyboard Types Country Code North American 4 8 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay 0 msec 4 10 CAPS Lock Override Disable 4 10 Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 4 11 Emulate Keypad Disable 4 11 Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable 4 12 Function Key Mapping Disable 4 12 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 4 13 Convert Case No Case Conversion 4 13 Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable 4 14 Reconnect Attempt Interval 30 sec 4 15 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID On Bar Code Data 4 17 Slave Mode Modes of Operation Point to Point 4 19 Point to Point Multipoint to Point 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 2 MT20
118. Composite TLC 39 Parameter FOh 73h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC 39 Enable TLC39 01h Disable TLC39 00h UPC Composite Mode Parameter 58h Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol Select UPC Never Linked to transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected Select UPC Always Linked to transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion If 2D is not present the UPC bar code does not transmit e f you select Autodiscriminate UPC Composites the device determines if there is a 2D portion then transmits the UPC as well as the 2D portion if present Never Linked 00h UPC Always Linked 01h Autodiscriminate UPC Composites 02h Symbologies 12 71 Composite Beep Mode Parameter FOh 8Eh To select the number of decode beeps when a composite bar code is decoded scan the appropriate bar code Single Beep After Both are Decoded 00h as Each Code is Decoded 01h Double Beep After Both are Decoded
119. Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes 3 When the device is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the device automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication For more information see Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 Radio Communications 4 21 Pairing Modes When operating with the cradle two modes of pairing are supported Locked Pairing Mode When a cradle is paired connected to the device or to seven devices in Multipoint to Point mode any attempt to connect a different device by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled page 4 22 is rejected The currently connected device s maintain connection In this mode you must set a Connection Maintenance Interval on page 4 23 In Locked Pairing Mode Multipoint to Point mode lock override is required for an eighth device to connect Unlocked Pairing Mode Pair connect a new device to a cradle at any time by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled This unpairs the previous device from the cradle In Unlocked Pairing Mode Multipoint to Point mode an eighth device connection succeeds by disconnecting a device that is already connected To set the cradle pairing mode scan the appropriate bar
120. Domain Name Fields selected in the Wireless Profile field The Password field is limited to 63 characters The Username and Domain Name fields combined are limited to 63 characters Note if any of the above field labels are red then entry is mandatory if the field labels are black then entry is optional Mask Password The Mask Password check box determines whether the password field is masked i e Check box displays only the 1 1 character or unmasked i e displays the entered text Check the box to unmask the password Uncheck the box to mask the password the default Status Field The status field indicates the reason the dialog is open Selecting OK sends the credentials to the WCS If there are no credentials entered a dialog displays asking the user to fill in all required fields Log Off only displays when a user is already logged on When Log Off is selected the user is prompted with three options Log Off Switch Users and Cancel Switching users logs off the current user and re initialize the login dialog to be displayed for when there is no user logged on Logging off logs off the current user and close the login dialog Selecting Cancel closes the Log Off dialog and returns to the Login dialog When the user is logged off the device only roams to profiles that do not require credentials or to profiles that were created with the credentials entered into the profile Selecting Cancel closes the dialog without loggi
121. Guide Establishing a Bluetooth BT Connection Using the STB2070 Cradle The STB2078 is a BT communication and charging cradle ActiveSync does not work with this cradle Exercise Connect BT using the STB2078 cradle Required equipment MT2000 STB2078 USB cable p n CBAUO 1 SO7ZAR 1 Connect the USB cable to the STB2078 cradle and to the PC do not apply power to the cradle before establishing communication Open the Scan item application Scan Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 Scan the Pair bar code in the well of the cradle The BT icon on the top left of the MT screen should fill in green Using the Scan Item Application with the STB2078 Cradle Scan item is an application that allows you to scan and transmit data from the MT2000 to the host Scan is similar to the default application loaded on the P370 470 scanners 1 Pair the MT2000 to the cradle using the steps in Establishing a Bluetooth BT Connection Using the STB2070 Cradle above Open the Scan application on the MT2000 On the host PC open a program such as HyperTerminal if using RS232 host or any text programs such as Notepad Wordpad Microsoft Word etc if using HID USB host to view the decoded data Using the MT2000 scan a product bar code The data should appear in the opened program Using the Scan Inventory Application with the STB2078 Cradle Scan Inventory is an application that allows you to scan and store data The user ini
122. IntelliStand 1 2 3 Connect the device to the host see the appropriate host chapter for information on host connections Insert the device in the IntelliStand by placing the front of the device into the stand s cup see Figure 3 6 Use the IntelliStand s adjustment knobs to adjust the height and angle of the device Center the symbol in the aiming pattern The entire symbol must be within the brackets Upon successful decode the device beeps and the LED turns green For more information on beeper and LED definitions see Table 3 1 and Table 3 2 3 8 2070 2090 User Guide Scanning Considerations Scanning is a simple matter of aim scan and decode However to optimize scanning performance consider the range and the scanning angle Range Any scanning device decodes well over a particular working range minimum and maximum distances from the bar code This range varies according to bar code density and scanning device optics Scanning within range brings quick and constant decodes scanning too close or too far away prevents decodes Move the device closer and further away to find the right working range for the bar codes being scanned However the situation is complicated by the availability of various integrated scanning modules The best way to specify the appropriate working range per bar code density is through a chart called a decode zone for each scan module A decode zone simply plots working range as
123. Link Keys OK Cancel Figure 2 135 Bluetooth Settings Discovery Screen To set and modify discovered devices 1 Tabto nquiry Length to set the amount of time the device takes to discover Bluetooth devices in the area 2 Tabto Name Discovery Mode and select either Automatic or Manual Discovers the friendly name of the remote device as opposed to the address Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 101 3 Tabto and select Delete Devices and or Delete Link Keys to delete all discovered devices and link keys J NOTE force BTExplorer to re discover devices in the area select Delete Devices Virtual COM Port Tab On the Favorites window Figure 2 128 use the keypad and select Device gt Settings gt Virtual COM Port BTExplorer Settings BTExplorer Settings Virtual COM Port Settings Connected coms Bluetooth Bluetooth COM 1 Rluetanth JAKAR Figure 2 136 Bluetooth Settings Virtual COM Port Screen To select the COM ports for Bluetooth communication select the appropriate Installed Port e COM4 Bluetooth enable or disable COM Port 4 e COM5 Bluetooth enable or disable COM Port 5 e COM9 Bluetooth enable or disable COM Port 9 e 21 Bluetooth enable or disable COM Port 21 e COM23 Bluetooth enable or disable COM Port 23 Profiles Tab On the Favorites window Figure 2 128 use the keypad and select Device Settings Profiles
124. MT2090 2 67 Transmit Power The Transmit Power drop down list contains different options for Ad Hoc and Infrastructure mode Automatic i e use the current AP settings and Power Plus use higher than the current AP settings are available for Infrastructure mode Adjusting the radio transmission power level enables the user to expand or confine the transmission coverage area Reducing the radio transmission power level reduces potential interference to other wireless devices that might be operating nearby Increasing the radio transmission power level increases the range at which other wireless devices can hear the radio s signal Transmit Power Automatic Current Operating Mode Infrastructure Figure 2 81 Transmit Power Dialog Box Infrastructure Mode Table2 16 Transmit Power Dialog Box Infrastructure Mode Field Description Automatic Select Automatic the default to use the AP power level Power Plus Select Power Plus to set the device transmission power one level higher than the level set for the AP The power level is set to conform to regulatory requirements Transmit Power Full Current Operating Mode Ad Hoc Figure 2 82 Transmit Power Dialog Box Ad Hoc Mode 2 68 2070 2090 User Guide Table 2 17 Power Transmit Options Ad Hoc Mode Field Description Full Select Full power for the highest transmission power level Select Full power when operating in highly reflective
125. OPOS JPOS Transmit Code ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Transmission Data Suffix Data Suffix Data Suffix Data Suffix Prefix Data Data Suffix Format Suffix Suffix CR 1013 CR 1013 CR 1013 CR 1013 ETX 1002 CR 1013 Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 Parity Even None Odd Odd Even None Hardware RTS CTS None RTS CTS RTS CTS None None Handshaking Option 3 Option 3 Option 3 Software None None None None Ack Nak None Handshaking Serial Response 9 9 Sec 2 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec Time out Stop Bit Select One One One One One One ASCII Format 8 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit Beep On lt BEL gt Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable RTS Line State High Low Low Low No data Low High to send Prefix None None None None STX 1003 None In the Nixdorf Mode B if CTS is low scanning is disabled When CTS is high scanning is enabled If you scan Nixdorf Mode without connecting the device to the proper host it may appear unable to scan If this happens scan a different RS 232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the device RS 232 Interface 8 5 RS 232 Host Parameters continued Selecting ICL Fujitsu Wincor Nixdorf Mode A Wincor Nixdorf Mode B OPOS JPOS Olivetti or Omron enables the transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 8 3 These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature Do not enable the
126. OS The device also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices HID USB Interface 9 3 To set up the device J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 9 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the device are the same 1 Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the host interface port on the cradle or device 2 Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal 3 Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 9 5 4 first installation when using Windows the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device driver To install this driver provided by Windows click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice The device powers up during this installation 5 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter If problems occur with the system see Troubleshooting on page 15 3 USB Parameter Defaults Table 9 1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 9 3 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences ho
127. Place the device in the charge only cradle with a 12V power supply The device should power on 2 Attach a cable to the device and connect it to a PC Wait at least two hours depending on the level of discharge for the device to acquire sufficient charge to boot the device During this period the device appears to be inoperative A complete charge of a fully discharged battery may take several hours See Battery Charging on page 1 14 If the device does not power up contact Motorola support See Battery Charging on page 1 14 If the device does not power up contact Motorola support Table 15 1 Problem Device emits aiming pattern but does not decode the bar code Maintenance and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the MT20X0 Continued Possible Causes Device is not programmed for the correct bar code type 1925 Possible Solutions Program the device to read that type of bar code See Chapter 12 Symbologies Bar code symbol is unreadable Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to determine if the bar code is defaced The symbol is not completely inside aiming pattern Move the symbol completely within the aiming pattern Scan window may be dirty Clean the scan window See Maintenance on page 15 1 Battery Charging Device does not boot when a USB cable is attached The device s battery is discharged Normal behavior if the battery is severely discharged
128. Rule 14 8 High High 2 UPC EAN 14 13 High High 3 Send all remaining data 14 27 High High 4 Send CTRL M 14 49 High High 5 Save Rule 14 9 High Low High Low If you make an error while entering this rule scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page 14 9 If you already saved the rule scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 14 9 Alternate Rule Sets You can group ADF rules into one of four alternate sets which you can turn on and off when needed This is useful to format the same message in different ways For example a Code 128 bar code contains the following information Class 2 digits Stock Number 8 digits Price 5 digits The bar code might look like this 245671243701500 where Class 24 Stock Number 56712437 Price 2 01500 Ordinarily data transmits as follows 24 class key 56712437 stock key 01500 enter key But when there is a sale send only the following 24 class key 56712437 stock key 14 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide and the cashier keys the price manually To implement this first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation such as Scan Rule Belongs to Set 1 When scanning a bar code of length 15 send the next 2 characters send the class key send the next 8 characters send the stock key send the data that remains send the Enter key The sale rule may look like this Scan Rule Belongs to Set 2 When scanning a bar code of length 15 send the next 2
129. Scanning on page 5 22 disable Picklist Mode when scanning a DPM bar code Picklist performance is not guaranteed for DPM bar codes Disabled Always 00h Enabled in Hand Held Mode 01h Enabled in Hands Free Mode 03h Enabled Always 02h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 17 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol Parameter 89h Use this option in presentation mode to prevent the beeper from continuously beeping when a symbol is left in the device s field of view It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 0 to 9 9 seconds The default interval is 0 5 seconds To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval in 0 1 second increments Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern Parameter FOh 32h This parameter only applies in Decode Mode Select Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during 1D bar code capture Disable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off 7 NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 5 16 enabled the decode aiming pattern flash
130. Table A 1 Set Factory Defaults Scan this bar code to restore the factory default values listed in Table A 1 This deletes any custom defaults set e Write to Custom Defaults Scan this bar code to set the current decoder settings as custom defaults Once set you can recover custom default settings by scanning Restore Defaults Set Defaults Set Factory Defaults Write to Custom Defaults User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 5 Host Mode Parameter F1h A4h Attribute 2 4 The 20 0 supports cable and Bluetooth data paths to send bar code data Only one data path can be active Scanning a parameter below determines the type of host interface to use for bar code data transmission n Cable Priority mode the 20 0 prioritizes a cable USB or RS 232 as the default data path for transmitting bar code data When a cable is not present the MT20X0 uses the programmed Bluetooth protocol to transmit the bar code data n Cable Only mode the 20 0 exclusively uses a cable USB or RS 232 as the data path for transmitting bar code data When a cable is not present a transmission error occurs when scanning a bar code Cable Only is not propagated to all connected devices f NOTE The Bluetooth radio is available for other applications such as BT Explorer n Wireless Only mode the 20 0 exclusively uses the programmed Bluetooth protocol to transmit bar code data When the user inserts a ca
131. The current signal strength measured in dBm is provided both as a numerical value and as a histogram Noise The current noise level measured in dBm is provided both as a numerical value and as a histogram SNR The current signal to noise ratio measured in dBm is provided both as a numerical value and as a histogram e Total Tx total number of pings sent is displayed numerically e Total Rx The total number of valid ping responses received is displayed numerically Lost The total number of pings that were lost is displayed numerically HT Times Four round trip times Last Average Minimum and Maximum are displayed in milliseconds e Rates For each of the 12 data rates the number of times that rate was used to transmit the ping is displayed as a percentage Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 89 Graphs A real time graph of any of the above statistics can be displayed by pressing ENT on the statistic Last RT Time ms X Figure 2 115 Graph Example Trace Route Trace Route traces a packet from a computer to a host showing how many hops the packet requires to reach the host and how long each hop takes The Trace Route utility identifies where the longest delays occur The Trace screen allows testing a connection at the network layer part of the IP protocol between the device and any other device on the network To open the Trace Route screen select Trace Route in the Wireless Diagnost
132. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol 3 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character The data packet supports the ECI protocol GS1 128 emulation Note UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules 1 Data packet is GS1 128 symbol i e data is preceded with 1 PDF417 0 Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 Micro PDF417 symbology specifications Note When this option is transmitted the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been invoked or whether data byte 92pgc has been doubled in transmission 1 Reader set to follow the ECI protocol Extended Channel Interpretation All data characters 92 are doubled 2 Reader set for Basic Channel operation no escape character transmission protocol Data characters 92 are not doubled Note When decoders are set to this mode unbuffered Macro symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences cannot be transmitted 3 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 4 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is in the range 908 909 5 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is in the range 910 911 Example A PDF417 bar code ABCD with no transmission protocol enabled is transmitted as JLAABCD Programming Reference 7 Table B 3 Modifie
133. User Guide Four Slot Battery Charger The SAC2000 4000CR four slot spare battery charger charges up to four single spare batteries The cradle can sit on a desktop or be mounted on a wall This document provides basic instructions for cradle set up and use For best performance fully charge the device battery before using the device for the first time To charge the device battery insert the battery in the cradle The battery begins charging when the LED indicator on the battery charger starts flashing green A complete charge of a fully discharged battery can take up to four hours Charge within the recommended temperature of 32 to 104 F 0 C to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 5 to 35 C ideal Only use Motorola battery pack P N 82 108066 01 rated 3 7V 2400mAh 8 88 Wh Features See Cradle Features on page 1 4 Inserting Batteries To insert batteries in the cradle align the connectors on the bottom of the battery with the battery charging connectors in the cradle Push down on the top of the battery until it clicks into place engaging the contacts in the cradle Figure 13 2 nserting Batteries Charging Batteries The battery begins charging when the green LED indicator flashes A complete charge of a fully discharged battery can take up to four hours using external power Accessories 13 9 LED Indicators Table 13 6 Four Slot Battery Charger LEDs LED Indication Flashing Green Battery LED Flashes when batt
134. are not merging If not using a USB cable select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connected to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values Feature Option Option Hex Value Indicates Default High Volume 00h 5 2 2070 2090 User Guide Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to set the beeper tone to high scan the High Frequency beeper tone bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 5 13 The device issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters such as Serial Response Time Out or Data Transmission Formats require scanning several bar codes See these parameter descriptions for this procedure Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter User Preferences Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults Table 5 1 lists defaults for user preferences parameters Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values s
135. backlight turns off when the device is not powered exclusively by battery power Press the right soft key Done to save changes and end the session 2 14 2070 2090 User Guide Date and Time With Date and Time highlighted press ENT to display the Date and Time screen 6 Date and Time Yx Date 8 2004 4 Time 4 25 23 PM 4 Figure2 6 Date and Time Screen e Press to toggle between Date and Time fields e Press the right or left Scroll key to move to sub fields within Date and Press the Up or Down Scroll key to change values Press the right soft key OK to save changes and end the session Press the left soft key Cancel to end the session without saving changes Time Zone With Time Zone highlighted press ENT to display the Time Zone screen a 6 Time Zone L Time Zone i DO Auto adjust Cancel OK Figure 2 7 Time Zone Screen e Press TAB to toggle between Time Zone and Auto adjust fields Press the Up or Down Scroll key to change the time zone Press the Space key see Space key on page 2 6 to check uncheck the Auto adjust box Press the right soft key OK to save changes and end the session Press the left soft key Cancel to end the session without saving changes Device Status Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 15 This screen displays information about the device model serial number Bluetooth MAC address and ADCSvcs version
136. bar code for non autodetected interfaces See the specific host chapter CAUTION f the device does not recognize the host disconnect the power supply then reconnect after connecting the host cable Supplying Power to the Cradle The cradle receives power from one of two sources An external power supply When connected to the host through an interface cable that supplies power The cradle detects whether the host or the external supply is supplying power It always draws power from the external supply when available regardless of the presence of power from a host Using the USB Interface to Supply Power When the cradle is connected to the host via the USB interface the USB port can power the cradle and an external power supply is not necessary Note that powering from a USB host charges the device at a slower rate than charging from an external power supply Additionally depending on the level of activity the device may not charge at all Getting Started 1 13 Insert the Device in the Cradle To insert the device in the cradle 1 Insert the device into the cradle top first 2 Push the handle until it clicks into place engaging the contacts in the cradle and device Figure 1 9 nserting the Device in the Single Slot Cradles J NOTE When inserting the device in a wall mounted cradle ensure the device s hook recesses engage the hooks on the wall mount adapter when applicable Removing the Device from a Vertica
137. bei rk pa 14 37 Remove Leading Zeros 14 37 Removal M 14 37 Pad Data with Spaces e c 14 38 XX MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Data with ZENS CR ames 14 42 cll ea 14 47 Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters 14 47 Control Characters on uncle bu tue edd CEU eer reer 14 47 Keyboard Characters 2 sia n no 14 52 Send AE T 14 66 Send Keypad Characters 44 4 100000000 nennen enn 14 71 Send Function on ac ie as E CUR m en Erde RU iene aces 14 76 egt nere doi 14 83 Send Graphic User Interface GUI 14 84 Turn On Off Rule Sets Uso 14 89 Alphanumeric aater 14 91 Chapter 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting VEO HOU RC E 15 1 DI ee I dd 15 1 MT20X 0 e 15 1 cole RM MC MEI Pe P 15 2 o
138. by hardware handshaking There are five options If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled hardware handshaking takes precedence None Select this to transmit data immediately The device expects no response from the host e ACK NAK If you select this option after transmitting data the device expects either an response from the host When it receives a NAK the device transmits the same data again and waits for either an ACK or NAK After three unsuccessful attempts to send data after receiving NAKs the device issues an error indication and discards the data The device waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time out to receive an ACK or NAK If the device does not get a response in this time it issues an error indication and discards the data There are no retries when a time out occurs e ENQ If you select this option the device waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data If it does not receive an ENQ within the Host Serial Response Time out the device issues an error indication and discards the data The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Time out to prevent transmission errors ACK NAK with ENQ This combines the two previous options For re transmissions of data due to a NAK from the host an additional ENQ is not required e XON XOFF An XOFF character turns the device transmission off until the device receives
139. characters send the class key send the next 8 characters send the stock key To switch between the two sets of rules program a switching rule that specifies the type of bar code to scan to switch between the rule sets For example in the case of the sale rule above the rule programmer wants the cashier to scan the bar code M before a sale To do this enter the following rule When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with M select rule set number 1 Program another rule to switch back When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with N turn off rule set number 1 Or include the switching back to normal rules in the sale rule When scanning a bar code of length 15 send the next 2 characters send the class key send the next 8 characters send the stock key turn off rule set 1 For optimal results scan the Disable Rule Sets bar code on page 14 10 after programming a rule belonging to an alternate rule set In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules enable or disable them by scanning the appropriate bar codes on page 14 10 Rules Hierarchy in Bar Codes The order of programming individual rules is important Program the most general rule first All programmed rules are stored in a buffer As they are programmed they are stored at the top of a rules list If you create three rules the list is configured as follows Third Rule Second Rule First Rule When you scan data
140. comprising 13 digits from EAN 13 UPC A or UPC E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol 4 EAN 8 data packet Example UPC A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as E00012345678905 Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit O Example A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789 is transmitted as X0123456789X ISSN EAN 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit O Example An ISSN EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as X0123456789X Code 11 0 Single check digit 1 Two check digits 3 Check characters validated but not transmitted GS1 DataBar No option specified at this time Always transmit 0 251 DataBar 14 Family 951 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application Identifier Note In GS1 128 emulation mode GS1 DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules i e 1 Example GS1 DataBar 14 bar code 0110012345678902 is transmitted as e00110012345678902 B 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Option EAN UCC Native mode transmission Composites Note UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules GS1 DataBar GS1 128 0 Standard data packet 2D portion of Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol P m i UEG composite separator character 2 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character
141. contains Set lengths for Code 128 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range vV NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types enter a leading zero for single digit numbers One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 128 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 128 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 128 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 128 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Lengt
142. databar limited security level 12 65 GS1 14_ 12 63 1815128 von x eed RB 12 26 hand held decode aiming pattern 5 17 HID CAPS lock override 4 10 HID country codes 4 8 HID function key mapping 4 12 HID ignore unknown characters 4 11 HID keyboard FN1 substitution 4 12 HID keyboard keystroke delay 4 10 host mode 5 csi veda 5 5 12 of 5 check digit verification 12 42 I20f 5 convert to 13 12 43 12 of 5 transmit check digit 12 42 IBM 468X 469X convert unknown to code 39 10 5 default parameters 10 3 ignore configuration directive 9 12 portaddress 10 4 illumination 5 18 6 5 image brightness target white 6 9 image cropping 6 7 image file format 6 10 6 12 imager scanner default table 6 2 interleaved20f5 12 39 convert to 13 12 43 Tarna Dare etn ERE 12 40 inverse UR oa wha ERA 12 55 ISBT 12622228 et dus 12 26 ISBT concatenation 12 27 12 28 ISBT concatenation redundancy 12 28 I
143. decode single ISBT symbols f you select Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation the device decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes immediately Disable ISBT Concatenation 00h Enable ISBT Concatenation 01h Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation 02h 12 28 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Check ISBT Table Parameter 42h The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in pairs If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this table Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated Enable Check ISBT Table 01h Disable Check ISBT Table 00h Symbologies 12 29 Code 39 Enable Disable Code 39 Parameter 00h To enable or disable Code 39 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 39 01h Disable Code 39 00h Enable Disable Trioptic Code 39 Parameter Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Trioptic Code 39 01h Disable Trioptic Code 39 00h
144. environments and areas where other devices could be operating nearby or when attempting to communicate with devices at the outer edge of a coverage area 30 mW Select 30 mW to set the maximum transmit power level to 30 mW The radio transmits at the minimum power required 15 mW Select 15 mW to set the maximum transmit power level to 15 mW The radio transmits at the minimum power required 5 mW Select 5 mW to set the maximum transmit power level to 5 mW The radio transmits at the minimum power required 1 mW Select 1 mW for the lowest transmission power level Use this level when communicating with other devices in very close proximity or in instances where little or no radio interference from other devices is expected Tab to Next gt and press ENT to display the Battery Usage dialog Battery Usage Use the Battery Usage dialog to select power consumption of the wireless LAN There are three settings available CAM Fast Power Save and MAX Power Save Battery usage cannot be configured in Ad Hoc profiles Profile Entry 6 Fast Power Save Max Power Save Cones Figure 2 83 Battery Usage Dialog Box v NOTE Power consumption is also related to the transmit power settings Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 69 Table2 18 Battery Usage Options Field Description CAM Continuous Aware Mode CAM provides the best network performance but yields the shortest battery life Fast Power Save Fas
145. having the same A ID or same I ID sort the PACs by desired ID type then select the parent item left most tree item to select the group Select Delete or pop up menu and a confirmation dialog displays Import PAC Usually PACs are automatically provisioned to the device over the air the first time EAP FAST authentication occurs For increased security an administrator may choose to manually provision the device with a PAC instead In this case the administrator must generate an appropriate PAC file manually using commands on the PAC Authority Once the PAC file is generated it must be manually transferred to the device s file system before it can be imported by the Manage PACs application To import a PAC select the Import button A dialog displays asking you to select the PAC file to be imported Folder All Folders Type File pac 6 24 8 37 peapmschpv 6 24 8 37 6 19 6 31 Figure 2 95 Open Screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 75 Navigate to the file to be imported and choose it The Import PAC dialog displays Import PAC P A C File M Hide Password Overwrite PAC if Exists Figure 2 96 mport PAC Dialog Box If the PAC file is password protected enter the password in the Password field If you clear the Hide Password check box the password is displayed in clear text as you type it To hide the password as you type it leave the Hide P
146. illumination to turn on during every image capture Disable illumination to prevent the device from using illumination Enabling illumination usually results in superior images The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases Enable Image Capture Illumination 01h Disable Image Capture Illumination 00h 6 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Snapshot Mode Timeout Parameter FOh 43h This parameter sets the amount of time the device remains in Snapshot Mode The device exits Snapshot Mode when you pull the trigger or when the Snapshot Mode Timeout elapses To set this timeout value scan the bar code below followed by a bar code from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes The default value is 0 which represents 30 seconds values increment by 30 For example 1 60 seconds 2 90 seconds etc Snapshot Mode Timeout Snapshot Aiming Pattern Parameter 2Ch Select Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern when in Snapshot Mode or Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern 01h Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern 00h Imaging Preferences 6 7 Image Cropping Parameter FOh 2Dh This parameter crops a captured image Select Disable Image Croppi
147. list BTExplorer Settings Services Security Discovery virtu gt BTExplorer Settings i Currently Installed Local Services i Serial Port 1 Figure 2 132 BTExplorer Settings Screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 99 Turn Bluetooth On Off To turn the Bluetooth radio off Open the BTExplorer application to display the Favorites window Figure 2 129 Home screen gt Config gt BTExplorer gt Device gt Disable Bluetooth To turn the Bluetooth radio on Open the BTExplorer application to display the Favorites window Figure 2 128 Home screen gt Config gt BTExplorer gt Device gt Enable Bluetooth Miscellaneous Bluetooth Settings Device Info Tab On the Favorites window Figure 2 128 use the keypad and select Device Settings Device Info BTExplorer Settings a Device Info BTExplorer Settings i Local Device Settings Device 20 Discoverable Mode 9 Connectable Mode Connectable OK Cancel Figure 2 133 Bluetooth Settings Device Info Screen Use the Device Info tab to configure the following Bluetooth connection modes e Device Name Displays the name of the device Discoverable Mode Select whether or not the device is discoverable by other Bluetooth devices e Connectable Mode Select whether or not the device is connectable by other Bluetooth devices Servic
148. milliwatt dBm Noise Level The background interference noise level in decibels per milliwatt dBm SNR The access point device Signal to Noise Ratio SNR of signal strength to noise interference in decibels per milliwatt dBm Association Count Displays the number of times the device has roamed from one AP to another AP MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the AP to which the device is connected Transmit Rate Displays the current rate of the data transmission The Current Profile screen displays basic information about the current profile and connection settings This screen updates every two seconds To open the Current Profile screen select Current Profile in the Wireless Status screen Wireless Status 2 Current Profile Profile Name 101 ESSID 101 Mode Infrastructure Security Mode Legacy Authentication None Encryption Open Channel 11 2462 MHz Country USA Transmit Power 25 mW Figure 2 109 Current Profile Screen Table 2 25 Current Profile Screen Field Description Profile Name Displays the name of the profile that the device is currently using to communicate with the AP ESSID Displays the current profile s ESSID Mode Displays the current profile s mode either Infrastructure or Ad Hoc See Operating Mode on page 2 44 Security Mode Displays the current profile s security mode See Table 2 7 on page 2 48 Authentication Displays the current profile s authent
149. needed scanning is disabled in this view and data must be edited manually Press TAB to move from field to field Use the keypad to edit the information in each field J NOTE By default the orange key is not active in the Edit Item window If necessary press the orange key to enable disable the alpha key pad Press the left soft key Cancel to cancel the edits and return to the View Inventory screen Press the right soft key OK to save the edits 6 Edit Item T Location Quantity Barcode 2455588 Cancel OK Figure 2 18 Edit Screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 23 Delete Item Ensure the item to delete is highlighted on the View Inventory screen then press Menu Delete Item The following confirmation dialog displays Press the left soft key No to cancel the delete and return to the View Inventory screen Press the right soft key Yes to delete the selected inventory item 6 Delete Item U Are you sure you want to delete the selected item No Yes Figure 2 19 Delete Dialog Delete All On the View Inventory screen press Menu Delete All The following confirmation dialog displays Press the left soft key No to cancel the delete and return to the View Inventory screen Press the right soft key Yes to delete all inventory items listed 6 Delete U Are you sure you want to delete ALL the items Figure 2 20 Delete All Dialog Transmit Selecting Transmit
150. no Function code 1 in first symbol position 1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position 2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position Example A Code EAN 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC in the first position AIMID is transmitted as C1AIMID 120f5 0 No check digit processing 1 Reader has validated check digit 3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit Example An 2 of 5 bar code without check digit 4123 is transmitted as 104123 Codabar 0 No check digit processing 1 Reader has checked check digit 3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission Example A Codabar bar code without check digit 4123 is transmitted as F04123 Code 93 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit O Example A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as G0012345678905 MSI 0 Check digits are sent 1 No check digit is sent Example An MSI bar code 4123 with a single check digit checked is transmitted as M14123 Programming Reference 5 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type Option Value Option D 2 of5 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit O Example A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123 is transmitted as 1804123 UPC EAN 0 Standard data packet in full EAN format i e 13 digits for UPC A UPC E and EAN 13 not including supplemental data 1 Two digit supplemental data only 2 Five digit supplemental data only 3 Combined data packet
151. other than None 802 1x authentication is used and the keys are automatically generated Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 61 Table2 11 Encryption Options Encryption Description Open Select Open the default when no data packet encryption is needed over the network Selecting this option provides no security for data transmitted over the network WEP 40 40 24 Select WEP 40 40 24 to use 64 bit key length WEP encryption the other 24 bits are generated automatically If WEP 40 40 24 is selected other controls appear that allow you to enter keys If the Use Passkey check box is selected the user is asked to enter a pass phrase between 4 and 32 characters long on the next page Once the profile is saved the pass phrase is converted into a key and the pass phrase is lost Also if a passkey is used only one key can be set If the Use Passkey check box is not selected then the user can enter up to four hexadecimal keys on the next page Which key is to be entered is determined by selecting a key in the Key Index drop down menu The key index chosen also selects the key used for encryption Note that Fusion sets default values for these keys so that entry is not absolutely required but remember that the keys must match the AP WEP 104 104 24 Select WEP 104 104 24 to use a 128 bit key length WEP encryption If WEP 104 104 24 is selected other controls appear that allow you to enter keys If the Use Passkey check box is selected
152. pair up to seven devices to one cradle To use this feature scan the multipoint bar code in Multipoint to Point Communication on page 4 19 The cradle includes pairing bar codes on both its front and back To pair the device with the cradle scan a pairing bar code A high low high low beep sequence followed by a low high beep sequence indicates successful pairing and connection to the remote device A long low long high beep sequence indicates unsuccessful pairing Y NOTE The pairing bar code that connects the device to a cradle is unique to each cradle Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes Lost Connection to Host If scanned data does not transmit to the cradle s host ensure that all cables are firmly inserted and the power supply is connected to an appropriate AC outlet if applicable If scanned data still does not transmit to the host reestablish a connection with the host Disconnect the power supply from the cradle Disconnect the host interface cable from the cradle Wait three seconds Reconnect the host interface cable to the cradle Reconnect the power supply to the cradle if the host requires Reestablish pairing with the cradle by scanning the pairing bar code gt Radio Communications The device can communicate with remote devices via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support or by pairing with a cradle For radio communication parameters detailed information about operational modes
153. parameters 6 2 infrastructure 2 45 installation 1 11 InteliStand 3 7 13 2 interfaces supported via communication with a cradle 1 10 via communication without cradle 1 10 interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes check digit verification 12 42 convert to 13 12 43 transmit check digit 12 42 J JPEG image options size quality eee e Ge Ra Re 6 9 K keyboard wedge connection 11 2 default parameters 11 3 parameters 11 4 keypad functionality 2 3 keypad mapping 4 12 9 14 11 10 keypad multi tap configuration 2 7 Korean of 5barcodes 12 54 L LED charging ep 1 13 LED 5 3 3 LED indicators miscellaneous information 13 5 single slot charge 13 5 single slot multi interface 13 5 lock override ae D XX 4 21 locked pairing 4 21 4 23 low power 4 14 M MAINTENANCE unused a re e Ya eR es 15 1 master 4 4 4 6 4 14 4 20 maxicode ba
154. power too soon Ensure cradle is receiving power Ensure device is seated correctly If a device battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge the Li ion battery Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery Device is not fully seated in the cradle Remove and re insert the device into the cradle ensuring it is correctly seated Extreme battery temperature Battery does not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F 0 C or above 104 F 40 C During data communications no data was transmitted or transmitted data was incomplete Device removed from cradle during communications Replace device in cradle and retransmit Incorrect cable configuration See the system administrator Communications software is not installed or configured properly Perform setup as described in Chapter 4 Radio Communications Device does not boot when placed in the cradle The 5 battery is discharged Normal behavior if the battery is severely discharged The battery must charge at a reduced charge rate until the battery acquires sufficient charge to boot the device This can take up to two hours depending on the level of battery discharge This can be avoided by powering the cradle with the optional external power supply 1553 15 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Single Slot Charge Only
155. profiles Since the token expires after a short period the user is prompted for credentials even when credentials have already been entered and cached for that profile The At Connect caching option has a slightly different function If the user leaves the At Connect box unchecked then the Fusion software tries to authenticate without prompting the user for a new token If Fast Session Reconnect is enabled on the RADIUS server and the device was previously connected and authenticated using the same profile then the device may be able to reconnect without going through the entire authentication process In this case new credentials are not required even though the old ones have expired and the Fusion software does not prompt the user for new credentials If Fast Session Reconnect is not enabled on the RADIUS server or if the user selected the At Connect check box then the user is prompted to enter new credentials Note also that the On Resume caching option is always forced to checked for profiles where the credentials expire This is necessary because the Fusion software does not support the use of Fast Session Reconnect across a suspend resume cycle therefore new credentials are always needed Selecting the At Time check box displays the Time Cache Options dialog Profile T Time Cache Options Figure 2 71 Time Cache Options Dialog Box 1 Tab to the Interval radio button and press ENT to check credentials at a set ti
156. require a slower transmission of data No Delay Medium Delay 20 msec Long Delay 40 msec 11 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Intra Keystroke Delay Enable this to insert an additional delay between each emulated key depression and release This sets the Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well Enable Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes on page 11 5in a Microsoft operating system environment Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 9 Caps Lock On Enable this to emulate keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed Enable Caps Lock On Disable Caps Lock On Caps Lock Override If you enable this on AT or AT Notebook hosts the device ignores the state of the Caps Lock key Therefore an A in the bar code transmits as an regardless of the state of the keyboard s Caps Lock key Enable Caps Lock Override Disable Caps Lock Override NOTE f both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled Caps Lock Override takes precedence 11 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Convert Wedge Data Enable this to convert all bar code data to the selected case Convert to Upper Case
157. rule always applies ADF never applies the default rules ADF Bar Codes Table 14 1 lists the bar codes available through ADF Table 14 1 ADF Bar Codes Parameter Page Number Special Commands 14 8 Pause Duration 14 8 Begin New Rule 14 8 Save Rule 14 9 Erase 14 9 Quit Entering Rules 14 9 Disable Rule Set 14 10 Criteria 14 11 Code Types 14 11 Code Lengths 14 18 1 Character 6 Characters 14 18 7 Characters 13 Characters 14 19 14 Characters 20 Characters 14 20 21 Characters 27 Characters 14 21 28 Characters 30 Characters 14 22 Specific String at Start 14 22 Specific String Any Location 14 23 Any Message OK 14 23 14 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 14 1 ADF Bar Codes Continued Parameter Page Number Numeric Keypad 14 24 Rule Belongs To Set 14 26 Actions 14 27 Send Data 14 27 Send Data Up To Character 14 27 Send Next Character 14 27 Send All Data That Remains 14 27 Send Next 2 Characters Send Next 20 Characters 14 27 Move Cursor 14 31 Send Pause 14 32 Skip Ahead 14 33 Skip Back 14 34 Send Preset Value 14 36 Remove All Spaces 14 37 Crunch All Spaces 14 37 Stop Space Removal 14 37 Remove Leading Zeros 14 37 Stop Zero Removal 14 37 Pad Data with Spaces 14 38 Pad Data with Zeros 14 42 Beeps 14 47 Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters 14 47 Keyboard
158. scanning a Reconnect Attempt Interval When Beep on Reconnect Attempt is enabled the device emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnect attempt is in progress If the Reconnect Attempt Interval is adjusted to a longer period of time such as 30 minutes the device emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds for 30 minutes providing an out of range indicator Radio Communications 4 19 MT20X0 s To Cradle Support Modes of Operation The charging cradle with radio supports two radio communication modes of operation allowing the device to communicate wirelessly e Point to Point Multipoint to Point Point to Point Communication In Point to Point communication mode the cradle allows one device to connect to it at a time In this mode the device is paired to the cradle either by insertion into the cradle if pairing on contacts is enabled page 4 22 or by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle Communication can be locked unlocked default or in a lock override state see Pairing Modes on page 4 21 In locked mode locking intervals must be set by scanning a connection maintenance interval bar code beginning on page 4 23 To activate this mode of operation scan Point to Point Multipoint to Point Communication In Multipoint to Point communication mode up to seven devices can be paired to one cradle To activate this mode the first device connected to the cradle must scan the Multipoint to Point bar code This mode al
159. sets on and off Turn On Rule Set 1 Turn On Rule Set 2 Turn On Rule Set 3 Turn On Rule Set 4 14 90 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Turn On Off Rule Sets continued Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off Turn Off Rule Set 1 Turn Off Rule Set 2 Turn Off Rule Set 3 Turn Off Rule Set 4 Advanced Data Formatting 14 91 Alphanumeric Keyboard Space Dash 14 92 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued amp Advanced Data Formatting 14 93 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued lt gt 14 94 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued 1 Underscore Advanced Data Formatting 14 95 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued NOTE Do not confuse the numeric bar codes below with those on the numeric keypad 0 1 2 3 4 TAA 5 14 96 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued 6 7 8 TIL 9
160. state of the Serial Host RTS line Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High RTS line state Host Low RTS Host High RTS Beep on BEL If you enable this parameter the device issues beep when it detects a BEL character on the RS 232 serial line BEL indicates an illegal entry or other important event On lt BEL gt Character Enable Do Not On lt BEL gt Character Disable RS 232 Interface 8 17 Intercharacter Delay This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions Minimum 0 msec Low 25 msec Medium 50 msec High 75 msec Maximum 99 msec 8 18 2070 2090 User Guide Nixdorf Options If you selected Mode B this indicates when the device and turns its LED after decode Normal Operation Beep LED immediately after decode Beep LED After Transmission Beep LED After CTS Pulse Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize Select Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters The device issues no error beeps Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send
161. that device for a period of time defined by the Connection Maintenance Interval If the cradle is supporting the maximum three devices and one device disconnects a fourth device cannot pair to the cradle during this interval To connect another device either wait until the connection maintenance interval expires then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle with the new device or scan Lock Override page 4 21 with the new device then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle lt J NOTE When the cradle supports the maximum three devices it stores the remote pairing address of each device in memory regardless of the device condition e g discharged battery When you want to change the devices paired to the cradle unpair each device currently connected to the cradle by scanning the Unpairing bar code prior and reconnect each appropriate device by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle Connection Maintenance Interval options are e 15 minutes 30 minutes One hour Two hours Four hours e Eight hours 24 hours Indefinitely 4 24 2070 2090 User Guide Considerations The system administrator determines the Connection Maintenance Interval A shorter interval allows new users to gain access to abandoned connections more quickly but causes problems if users leave the work area for extended periods A longer interval allows existing users to leave the work area for longer periods of time but ties up the system for new users
162. that it transmits data the same way the data is scanned into the MT For example if the user scans bar codes 123 456 ABC 123 012 ABC in this order the application transmits the bar codes to the host in the same order 123 456 ABC 789 123 012 ABC Same data is not grouped or alphabetized To access Simple Inventory start at the Home screen scroll to Simple Inventory and press ENT Simple Inventory Quantity 1 ca Menu Close Figure 2 24 Simple Inventory Screen Default View Item When the Simple Inventory screen displays for the first time the cursor defaults to the tem field Scan a bar code or use the keypad to enter an SKU or bar code to transmit to the host PC The default symbology type is Code 128 Quantity If a quantity is required it must be entered prior to scanning or entering data in the tem field Use the Up or Down Scroll key to move from one field to another Enter data as necessary Quantity defaults to a value of one to transmit one bar code to the host PC Scroll to Quantity and use the keypad to enter the quantity of SKUs or bar code data to transmit to the host PC 1 to 99999 IMPORTANT Quantity must be entered prior to scanning or entering data in the field Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 27 Menu Press the left soft key to display the Menu am Simple Inventory Quan EE mm View Inventory El Save Inventory amp Options
163. the Log On Off command Credential caching options only apply to a profile when credentials are entered through the login dialog This includes using the Log On Off command to log on to a profile for which the credentials were directly entered into the profile the username password fields left blank Prompt For Login at At Connect Figure 2 70 Prompt for Login at Dialog Box If the device does not have the credentials a username and password must be entered If the device has the credentials previous entered via a login dialog it uses these credentials unless the caching options require the device to prompt for new credentials If credentials were entered via the profile the device does not prompt for new credentials except for profiles where the credentials expire such as EAP GTO token profiles Table 2 10 lists the caching options Table 2 10 Cache Options Option Description At Connect Select this option to have device prompt for credentials whenever it tries to connect to the profile Deselect this to use the cached credentials to authenticate If the credentials are not cached the user is prompted to enter credentials This option only applies when the user has previously logged in to the profile On Resume Selecting this re authenticates an authenticated user when a suspend resume occurs Once re authenticated the user is prompted for credentials If the user does not enter the same credentials that were enter
164. the appropriate bar code below Enable Chinese 2 of 5 01h Disable Chinese 2 of 5 00h Korean 3 of 5 Enable Disable Korean 3 of 5 Parameter F1h 45h To enable or disable Korean 3 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below J NOTE The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6 Enable Korean 3 of 5 01h Disable Korean 3 of 5 00h 12 58 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Inverse 1D Parameter F1h 4Ah This parameter sets the 1D inverse decoder setting Options are Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular 1D bar codes only Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse 1D bar codes only Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes Regular 00h Inverse Only 01h Inverse Autodetect 02h Symbologies 12 59 Postal Codes US Postnet Parameter 59h To enable or disable US Postnet scan the appropriate bar code below Enable US Postnet 01h Disable US Postnet 00h US Planet Parameter 5Ah To enable or disable US Planet scan the appropriate bar code below Enable US Planet 01h Disable US Planet 00h
165. the following bar codes to honor or ignore a code type enable disable directive All directives are still acknowledged as if they were processed Honor USB Ignore Type Directive Ignore USB Ignore Type Directive Emulate Keypad Enable this to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad For example ASCII A transmits as ALT make 0 6 5 ALT Break Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation USB Interface 9 13 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Enable this to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad as ISO characters which have a leading zero For example ASCII A transmits as ALT MAKE 0 0 6 5 ALT BREAK Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device Enable this to replace any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a user selected Key Category and value see FN1 Substitution Values on page 5 26 to set the Key Category and K
166. to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values Indicates Default Enable UPC A Feature Option 01h Option Hex Value Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to transmit bar code data without the UPC A check digit simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC A Check Digit on page 12 14 The device issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters such as Set Length s for D 2 of 5 require scanning several bar codes See the individual parameter such as Set Length s for D 2 of 5 for this procedure 12 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter Symbology Parameter Defaults Table 12 1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts and miscellaneous default parameters Table 12 1 Parameter Defaults
167. to a value of one and transmits one SKU or bar code Press the up Scroll key to access the Quantity field enter a quantity using the keyboard Scan a bar code or enter an SKU bar code manually and press ENT The data transmits x times where x the quantity entered with a programmable delay between each transmit e Select Menu gt Options to set the transmit format see Menu on page 2 18 Quantity Enter the quantity of SKUs or bar code data to transmit to the host PC 1 to 99999 Quantity defaults to a value of one and transmits one bar code Item The tem field is highlighted by default Scan a bar code or use the numeric keys to manually enter an SKU or bar code The default symbology type is Code 128 2 18 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Menu Press the left soft key to display the Menu 6 Scan Item U Quantity 1 amp Options About Close Menu Figure 2 12 Scan Screen Menu Options Scroll to Options and press ENT to display the options screen to set transmit bar code data options Options fx Me Options Transmit lt 4 Separate Transmit Together Delay 10 ms Delimiter Barcode Code128 Barcode Code128 Clear Delay 2 s Clear Delay 2 s Cancel Done Cancel Done Transmit Separate Transmit Together Figure 2 13 Scan Screen Menu Options e Transmit When you enter a quantity of two or more on the Scan Item screen
168. to set a decode redundancy value Next scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 12 14 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Parameter 0 Select an output format when reporting UPC EAN JAN bar codes with supplementals with AIM ID enabled e Separate UPC EAN with supplementals transmit as lt 0 or 4 gt lt data gt E lt 1 or 2 gt supp data Combined EAN 8 with supplementals transmit as JE4 lt data gt E lt 1 or 2 gt supp data All other UPC EAN with supplementals transmit as lt gt Separate 00h Combined 01h Transmit UPC A Check Digit Parameter 28h The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC A check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC A Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UPC A Check Digit 00h Symbologies 12 15 Transmit UPC E Check Digit Para
169. user to perform basic file system operations Within the application use the Menu to Search for files Rename files Delete files Create folders Launch programs with an exe extension J NOTE Files with bat Ink and cab extensions are not supported To launch these file types use Windows inkwiz exe Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 105 File Explorer Keypad Usage Enter key Drills down one level when a folder is selected attempts to execute an exe file Up Down keys Scrolls up and or down in a list Right Left keys Pages up and or down Task Manager Scroll to Task Manager on the Utilities screen and press ENT to display the Task Manager screen 563 Task Manager Ji CommLoader exe 30agent exe Menu Close Figure 2 131 Task Manager Screen The Task Manager allows users to perform simple program management operations such as Viewing running programs tasks Terminating running programs tasks Switching to running programs tasks 2 106 2070 2090 User Guide Resetting the MT20X0 If the device stops responding to input reset it There are two types of resets warm boot and cold boot A warm boot restarts the device by closing all running programs All data that is not saved is lost A cold boot also restarts the device but erases all stored records and entries from RAM In addition it returns formats preferences and other settings to the factory default settings Perf
170. 0 ALT Z Table 11 4 Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set GUI Keys Keystrokes 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI O 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI 5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 19 Table 11 4 Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set Continued GUI Keys Keystrokes 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUI A 3066 GUI B 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUI E 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUI J 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUI S 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z 11 20 2070 2090 User Guide Table 11 5 Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015 F15 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 21 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 Table 11 6 Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set Keystroke 6042 5 6043 6044 undefined 6045 Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 21 Table 11 6 Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set Continued 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 6051
171. 0 Key Send PF22 Key Send PF24 Key Advanced Data Formatting 14 83 Send Function Key continued Send PF26 Key Send PF27 Key Send PF28 Key Send PF29 Key Send PF30 Key Send Right Control Key The Send Right Control Key action sends a tap press and release of the Right Control Key Send Right Control Key 14 84 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters The Send Graphic User Interface Character actions taps the specified key while holding the System Dependent Graphic User Interface GUI Key The definition of the Graphic User Interface key depends on the attached system Send GUI 0 Send GUI 1 Send GUI 2 Send GUI 3 Send GUI 4 Send GUI 5 Advanced Data Formatting 14 85 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued Send GUI 6 TL Send GUI 7 Send GUI 8
172. 1 0 encoding utf 8 lt navigator gt lt title gt Navigator lt title gt lt show_images gt true lt show_images gt lt show_numbers gt true lt show_numbers gt lt allow_exit gt false lt allow_exit gt lt menu gt lt item gt lt name gt Scan Item lt name gt lt command gt Windows ScanItem exe lt command gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt Scan Inventory lt name gt lt command gt Windows ScanInventory exe lt command gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt MCL lt name gt lt command gt application MCL startmcl exe lt command gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt Image Viewer lt name gt lt command gt Windows ImagerSampleMT exe lt command gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt Config lt name gt lt menu gt lt item gt lt name gt Scanner Settings lt name gt lt command gt Windows Settings exe lt command gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt Rapid Deployment lt name gt lt command gt Windows rdclient exe lt command gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt MSP Agent lt name gt lt command gt windows 30agent exe U lt command gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt BT Explorer lt name gt lt command gt Platform BTEXPLORER BTExplorer exe lt command gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt Configure USB lt name gt lt command gt Windows USBFunctionSwitch exe lt command gt lt item gt lt menu gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt Uti
173. 2 of 5 continued Matrix 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Default 14 Matrix 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths Matrix 2 of 5 Length Within Range Matrix 2 of 5 Any Length 12 56 2070 2090 User Guide Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter F1h 6Eh The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 01h Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 00h Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter F1h 6Fh Scan a bar code below to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 00h Symbologies 12 57 Chinese 2 of 5 Enable Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Parameter 98h To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5 scan
174. 5 13 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Table 15 7 Troubleshooting the Four Slot Spare Battery Cradle Symptom Charge LEDs do not light when batteries are inserted Possible Cause Cradle is not receiving power Action Ensure the power cable is connected securely to both the cradle and to AC power Battery is not seated correctly in the cradle Remove and re insert the battery ensuring it is correctly seated Extreme battery temperature Battery does not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F 0 C or above 104 F 40 C Battery is not charging Battery was removed from cradle or cradle was unplugged from AC power too soon Ensure cradle is receiving power Ensure battery is seated correctly If a battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge the Li ion battery Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery Battery is not fully seated in the cradle Remove and re insert the battery into the cradle ensuring it is correctly seated Extreme battery temperature Battery does not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F 0 C or above 104 F 40 C Cables Table 15 8 Troubleshooting Cables Symptom Device charge LED does not light when device is connected Possible Cause Cable is not receiving power 15 14 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Action Ensure the power
175. 70 MT2090 User Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Page Number Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only Enable 4 20 Pairing Modes Unlocked 4 20 Pairing on Contacts Disable 4 20 Connection Maintenance Interval 15 min 4 23 Authentication Disable 4 26 Variable Pin Code Static 4 27 Encryption Disable 4 28 User Preferences Set Default Parameter Set Defaults 5 4 Host Mode Cable Priority 5 5 Decode Pager Motor Enable Disable 5 6 Parameter Bar Code Scanning Enable 5 7 Scan Angle Wide 5 8 Adaptive Scanning Enable 5 9 Adaptive Scanning Ambient Light Interference 5 10 Interference Suppression Mode Suppression Auto Detection Adaptive Scanning Wide 5 11 Interference Suppression Scan Angle Beep After Good Decode Enable 5 12 Beeper Tone Medium 5 13 Beeper Volume High 5 14 Hand Held Trigger Mode Standard Level 5 15 Picklist Mode Disabled Always 5 16 Decode Session Timeout 9 9 Sec 5 15 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol 0 5 Sec 5 17 Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern Enable 5 17 Parameter Pass Through Disable 5 18 Decoding Illumination Enable 5 18 Batch Mode No Batch Mode 5 20 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters 3 Table A 1 Standard Default
176. 8 2009 Initial release 02 Rev A 9 2009 Updates Keypad battery information accessories 03 Rev 10 2011 Updates USB cable usage with ActiveSync USB French Belgian Windows bar code fix device charging LED update new screen shots Additions Scan to IP ESD dongle information FIPS Inverse 1D Multi tap Uppercase First Feature Code Types Aztec Datamatrix Maxicode QR code MicroPDF Removed Patent information 04 Rev A 2 2013 Updates Static CDC is enabled by default Additions USB Transmission Speed Parameters Polling Interval Fast HID Keyboard Quick Keypad Emulation with note about re enumerating the scanner GS1 Databar Limited Security level bar codes Enable Disable USB HID over STB2000 contact DPM scanning New DPM graphic to Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Pattern vi MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Change Date Description 05 RevA 2 2014 Updates French Belgian Windows bar code Additions Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop Characters Detection bar codes ADF bar codes Move Cursor Past Specific String Move Cursor To Specific String and Replace Move Cursor To Last Occurrence of String and Replace All Skip End Australia Post Format bar code Composite Beep Mode bar code ISBT Concatenation Redundancy bar code USB Ignore Beep Directive bar code USB Ignore Type Directive bar code 06 RevA 6 2014 Additions Scan Angle Adaptiv
177. 90 User Guide Battery WARNING Do not store the device with the battery installed Doing so long term may cause irreversible A harm to the battery Always store the battery removed from the device If a battery is installed during long term storage it may discharge to point at which it cannot be recovered Even when stored separately from device it is important to follow industry standard guidelines When batteries are stored over a year battery cell manufacturers advise that some irreversible deterioration in overall battery quality may occur To minimize this loss they recommend storing batteries half charged in a dry cool place between 41 and 77 5 and 25 the cooler the better Batteries should be charged to half capacity at least once a year In order to charge a battery to half capacity take a fully discharged battery and charge it for two hours If an electrolyte leakage is observed avoid any contact with the affected area and properly dispose of the battery Cradles Although the cradles are water and dust resistant do not expose them to rain or moisture for an extended period of time In general treat the cradles as you would a pocket calculator or other electronic instrument Do not drop the cradles or subject them to strong impact e Protect the cradles from temperature extremes Do not leave them in a car on a hot day and keep them away from heat sources Do not store or use the cradles in any locatio
178. AN Supplementals on page 12 10 12 22 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide UCC Coupon Extended Code Parameter 55h Enable this parameter to decode UPC A bar codes starting with digit 5 EAN 13 bar codes starting with digit 99 and UPC A GS1 128 Coupon Codes UPCA EAN 13 and GS1 128 must be enabled to scan all types of Coupon Codes Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code 01h Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code 00h NOTE See UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12 13 to control autodiscrimination of the GS1 128 right half of a coupon code Coupon Report Parameter F1h DAh Traditional coupon symbols old coupon symbols are composed of two bar codes UPC EAN and Code128 A new coupon symbol is composed of a single Databar Expanded bar code The new coupon format offers more options for purchase values up to 999 99 and supports complex discount offers such as a second purchase requirement An interim coupon symbol also exists that contains both types of bar codes UPC EAN and Databar Expanded This format accommodates both retailers that do not recognize or use the additional information included in the new coupon symbol as well as those who can process new coupon symbols Scan a bar code below to select one of the following options for decoding coupon symbols Old Coupon Symbols Scan
179. Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 11 1 Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC AT amp IBM PC Compatibles 11 4 Country Types Country Codes North American 11 5 Ignore Unknown Characters Transmit 11 7 Keystroke Delay No Delay 11 7 Intra Keystroke Delay Disable 11 8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Disable 11 8 Emulation Caps Lock On Disable 11 9 Caps Lock Override Disable 11 9 Convert Wedge Data No Convert 11 10 Function Key Mapping Disable 11 10 FN1 Substitution Disable 11 11 Send and Make Break Send 11 11 11 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Types Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below IBM PC AT amp IBM PC Compatibles IBM AT Notebook Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 5 Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type If your keyboard type does not appear see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 11 8 North American German Windows French Windows
180. Bluetooth services and settings as well as to establish connections to other Bluetooth devices i NOTE ADCServices must be disabled in order to use BTExplorer To launch BTExplorer 1 From the main menu navigate to and select Config 2 Select BTExplorer lf a previous connection was established the Favorites window displays see Figure 2 128 on page 2 97 If no previous connections were established the following window displays the New Connection Wizard New Connection Wizard Welcome to the New Connection Wizard Select an action from the list below using the up and down arrows to scroll through the choices xplore Services on Remote Device Search For Bluetooth devices and discover the services they provide 3KCancel bksp s Next Figure 2 124 BTExplorer New Connection Wizard Screen Establish a New Connection The Wizard provides a simple step by step process to discover and connect to Bluetooth devices To discover services on a remote device and establish a serial port connection 1 Onthe New Connection Wizard window Figure 2 124 use the keypad and select one of the following service options from the drop down list Explore Service on Remote Device Pair with Remote Device Active Sync via Bluetooth Browse Files on Remote Device e Connect to Printer Send or Exchange Objects Associate Serial Port J NOTE f you select Active Sync via Bluetooth ensure that the Bluetooth
181. Catch Note The accessory port is not available for use at this time The device is not water sealed if the accessory port cover is removed WARNING Never connect an Ethernet or phone cable to the host interface port Charge Communication Contacts Hook Recesses for Wall Mount Cradle Figure 1 1 72070 2090 1 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Cradle Features Single Slot Front View and Connections 4 Horizontal Desk Mounting Cup Pairing Bar Code Bluetooth cradles only Note An additional Pairing Bar Code is affixed under the Power USB Host Connector Connector J NOTE The functionality of the USB connection to a host PC varies by cradle type For the single slot charge only cradle the USB connection can be used with a device in the cradle for ActiveSync only The charge only cradle LED does not light when powered off USB only Charge Communication Contacts Figure 1 2 Single Slot Cradle Connections Pairing Bar Code Getting Started 1 5 Single Slot Back View Mounting Forklift Bracket 1 Forklift Bracket Screw Hole Screw Hole Cable Ferrite Hook Power Cable Groove USB Host Cable Cup Groove Release Ethernet or phone cable to the host interface port WARNING Never connect an Power Port Desk Mount Forklift Bracket Setting Screw Hole Wall Mount Setting Wall Mount Conversion Dial Mounting Key Hole 1 Used to fasten
182. Characters 14 52 Send ALT Characters 14 66 Send Keypad Characters 14 71 Send Function Key 14 76 Send F1 Key Send F24 Key 14 76 Send PF1 Key Send PF30 Key 14 79 Send Right Control Key 14 83 Advanced Data Formatting 14 7 Table 14 1 ADF Bar Codes Continued Parameter Page Number Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters 14 84 Send GUI 0 Send GUI 9 14 84 Send GUI A Send GUI Z 14 85 Turn On Off Rule Sets 14 89 Alphanumeric Keyboard 14 91 Space 14 91 0 9 14 95 A Z 14 96 Cancel 14 100 End of Message 14 100 a z 14 100 14 104 14 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Special Commands Pause Duration Use this parameter along with Send Pause on page 14 32 to insert a pause in the data transmission Set the pause by scanning a two digit number i e two bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes in 0 1 second intervals For example scanning bar codes 0 and 1 inserts a 0 1 second pause 0 and 5 inserts a 0 5 second delay To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Pause Duration Begin New Rule Scan the bar code below to start entering a new rule Begin New Rule Advanced Data Formatting 14 9 Save Rule Scan the bar code below to save the rule Save Rule Erase Use these bar codes to erase cr
183. Connector Keyboard Connector Female DIN Keyboard Connector Figure 11 1 Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y cable NOTE Connect a power supply to the cradle not shown for fast charging To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y cable NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 11 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the device are the same 1 Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector 2 Attach the modular connector of the Y cable to the cable interface port on the cradle Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y cable to the keyboard port on the host device Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y cable to the keyboard connector If needed attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y cable Ensure that all connections are secure Turn on the host system on FP Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host Types on page 11 4 9 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults Keyboard Wedge Interface 1153 Table 11 1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page 11 4 J NOTE See
184. DataBar Family Codabar Code 93 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 PDF417 Macro PDF417 Micro PDF417 L2 TLC 39 MSI QR Code MicroQR Discrete 2 of 5 IATA 2 of 5 o x Maxicode 7 Aztec Aztec Rune Bookland ISSN Trioptic Code 39 Chinese 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 US Postnet US Planet UK Postal Japan Postal Australian Postal Netherlands KIX Code USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail UPU FICS Postal Signature Capture B 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B 3 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Code Type Option Value Option Code 39 0 No check character or Full ASCII processing 1 Reader has checked one check character 3 Reader has checked and stripped check character 4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion 5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character 7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character Example A Full ASCII bar code with check character W A l MI DW is transmitted as JA7AIMID where 7 344 Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as X0412356 Code 128 0 Standard data packet
185. Delete Item The following confirmation dialog displays Press the left soft key No to cancel the delete and return to the View Inventory screen Press the right soft key Yes to delete the selected inventory item 156 Delete Item L Are you sure you want to delete the selected item No Yes No Figure 2 27 Delete Dialog Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 29 Delete All On the View Inventory screen press Menu Delete All The following confirmation dialog displays Press the left soft key No to cancel the delete and return to the View Inventory screen Press the right soft key Yes to delete all inventory items listed 6 Delete U Are you sure you want to delete ALL the items No Yes Figure 2 28 Delete All Dialog Transmit Selecting Transmit sends data to the host PC via the configured interface and protocol such as USB HID keyboard On the Simple Inventory screen press Menu gt Transmit gt ENT to send data J NOTE Data is not deleted after transmission Export Exporting formats data in a user friendly layout which can be downloaded from the device On the View Inventory screen press Menu Export The dialog in Figure 2 21 displays indicating the path of the file to be exported to the Application folder on the device The default file name and type is export txt Press ENT to export all data and return to the View Inventory screen 63 View Inventory Yx The inven
186. Enable Australian Postal 01h Disable Australian Postal 00h Symbologies 12 63 Australia Post Format Parameter F1h To select one of the following formats for Australia Post scan the appropriate bar code below e Autodiscriminate Smart mode Attempt to decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C Encoding Tables J NOTE This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify the Encoding Table used for encoding Raw Format Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3 Alphanumeric Encoding Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table Numeric Encoding Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical Specifications available at http www auspost com au Autodiscriminate 00h Raw Format 01h Alphanumeric Encoding 02h Numeric Encoding 03h 12 64 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Netherlands KIX Code Parameter FOh 46h To enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Netherlands KIX Code 01h Disable Netherlands KIX Code 00h
187. F 4 rm Race bee ne d 14 5 Australia post format 12 60 Australian postal 12 59 authentication 4 26 auto reconnect in Bluetooth keyboard emulation slave mode 4 17 auto reconnect interval 4 14 rr 12 73 batch mode 5 19 beep after good decode 5 12 beeper tone 5 13 beeper 5 14 bluetooth friendly 4 7 Bluetooth technology support 4 8 bookland EAN 12 9 bookland ISBN 12 21 CANCE be eee cR REG D 3 Chinese 2015 12 53 25 12 46 codabar CLSI 0 12 48 codabar lengths 12 46 codabar NOTIS editing 12 48 codabar start and stop characters 12 49 CODEC tuu 12 36 code 11 lengths 12 36 code 128 12 24 code 128 emulation 12 70 code 128 lengths 12 24 gode 39 yaaa eee eG EA de eA Ee de Rogge 12 29 code 39 check digit verification 12 32 code 39 full ASCII 12 33 code 39
188. Flash Device is charging when cradle is powered from external power supply Red Flash Charging problem or data transmission problem LED on Cradle Off Cradle is not powered Solid Blue Cradle is powered Red Blue Purple Power up sequence Rapid Red Blue Red Blue Power fault on all contacts Miscellaneous LED Indicator Information e Single slot charge only cradle STB2000 Blue LED is off when there is a USB connection but no external power supply is used Single slot multi interface Bluetooth cradle STB2078 BlueLED lights when there is a USB or keyboard wedge connection but no external power supply is used 13 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Four Slot Cradles The STB2000 C40007R four slot charge only and STB2000 C40017R four slot Ethernet cradle act as chargers and host communication interfaces for the MT2000 Series cordless devices and batteries Cradles can sit on a desktop or be mounted on a wall This document provides basic instructions for cradle set up and use Unless otherwise noted cradle refers to both configurations of the cradle Any discussion of transmission of information refers specifically to the STB2000 C40017R four slot Ethernet cradle Only use Motorola battery pack P N 82 108066 01 rated 3 7V 2400mAh 8 88 Wh Cradle Features See Cradle Features on page 1 4 Inserting Devices and Batteries in the Cradle When inserting the device in the cradle insert the device top first Push the han
189. Formatting 14 73 Send Keypad Characters continued Send Keypad 9 Send Keypad Enter Send Keypad Numlock Send Break Key Send Delete Key Send Page Up Key Send End Key 14 74 2070 2090 User Guide Send Keypad Characters continued Send Pause Key Send Backspace Key Send Print Screen Key Send Page Down Key Send Scroll Lock Key Send Tab Key Send Insert Key Advanced Data Formatting 14 75 Send Keypad Characters continued Send Home Key Send Enter Key Send Escape Key Send Up Arrow Key Send Down Arrow Key Send Left Arrow Key Send Right Arrow Key
190. GS1 DataBar and EAN128 Composites Advanced Data Formatting 14 17 Code Types continued A ztec Aztec Rune J NOTE When selecting composite bar codes enable AIM IDs if parsing UPC or EAN composite data or data from an application that uses symbol separators 14 18 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code Lengths Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code type must contain Select one length per rule only Do not select any code length to select code types of any length 1 Character 3 Characters 5 Characters 2 Characters 4 Characters 6 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14 19 Code Lengths continued 7 Characters TL TI 8 Characters 9 Characters 10 Characters 11 Characters 12 Characters VAM ME 13 Characters 14 20 2070 2090 User Guide Code Lengths continued
191. H HID Human Interface Device A Bluetooth host type Host Computer A computer that serves other terminals in a network providing such services as computation database access supervisory programs and network control Glossary 4 2070 2090 User Guide Hz Hertz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second IEC International Electrotechnical Commission This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power output during operation IEC 825 Class 1 This is the lowest power IEC laser classification Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner s oscillating mirror fails Intercharacter Gap The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code Interleaved 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces Interleaving provides for greater information density The location of wide elements bar spaces within each group determines which characters are encoded This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces Only numeric 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded Interleaved Bar Code A bar code in which characters are paired together using bars to represent the first character and the intervening spaces to represent the second Input Output Ports
192. Hoc Channel dialog to configure the required information to create an Ad Hoc profile This dialog does not appear if you selected Infrastructure mode Select a channel number from the Channel drop down list J NOTE case of a country where DFS is implemented band 5150 5250 MHz Ad hoc is not allowed and the user needs to move and select a channel in the 2 4 GHz band i NOTE Ad hoc channels are specific to the country selected Table 2 6 Ad Hoc Channels Band Channel Frequency 2 4 GHz 2412 MHz 2417 MHz 2422 MHz 2427 MHz 2432 MHz 2437 MHz 2442 MHz 2447 MHz 2452 MHz 2457 MHz 2462 MHz o A WY e Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 47 Security Mode If Infrastructure mode was selected the Security Mode dialog displays Profile Entry Figure 2 54 nfrastructure Security Mode Authentication Type 2 48 2070 2090 User Guide Security Mode Use the Security Mode dialog to configure the Security and Authentication methods If Ad Hoc mode is selected this dialog is not available and authentication is set to None by default Select the security mode from the Security Mode drop down list The selection chosen affects the availability of other choices for Authentication Type and Encryption methods LEGACY Pre WPA This mode allows the user to configure protocols not available in the other Security Mode selections Open aut
193. IP AES TKIP AES Yes Yes WEP 40 or WEP 104 WEP 104 WEP 104 None EAP TLS EAP FAST 2 62 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table2 12 Encryption Authentication Matrix Continued Authentication Encryption WPA WPA2 z 4 Legacy Pre WPA Personal Personal WPA Enterprise WPA2 Enterprise Open WEP TKIP AES TKIP AES PEAP WEP 104 Yes Yes LEAP WEP 104 Yes Yes TTLS WEP 104 Yes Yes If either WEP 40 40 24 or WEP 104 104 24 is selected the wizard displays the key entry dialog unless the Use Passkey check box was selected in the Encryption dialog see Figure 2 67 on page 2 56 The Key Entry dialog shows only if the authentication is set to None Hexadecimal Keys To enter the hexadecimal key information select the Hexadecimal Keys radio button An option is provided to hide the characters that are entered for added security To hide the characters select the For added security Mask characters entered check box To enter a hexadecimal key with characters hidden 1 Select the For added security Mask characters entered check box 2 Tab to Next gt and press ENT Profile Entry Profile Entry WEP 40 Hex Enter 10 hexadecimal chars WEP 104 Hex Enter 26 hexadecimal chars Edit Key Transmit Key Edit Key Transmit Key 1 Not Entered w Keys Entered w 1 Entered w 1 Entered v Oe Ea erm 26 Status Waiting for Confirm Key Entry Status
194. Key amp Confirm Key Fields Match Figure 2 74 WEP 40 and WEP 104 WEP Keys Dialog Boxes 3 For WEP only in the Edit Key drop down list select the key to enter 4 Inthe Key field enter the key a ForWEP 40 enter 10 hexadecimal characters b ForWEP 104 enter 26 hexadecimal characters c For TKIP enter 64 hexadecimal characters d For AES enter 64 hexadecimal characters 5 Inthe Confirm Key re enter the key When the keys match a message appears indicating that the keys match 6 Repeat for each WEP key Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 63 7 ForWEP only in the Transmit Key drop down list select the key to transmit 8 Tabto Next and press ENT The P Address Entry dialog displays To enter a hexadecimal key without characters hidden 1 Tabto Next and press ENT Profile Entry WEP 104 Hex Enter 26 hexadecimal chars Transmit Key Key 1 Enter Key Key 2 Enter Key Key 3 Enter Key 0 0 0 0 Key 4 Enter Key Figure 2 75 Keys Dialog Box 2 ForWEP only in each Key field enter the key a ForWEP 40 enter 10 hexadecimal characters b ForWEP 104 enter 26 hexadecimal characters c For TKIP enter 64 hexadecimal characters d For AES enter 64 hexadecimal characters 3 ForWEP only in the Transmit Key drop down list select the key to transmit 4 Tabto Next and press ENT The P Adaress Entry dialog displays Pass phrase Dialog When select
195. Keyboard When configured as a USB keyboard device use this parameter to increase the data transmission speed of printable 7 bit ASCII characters e Quick Keypad Emulation When configured as a USB HID keyboard device use this parameter to increase the data transmission speed of a mix of both printable 7 bit and full 8 bit ASCII characters J NOTE Emulate Keypad and Quick Emulation override Fast HID USB Polling Interval This option speeds data transmission for all USB devices except CDC Scan a bar code below to set the polling interval The polling interval determines the rate at which data can be sent between the scanner and the host computer A lower number indicates a faster data rate The default value is 8 msec to 10 seconds depending on the system prior to resuming scanning bar codes If the user continues scanning without waiting the required time period data may be lost 1 IMPORTANT Changing the polling interval re enumerates the scanner In corded operation the user must wait up the host can result in lost data 1 msec A CAUTION Ensure your host machine can handle the selected data rate Selecting a data rate that is too fast for 2 msec 3 msec 4 msec USB Interface 9 17 USB Polling Interval continued UNM 5 msec 6 msec VAM N msec LE 8 msec UA TU 9 msec 9 18
196. LED is off when the battery is fully charged with the exception of several initial charge cycles The LED may continually blink until the battery goes through several discharge cycles to calibrate itself Changing the Host Interface To connect to a different host or to the same host using a different cable 1 2 Disconnect the power supply from the cradle if applicable Disconnect the interface cable from the host 13 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide 3 Connect the interface cable to the new host or the new interface cable to the existing host 4 Reconnect the power supply if required 5 If necessary scan the appropriate host bar code for non autodetected interfaces CAUTION f the device does not recognize the host disconnect the power supply then reconnect after connecting the host cable Communication Sending Data to the Host Computer The STB2078 C10007WR single slot multi interface Bluetooth cradle receives data from the device a wireless radio connection and transmits it to the host computer via the host cable The device and cradle must be paired for successful wireless communication For detailed information about pairing radio communications Bluetooth technology and lost connections to the host computer refer to the MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide part number 72 117858 J NOTE ActiveSync is not supported on this cradle LED Indicators Accessories 13 5 Table 132 LED Charging Status I
197. Limited bar code when scanning some UPC symbols that start with the digits 9 and 7 e Level 2 Automatic risk detection This level of security may result in erroneous decoding of DataBar Limited bar codes when scanning some UPC symbols If a misdecode is detected the scanner operates in Level 3 or Level 1 Level 3 Security level reflects newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a 5X trailing clear margin e Level 4 Security level extends beyond the standard required by GS1 This level of security requires a 5X leading and trailing clear margin Security Level 1 01h Security Level 2 02h Security Level 3 03h Security Level 4 04h 1 May result in erroneous decoding due to Databar Limited and UPC symbologies Symbologies 12 69 Composite Composite CC C Parameter FOh 55h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC C Enable CC C 01h Disable CC C 00h Composite CC A B Parameter FOh 56h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC A B Enable CC A B 01h Disable CC A B 00h 12 70 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide
198. Log To save a Wireless Log 1 Select Save The Save As dialog displays 2 Navigate to the desired folder 3 Inthe field enter a file name and then select The Wireless Log is saved as a text file in the selected folder Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 87 Clearing the Log To clear the log select Clear Versions The Versions screen displays software firmware and hardware version numbers To open the Versions screen select Versions in the Wireless Status screen Wireless Status 5 Versions Export Subsystems Wireless Fusion Copyright C Motorola 2003 2009 Version 2 61 0 0 013R P N Not Specified Device s General Release Customer s General Release Applications Middleware WLAN Adapters Figure 2 112 Versions Screen The screen displays Fusion software version numbers as well as application and middleware version information Wireless Diagnostics The Wireless Diagnostics screen provides links to perform ICMP Ping Trace Routing and Known APs functions To open the Wireless Diagnostics screen select Wireless Diagnostics from the Wireless Companion menu Wireless Diagnostics Wireless Diagnostics 1 ICMP Ping 2 Trace Route 3 Known APs 4 Quit Figure 2 113 Wireless Diagnostics Screen The Wireless Diagnostics option screen contains the following options Select the option to display the option s
199. NR Association Count AP MAC Address Transmit Rate Figure 2 108 Signal Strength Screen After viewing the Signal Strength screen select the back button to return to the Wireless Status screen Current Profile Table2 24 Signal Strength Status Field Description Signal Displays the Relative Signal Strength Indicator RSSI of the signal transmitted between the AP and device As long as the Signal Quality icon is green the AP association is not jeopardized If the icon is red poor signal an association with a different AP could be warranted to improve the signal The signal strength icon changes depending on the signal strength B Excellent Signal El Very Good Signal Ed Good Signal Fair Signal Poor Signal of Range no signal Status Indicates if the device is associated with the AP Signal Quality Displays a text format of the Signal icon 2 84 2070 2090 User Guide Table 2 24 Signal Strength Status Continued Field Description Tx Retries Displays a percentage of the number of data packets the device retransmits The fewer transmit retries the more efficient the wireless network is Missed Beacons Displays a percentage of the amount of beacons the device missed The fewer missed beacons the more efficient the wireless network is Beacons are uniform system packets broadcast by the AP to keep the network synchronized Signal Level The AP signal level in decibels per
200. P Server address and the Lease information is also shown If the IP Type is Static the IP Address and other information shown are those that were entered in the profile IP Address Displays the device s IP address The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier The IP address is shown in dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 7 27 Subnet Displays the device s subnet mask Most TCP IP networks use subnets to manage routed IP addresses All IP addresses have a network part and a host part The network part specifies a physical network The host part specifies a host on that physical network The subnet mask allows a network administrator to use some of the bits that are normally used to specify the host to instead specify physical sub networks within an organization This helps organize and simplify routing between physical networks Gateway Displays the gateway address A gateway forwards IP packets to and from a remote destination DCHP Server Displays the IP address of the DHCP server
201. Parameter Defaults 2 4 2 Wireless Beeper Definitions 4 3 Radio Communications Host Types 4 4 Bluetooth Technology Profile Support 4 6 51 1 pue 4 6 eA cL s 4 6 Slave ee PR 4 6 Bluetooth Friendly Name 4 7 Discoverable Mode Ac TC X 4 7 HID Host Parallel EDU SR UII tette oa DU 4 8 HID Country Keyboard Types Country 4 8 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay 4 10 HID GAPS Lock Override o o OU E E HR E UB BERE 4 10 HID Ignore Unknown Characters 4 4 11 Keypad e 4 11 HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution Eod risa 4 12 HID Function Key Mapping P 4 12 Simulated Caps c eee ere ee ee ee ee 4 13 LET 4 13 Auto reconnect Feature T t ee ere ee 4 14 Reconnect Attempt Beep 4 14 Reconnect Attempt Interval Ub reta Pep es tana 4 15 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode
202. Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Page Number FIPS Mode Disable 5 22 DPM Scanning MT2070 DP only Enable 5 22 Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character None 5 23 Prefix Value 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 24 Suffix 1 Value 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 24 Suffix 2 Value Scan Data Transmission Format Data as is 5 25 FN1 Substitution Values Set 5 26 Transmit No Read Message Disable 5 27 Imaging Preferences Operational Modes N A 6 4 Image Capture Illumination Enable 6 5 Snapshot Mode Timeout 0 30 seconds 6 6 Snapshot Aiming Pattern Enable 6 6 Image Cropping Disable 6 7 Crop to Pixel Addresses 0 top 0 left 1023 bottom 1279 right 6 8 Image Brightness Target White 180 6 9 JPEG Quality and Size Value 65 6 9 Image File Format Selection JPEG 6 10 Signature Capture Disable 6 11 Signature Capture Image File Format Selection JPEG 6 12 Signature Capture Width 400 6 13 Signature Capture Height 100 6 13 Signature Capture JPEG Quality 65 6 13 Video View Finder Disable 6 14 RS 232 Host Parameters RS 232 Host Types Standard 8 6 Baud Rate 9600 8 7 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Page Number Parity Type None 8 9 Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 8 10 Data Bits 8 Bit 8
203. Preamble System Character 12 17 UPC E1 Preamble System Character 12 18 Convert UPC E to A Disable 12 19 Convert UPC E1 to A Disable 12 19 EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend Disable 12 20 Bookland ISBN Format ISBN 10 12 21 UCC Coupon Extended Code Enable 12 22 ISSN EAN Disable 12 23 Code 128 Code 128 Enable 12 24 Set Length s for Code 128 Any Length 12 24 GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 Enable 12 26 ISBT 128 Enable 12 26 ISBT Concatenation Disable 12 27 Check ISBT Table Enable 12 28 Code 39 Code 39 Enable 12 29 Trioptic Code 39 Disable 12 29 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Italian Pharmacy Code Disable 12 30 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 7 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Page Number Code 32 Prefix Disable 12 30 Set Length s for Code 39 2 to 55 12 31 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disable 12 32 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable 12 32 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 12 33 Code 93 Code 93 Disable 12 34 Set Length s for Code 93 4to 55 12 34 Code 11 Code 11 Disable 12 36 Set Lengths for Code 11 4to 55 12 36 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Disable 12 38 Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Disable 12 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Disable 12 39 Set Lengths for 2 of 5 14 12 40 2 of 5 Check Digi
204. Prefix Suffix values Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5 25 must be scanned as well Scan Prefix 07h Scan Suffix 1 06h Scan Suffix 2 08h Data Format Cancel User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 25 Scan Data Transmission Format Parameter EBh To change the scan data format scan one of the following eight bar codes corresponding to the desired format J NOTE f using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix suffix To set values for the prefix and or suffix see Prefix Suffix Values on page 5 24 Data As Is 00h DATA SUFFIX 1 01h DATA SUFFIX 2 gt 02h DATA lt SUFFIX 1 lt SUFFIX 2 gt 03h lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt 04h 5 26 2070 2090 User Guide Scan Data Transmission Format continued lt PREFIX gt DATA SUFFIX 1 05h lt PREFIX gt DATA lt SUFFIX 2 gt 06h lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 07h
205. Rua 1 12 15 5 0 code bar codes 12 72 quick keypad emulation 9 18 R radio communication 4 4 4 5 Bluetooth Technology Profile support 1 16 defaults ca ect e oem a a OY es 4 2 multipoint to point 4 19 eenas ku EE WERE ER RADO e ds 1 16 point to point 4 19 reconnect attempt 4 15 reconnect attempt 4 14 range indicator 4 18 reconnect attempt 4 15 DOED tas eed was 4 14 remove Li ion battery 1 18 removing scanner from cradle 1 13 13 6 resetting the scanner 1 17 RS 232 connection 8 2 default parameters 8 3 parameters 8 4 8 6 S sample C 1 scanner cold DOO xu eR Xx DRESSES 1 17 Index 8 2070 2090 Set Up Guide cM RE TP 1 17 scanner services disabling 7 6 G 5 scanner to cradle support 4 19 scanning aiming zx nue adem ences Ea ek d e 3 4 ed oen Sd voe m 3 8 eITOIS Lou sobre eX edt 5 2 6 2 12 2 hand held 3 4 presentation mode
206. SB Keystroke Delay p obi e E 9 10 USB CAPS Lock Override mT 9 10 USB Ignore Unknown Characters bern tabu 9 11 USB Ignore Beep Directive ierit merita nee idle ea 9 11 USB Ignore Type Directive 9 12 Emulate Keypad 9 12 Emulate Keypad with Leading 2 9 13 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution 9 13 Function Key Mapping 9 14 Simulated Caps Lock det m 9 14 Convert CaS q ce 9 15 USB Transmission Speed Parameters 9 16 USB Polling Interval 9 16 Past HID Keyboard 9 18 Quick Keypad Emulation acest titre etn ta set ique ates tesi tpa nd rau st zante 9 18 USB HID Over the STB2000 Charge only Cradle 9 19 ASCII Character Set for USB are t 9 20 Chapter 10 IBM 468X 469X Interface 10 1 Connecting to 468X 469X Host 10 2 IBM Parameter Defaults 10 3 468X 469X Host Parameters 202000 0 0 ne ernst
207. SSN EAN oe us Rx aed 12 23 Japan postal 12 58 JPEG quality and size 6 9 keyboard wedge alternate numeric keypad emulation 11 8 capslockon 11 9 caps lock override 11 9 country keyboard types country codes 11 5 default table 11 3 host typeS 11 4 ignore unknown characters 11 7 intra keystroke 11 8 keystroke 11 7 Korean 5 12 54 korean 3 12 54 lock override 4 21 maxicode x ope EO EC ESAE CA 12 71 microPDF417 12 69 MICTOQR sce hd eq ed 12 72 teehee iad ee 12 50 MSI check digit algorithm 12 53 MSI check digits 12 52 MSI lengths 12 50 MSI transmit check digit 12 52 Netherlands KIX code 12 61 numeric bar D 1 pairing modes 4 21 parameter broadcast 4 19 parameter 5 7 PDE417 i e aw DER 12 68 picklist modes 5 16 PIN code 4 27 postal 12
208. Status screen contains the following options Select the option to display the option screen e Signal Strength Provides information about the connection status of the current wireless profile Current Profile Displays basic information about the current profile and connection settings Pv4 Status Displays the current IP address subnet and other IP related information assigned to the device e Wireless Log Displays a log of important recent activity such as authentication association and DHCP renewal completion in time order Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 83 Versions Displays software firmware and hardware version numbers Quit Exits the Wireless Status screen Each option screen contains a back button to return to the main Wireless Status screen Signal Strength The Signal Strength screen provides information about the connection status of the current wireless profile including signal quality missed beacons and other statistics described below The BSSID address shown as AP MAC Address displays the AP currently associated with the connection In Ad Hoc mode the AP MAC Address shows the BSSID of the Ad Hoc network Information in this screen updates every 2 seconds To open the Signal Status screen select Signal Strength in the Wireless Status screen Wireless Status 1 Signal Strength Signal Eg Status Not Associated Signal Quality Tx Retries Missed Beacons Signal Level Noise Level S
209. T Selecting Static IP displays the P Adaress Entry dialog Selecting DHCP displays the Transmit Power dialog Use the P Address Entry dialog to enter the IP address and subnet information Profile Entry IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Advanced Figure 2 79 Static IP Address Entry Dialog Box 2 66 2070 2090 User Guide Table 2 14 Static IP Address Entry Fields Field Description IP Address The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Internet Protocol address Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier Enter the IP address as a dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 7 27 Subnet Mask Most TCP IP networks use subnets to manage routed IP addresses All IP addresses have a network part and a host part The network part specifies a physical network The host part specifies a host on that physical network The subnet mask allows a network administrator to use some of the bits that are normally used to specify the host to instead specify physical sub networks within an organization This helps organize
210. TEL Send Send L2 UT Send 14 54 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send Send 0 Send Send Send Send 1 Advanced Data Formatting 14 55 Keyboard Characters continued Send 2 Send 3 4 Send 5 Send 6 TEL Send 7 Send 8 14 56 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send Send gt Send 9 Send Send Send Advanced Data Formatting 14 57 Keyboard Characters continued Send Send Send B TEILT Send C Send D TEILT Send E Send 14 58 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send H Send J Send L Send G Send Send K Send M Advanced Data Formatting 14 59 Keyboard Characters continued
211. The battery must charge at a reduced charge rate until the battery acquires sufficient charge to boot the device This can take up to two hours depending on the level of battery discharge Device is attached to a host PC via USB cable PC register boots up after being powered down for an extended period of time device does not boot When the host is powered down the device remains powered from its battery This can result a completely discharged battery See above Beeping Sequences Device emits short low short medium short high beep sequence power up beep sequence more than once The USB bus put the device a state where power to the device is cycled on and off more than once Normal during host reset Device emits 4 short high beeps during decode attempt Device has not completed USB initialization Wait several seconds and scan again Device emits high high high low beeps when not in use RS 232 receive error Normal during host reset Otherwise set the device s RS 232 parity to match the host setting Device emits low high beeps during programming Device emits low high low high beeps during programming Input error or Cancel bar code was scanned Out of ADF parameter storage space Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for the parameter programmed Erase all rules and re program with shorter rules Device emits a power up beep afte
212. Transmit Code ID feature for these terminals Table8 3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters Wincor Wincor Nixdorf Code Type Fujitsu Nixdorf Mode B Olivetti Omron Mode A OPOS JPOS UPC A A A A A A A UPC E C C C EAN 8 JAN 8 FF FF B B B FF EAN 13 JAN 13 F F A A A F Code 39 C len None M M M len C len Code 39 Full None None M M None None ASCII Codabar len None N N len N lt len gt Code 128 L len None K K K len L len 120f5 len None len len Code 93 None None L L L len None D2of5 H len None H H H len H len GS1 128 L len None P P P len L len MSI None None len Trioptic None None None None None None Code 11 None None None None None None IATA H lt len gt None H H None None Code 32 None None None None None None GS1 Databar None None E E None None Variants PDF417 None None Q Q None None Datamatrix None None R R None None QR Codes None None U U None None Aztec Aztec Rune None None V V None None Micro PDF None None S S None None Maxicode None None T T None None 8 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide RS 232 Host Types To select an RS 232 host interface scan one of the following bar codes Standard RS 23 ICL RS 232 Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Mode A Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Mode B Olivetti ORS4500 Omron 1Scann
213. Vehicle Mount Table 15 3 Troubleshooting the Single Slot Charge Vehicle Mount Cradle Symptom Device battery charging LED does not light when using the power converter Possible Cause Cradle is not receiving power Action Ensure cables to cradle and power converter are securely connected Power converter fuse is blown Replace power converter fuse Power converter is faulty Replace power converter Device s battery is not recharging Device was removed from the cradle too soon Replace the device in the cradle If the device s battery is fully depleted it can take four hours to fully recharge the battery Device battery is faulty Replace the battery Device was not placed correctly in the cradle Remove the device from the cradle and re insert If the battery still does not charge contact your system administrator Device falls out of the cradle during vibrations Cradle latches are adjusted incorrectly Remove cradle from the shock absorbing plate by unscrewing 3 screws check that the position of the wall mount conversion dial is set to the wall mount position reattach the cradle to the shock absorbing plate Incorrect adapter cup Ensure the forklift cup is mounted Device does not boot when placed in the cradle The device s battery is discharged Normal behavior if the battery is severely discharged The battery must charge at a reduced ch
214. Viewer screen allows the user to preview snap and save images To access Imager Sample start at the Home screen scroll to Imager Sample and press ENT Menu Close Figure 2 44 Image Viewer Screen Menu Press the left soft key to display the Menu Image Viewer li Preview a Open Options About Close Figure 2 45 mage Viewer Screen Menu Preview On Scroll to Preview On and press ENT to display a preview of an image Point the scan window at the image and press the scan trigger to take a picture Open Scroll to Open and press ENT to display the File Explorer Press the Up or Down Scroll key to find an image and press ENT to display it 2 40 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Options Scroll to Options and press ENT to display the Options screen Press the up or down Scroll key to select an option to edit and press ENT aue Options n JPEG Quality Illumination Preview Aim On Cancel Done Figure 2 46 Options Screen JPEG Quality Picture quality indicator Higher numbers produce better quality pictures and larger file sizes e Illumination Press the right and left scroll keys to turn illumination On or Off The default is Off Depending on the room lighting an image captured by the device may appear too dark The illumination feature allows you to adjust the lighting on the snapshot target Preview Aim Laser emits when the trigger is pulled About
215. a USB host The device connects directly to a USB host or a powered USB hub which powers it No additional power supply is required Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values Indicates Default North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature Option J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Connecting a USB Interface Figure 9 1 USB Connection J NOTES 1 Connect a power supply to the cradle not shown for fast charging 2 When connecting the host cable directly to the device the host cable should not be attached to or detached from the device more than once a day to prevent excessive contact wear 3 If connecting ActiveSync via USB it is recommended you use an ESD dongle with the USB cable ESD part numbers KT 8830 03R 3 piece kit or KT 8830 10R 10 piece kit The device connects with USB capable hosts including Desktop PCs and notebooks Apple iMac G4 iBooks North America only IBM SurePOS terminals Sun and other network computers that support more than one keyboard The following operating systems support the device through USB e Windows 98 2000 ME MacOS 8 5 MacOS 10 3 4690
216. a function of minimum element widths of bar code symbols Angle Scanning angle is important for promoting quick decodes When laser beams reflect directly back into the device from the bar code this specular reflection can blind the device To avoid this scan the bar code so that the beam does not bounce directly back But don t scan at too sharp an angle the device needs to collect scattered reflections from the scan to make a successful decode Practice quickly shows what tolerances to work within J NOTE Contact Motorola Solutions Support if persistent scanning difficulties develop Decoding properly printed bar codes should be quick and effortless J NOTE tis recommended that power is applied to the device while in Intellistand Decode Distances Table 3 3 MT2070 2090 SL Standard Range Laser Decode Distances Typical Working Range Label Density English Metric Code 39 4 mil 0 1 2 8 in 0 254 7 112 cm Code 39 5 mil 0 2 5 3 in 0 508 13 462 cm Code 39 7 5 mil 0 5 10 4 in 1 27 26 416 cm UPC 100 13 mil 0 2 21 9in 0 508 55 626 cm Code 39 20 mil 29 1 in 73 914 cm Code 39 40 mil 42 1 in 106 934 cm Code 39 55 mil 51 2in 130 048 cm Near decode distance is limited by field of view Decode distances are measured under ambient light of 35 5 foot candle in the plane of the farthest bar code Table 3 4 MT2070 2090 ML Medium Range Laser
217. abar limited security level 12 65 GS1 databar 14 12 63 guides integrator guide xxiii quick start guide xxiii user guide xxiii H HID 9 18 HID 4 6 HID Slave 4 4 host types keyboard wedge 11 4 19 292 fiat wate cet Reste dorsi eee eS 8 6 468 469 connection oer aa eA 10 2 default parameters 10 3 parameters 10 4 icons battery PON ENA 2 9 connection 2 10 keypad functionality 2 10 profile 2 43 signal 2 83 wireless 2 10 tote tee etat bes e ERR e E n redis 4 10 5 18 6 5 image brightness target white 6 9 image cropping 6 7 6 8 image options COPPINO cies Se hus d te eee pe Alar 6 7 6 8 6 10 6 12 image brightness target white 6 9 JPEG size quality 6 9 imager scanner defaults a see a E eR 6 2 imaging preferences
218. ace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Down Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow Chapter 10 IBM 468X 469X Interface Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the device with an IBM 468X 469X host Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values Indicates Default Disable Convert to 39 4 Feature Option J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging 10 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Connecting to an IBM 468X 469X Host Connect the device directly to the host interface Interface Cable Host Port Connector Figure 10 1 Direct Connection J NOTE Connect a power supply to the cradle not shown for fast charging J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 10 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the device are the same 1 Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the device 2 Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host typically Port 9 3 Select the port address by scanning the
219. acter from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14 91 This moves the cursor to the position after the matching character If the character is not there the rule fails and ADF tries the next rule Move Cursor to Start of Data Scan this bar code to move cursor to the beginning of the data 14 31 Move Cursor Past a Character This action moves the cursor past all sequential occurrences of a 14 31 selected character For example if the selected character is then the cursor moves past A AA etc Scan the Move Cursor Past Character then select a character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard f the character is not there the cursor does not move i e has no effect Move Cursor Past Specific This action moves the cursor past the first occurrence of a selected 14 32 String string Move Cursor to Specific String This action moves the cursor to the start of the first occurrence of a 14 32 and Replace selected string and replaces that string with another user defined string Move Cursor to Last This action replaces all occurrences of a specific string with a 14 32 Occurrence of String and user defined string and moves the cursor to the beginning of the Replace All last such occurrence Skip to End This action moves the cursor to the end of the bar code 14 32 Advanced Data Formatting 14 31 Table 14 2 Setup Field s Definitions Continued Parameter Description Page Number Skip Ahead N Characters Scan one
220. acters to encode the full ASCII character set To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 39 Full ASCII 01h Disable Code 39 Full ASCII 00h J NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host dependent and is therefore described in the ASCII Character Set Table for the appropriate interface See the 5 Character Set for USB on page 9 20 or the ASCII Character Set for RS 232 on page 8 19 12 34 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code 93 Enable Disable Code 93 Parameter 09h To enable or disable Code 93 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 93 01h Disable Code 93 00h Set Lengths for Code 93 Parameter L1 L2 1Bh The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 93 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 93 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel
221. ad Enable Code 128 Emulation 01h Disable Code 128 Emulation 00h 12 74 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Data Matrix Parameter FOh 24h To enable or disable Data Matrix scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Data Matrix 01h Disable Data Matrix 00h Maxicode Parameter FOh 26h To enable or disable Maxicode scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Maxicode 01h Disable Maxicode 00h Symbologies 12 75 Code Parameter F0h 25h To enable or disable QR Code scan the appropriate bar code below Enable QR Code 01h Disable QR Code 00h MicroOR Parameter F1h To enable or disable MicroQR scan the appropriate bar code below Enable MicroQR 01h Disable MicroQR 00h 12 76 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Aztec Parameter F1h 3Eh To enable or disable Aztec scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Aztec 01h Disable Aztec 00h Symbologies 12 77 Redundancy Level Parameter 4Eh The device offers four levels of decode redundancy Select higher redundancy l
222. adle and replace the battery If one of these icons continues to display contact Motorola Solutions Support See Screen Icons on page 2 9 for descriptions of display icons Configure the Device Use the bar codes in this manual to configure the device See Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences and each host chapter for information about programming the device using bar code menus 1 14 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Battery Charging IMPORTANT 1 If the host PC is powered off for example every night the device continues to operate from its A battery until the battery is totally drained Upon restart of the host PC the device may not boot The battery has to charge at a reduced charge rate until the battery acquires sufficient charge to boot the device This can take up to two hours depending on the level of discharge 2 To prevent irreversible harm to battery do not store the device with the battery installed for extended periods of time For maximizing battery life see Battery on page 15 2 Charge the device using a cradle or host interface cable or remove and charge the Li ion battery using a spare battery charger Before using the device for the first time fully charge the Li ion battery until the green LED on the device goes off default The battery fully charges in less than four hours when the device is placed in a cradle with a 12V supply connected lt J NOTE The def
223. adle is receiving power Ensure device is seated charging or cradle was unplugged from correctly If a device battery is fully depleted it can take up to AC power too soon four hours to fully recharge the Li ion battery Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery Device is not fully seated in the Remove and re insert the device into the cradle ensuring it is cradle correctly seated Extreme battery temperature Battery does not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F 0 C or above 104 F 40 C During data Device removed from cradle Replace device in cradle and retransmit communications no data was transmitted or transmitted data was incomplete during communications Incorrect cable configuration See the system administrator Communications software is not installed or configured properly Perform setup as described in Chapter 4 Radio Communications Device falls out of the cradle in the wall mount position Cradle has an incorrect adapter cup Ensure the wall mount adapter cup is installed and not the desktop cup Cradle latches are adjusted incorrectly Remove cradle from the shock absorbing plate by unscrewing 3 screws check that the position of the wall mount conversion dial is set to the wall mount position reattach the cradle to the shock absorbing plate Device does not boot when placed in the cradle
224. al 6 10 2070 2090 User Guide Image File Format Selector IMPORTANT Before entering snapshot mode to take pictures with the device ensure the device is set up to N interface with a USB connection via the Symbol Native SNAPI with Imaging Interface on page 9 6 The SNAPI with Imaging USB interface supports picture taking and BMP JPEG and TIFF file formats Non imaging USB interfaces are invalid in snapshot mode Parameter FOh 30h Select an image format appropriate for the system BMP TIFF or JPEG The device stores captured images in the selected format BMP File Format 03h JPEG File Format 01h TIFF File Format 04h Imaging Preferences 6 11 Signature Capture Parameter 5Dh A signature capture bar code is a special purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area in a document with a machine readable format The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index to various signatures The region inside the bar code pattern is considered the signature capture area Output File Format Decoding a signature capture bar code de skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP JPEG or TIFF file format The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image File Descriptor
225. allation completes the nstalled User Certs dialog displays and the certificate is available in the drop down for selection of NOTE To successfully install a user certificate the device must already be connected to a network from which the server is accessible Operating the MT2070 MT2090 To install a user certificate from a file 1 Tab to Install Certificate and press ENT The Import Certificate dialog displays Import Certificate Select Option Import from pfx Q Import User Cert from Server as Figure 2 59 mport Certificate Dialog Box 2 Choose mport from File and select OK The Open dialog displays Manage Profiles Folder All Folders Certificates cer X Figure 2 60 Open Dialog Box 3 Inthe Type drop down list select Personal Certs pfx 4 Browse to the file and select OK The Personal Certificate dialog displays Manage Profiles Figure 2 61 Personal Certificate Screen 2 54 2070 2090 User Guide 5 Enter the password and select OK The certificate s are imported J NOTE Installing a user certificate from a file requires that the file be of type pfx Also this file type requires the user to supply a password in order to be read by Fusion Server Certificate Selection If the user selects the Validate Server Certificate check box a server certificate is required Select a certificate from the drop down list of currently installe
226. ally refreshed when using the EAP FAST authentication protocol Select No to disallow automatic PAC refreshing If the master key expired the PAC on the device that was generated with this expired key must be manually deleted and a new PAC provisioned even when Allow Refreshing is turned ON Change Password Use Change Password to require that a user enter a password before being allowed to create or edit a profile or change the Options This allows pre configuring profiles and prevents users from changing the network settings The user can use this feature to protect settings from a guest user By default the password is not set New Confirm Figure 2 103 Change Password Screen Enter the current password in the Current text box If there is no current password the Currenttext box is not displayed Enter the new password in the New and Confirm text boxes Select Save To change an existing password enter the current password in the Currenttext box and enter the new password in the New and Confirm text boxes Select Save 2 80 2070 2090 User Guide To delete the password enter the current password in the Current text box and leave the New and Confirm text boxes empty Select Save J NOTE Passwords are case sensitive and can not exceed 63 characters Operating the MT2070 MT2090 Export J NOTE For Windows CE 5 0 devices exporting options enables settings to persist after a cold boot Use E
227. an character There are two situations for XON XOFF The device receives an XOFF before has data to send When the device has data to send it waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for an XON character before transmission If it does not receive the XON within this time the device issues an error indication and discards the data The device receives an XOFF during a transmission Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte When the device receives an XON character it sends the rest of the data message The device waits indefinitely for the XON 8 14 2070 2090 User Guide Software Handshaking continued None ACK NAK ENQ ACK NAK with ENQ XON XOFF RS 232 Interface 8 15 Host Serial Response Time out This parameter specifies how long the device waits for an ACK NAK or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred This only applies when in one of the ACK NAK software handshaking modes or RTS CTS hardware handshaking mode Nm Minimum 2 Sec Low 2 5 Sec Medium 5 Sec High 7 5 Sec Maximum 9 9 Sec 8 16 2070 2090 User Guide RTS Line State This parameter sets the idle
228. an the appropriate bar code below J NOTE UPC E1 is not a UCC Uniform Code Council approved symbology Enable UPC E1 01h Disable UPC E1 00h Enable Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 Parameter 04h To enable or disable EAN 8 JAN 8 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable EAN 8 JAN 8 01h Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 00h Symbologies 1259 Enable Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 Parameter 03h To enable or disable EAN 13 JAN 13 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable EAN 13 JAN 13 01h Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 00h Enable Disable Bookland EAN Parameter 53h To enable or disable Bookland EAN scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Bookland EAN 01h Disable Bookland EAN 00h m NOTE f you enable Bookland EAN select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 12 21 Also select either Decode UPC EAN Supplementals Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals or Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 12 10 12 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals Parameter 10h Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions e g UPC 2 UPC 2 1342 The following options are available e f you select Ignore UPC EAN with Supplementals and the device is presented with a UPC EAN plus supplementa
229. and simplify routing between physical networks Select the Advanced check box then tab to Next gt and press ENT to display the Advanced Address Entry dialog Enter the Gateway DNS and WINS addresses Tab to Next gt and press ENT without selecting the Advanced check box to display the Transmit Power dialog Profile Entry Gateway DNS 0 0 0 0 WINS 0 0 0 0 Figure 2 80 Advanced Address Entry Dialog Box The IP information entered in the profile is only used if the Enable IP Mgmt check box in the Options gt System Options dialog was selected System Options on page 2 78 If not selected the IP information in the profile is ignored and the IP information entered in the Microsoft interface applies Table 2 15 P Config Advanced Address Entry Fields Field Description G W The default gateway forwards IP packets to and from a remote destination DNS The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS translates domain names and IP addresses and controls Internet email delivery Most Internet services require DNS to operate properly If DNS is not configured Web sites cannot be located and or email delivery fails WINS WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations Tab to Next gt and press ENT The Transmit Power dialog displays Operating the MT2070
230. any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter RS 232 Interface 8 3 RS 232 Parameter Defaults Table 8 1 lists the defaults for RS 232 host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the RS 232 Host Parameters section beginning on page 8 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 8 1 RS 232 Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number RS 232 Host Parameters RS 232 Host Types Standard 8 6 Baud Rate 9600 8 7 Parity Type None 8 9 Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 8 10 Data Bits 8 Bit 8 10 Check Receive Errors Enable 8 11 Hardware Handshaking None 8 11 Software Handshaking None 8 13 Host Serial Response Time out 2 Sec 8 15 RTS Line State Low RTS 8 16 Beep on lt BEL gt Disable 8 16 Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 8 17 Nixdorf Beep LED Options Normal Operation 8 18 Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 8 18 8 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide RS 232 Host Parameters Various RS 232 hosts use their own parameter default settings Selecting standard ICL Fujitsu Wincor Nixdorf Mode A Wincor Nixdorf Mode B OPOS JPOS Olivetti or Omron sets the defaults listed in Table 8 2 Table8 2 Terminal Specific RS 232 Wincor Wincor Parameter Fujitsu Nixdorf Nixdorf Mode Olivetti Mode A B
231. appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 10 4 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter Y d NOTE The only required configuration is the port address The IBM system typically controls other device parameters IBM 468X 469X Interface 10 3 IBM Parameter Defaults Table 10 1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 70 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 10 1 BM Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address None Selected 10 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 10 5 10 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address This parameter sets the IBM 468X 469X port used z NOTE Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS 485 interface on the device None Selected Hand Held Scanner Emulation Port 9B Non IBM Scanner Emulation Port 5B Table Top Scanner Emulation Port 17 IBM 468X
232. arge rate until the battery acquires sufficient charge to boot the device This can take up to two hours depending on the level of battery discharge This can be avoided by powering the cradle with the optional external power supply Maintenance and Troubleshooting 1929 Single Slot Charge Multi interface Table 15 4 Troubleshooting the Single Slot Charge Multi interface Cradle Symptom Device emits a disconnect short high short low beep sequence Possible Cause Device has disconnected from cradle because it is too far from the cradle Action Move closer to the cradle and listen for a reconnection beep short low short high Device has disconnected from the cradle because the cradle has lost power or been placed in USB suspend mode Check power connections to cradle and if using a USB cable check to make sure PC has not entered a power save mode Device emits four long low beeps after scanning a bar code Interface power cables to cradle are loose Ensure all cable connections are secure Device is not paired to a cradle Scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle that is connected to the host that is to receive data A transmission error was detected Ensure the cradle s communication parameters match the host s setting Cradle has not completed USB initialization Wait several seconds and scan again Bar code is decoded but data is not transmitted to the host Dev
233. assword check box selected If you wish to overwrite any existing PAC in the Fusion PAC Store without being prompted for verification select the Overwrite PAC if Exists check box Select the Ok button to import the PAC Select the Cancel button to abort the import operation If you selected ok and the PAC already exists in the PAC Store a verification dialog box may appear Select Yes to continue the import operation or select No to abort the operation If selected Yes an informational dialog box appears listing the attributes A ID and l ID of the imported PAC Protected Access Credentials Imported PAC A ID ACS PAC Authority CB1C8B46B84B964F87A66 12528204571 I ID wuser Figure 2 97 Import PAC File Dialog Box Select Ok to close the dialog box and return to the main PAC Manager screen with the tree list of PACs The newly imported PAC should appear in the list 2 76 2070 2090 User Guide Options Use the Wireless Options dialog to select one of the following operation options from the drop down list Operating Mode Op Mode Filtering Regulatory Band Selection System Options Auto PAC Settings Change Password Export Operating Mode Filtering The Operating Mode Filtering options cause the Find WLANs application to filter the available networks found AP Networks Ad Hoc Networks Figure 2 98 OP Mode Filtering Dialog Box The AP Networks and Ad Hoc Networks check b
234. ation Quantity Item Menu Close Figure 2 14 Scan Inventory Screen Default View When the Scan Inventory screen displays for the first time the cursor defaults to the Quantity field If a quantity is required it must be entered prior to scanning or entering data in the tem field Use the Up or Down Scroll key to move from one field to another Enter data as necessary Location Use the keypad to enter a location Location is an eight character alphanumeric field Press the orange key to enable the alpha keypad press the orange key again to enable the numeric keypad When the alpha keypad is enabled and orange circle appears on the bottom of the screen D Quantity 2 Item Menu Close Figure 2 15 Scan Inventory Screen Location The device remembers the location entered throughout the session until it is changed and stores as the default location in location xml Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 21 Quantity Quantity defaults to a value of one to transmit one bar code to the host PC Scroll to Quantity and use the keypad to enter the quantity of SKUs or bar code data to transmit to the host PC 1 to 99999 IMPORTANT Quantity must be entered prior to scanning or entering data in the field Item Scroll to Item and scan a bar code or use the keypad to enter an SKU or bar code to transmit to the host PC The data displays on the screen for 3 seconds or less with a trigger or key
235. ation PEAP TTLS EAP FAST Description MS CHAP v2 X X X Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 MS CHAP v2 is a password based challenge response mutual authentication protocol that uses the industry standard Message Digest 4 MD4 and Data Encryption Standard DES algorithms to encrypt responses The authenticating server challenges the access client and the access client challenges the authenticating server If either challenge is not correctly answered the connection is rejected MS CHAP v2 was originally designed by Microsoft as a PPP authentication protocol to provide better protection for dial up and virtual private network VPN connections With Windows XP SP1 Windows XP SP2 Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 SP4 MS CHAP v2 is also an EAP type PAP X Password Authentication Protocol PAP has two variations PAP and CHAP PAP It verifies a user name and password for PPP Internet connections but it is not as secure as CHAP since it works only to establish the initial link PAP is also more vulnerable to attack because it sends authentication packets throughout the network Nevertheless PAP is more commonly used than CHAP to log in to a remote host like an Internet service provider TLS X X EAP TLS is used during phase 2 of the authentication process This method uses a user certificate to authenticate User Certificate Selection If the user checked the User Certificate check
236. ation cannot be performed based on any selected object These buttons can be hidden to allow more space for displaying the list of certificates To hide the buttons press ENT to display the menu Select Hide Buttons to hide the buttons To display the buttons select View Buttons from the menu The menu also allows the user to select the Properties and Delete commands You can always sort by A ID sort by I ID view buttons and hide buttons in the menu Protected Access Credentials 112 ACSPACAuthority 81088468848964 Delete v Sort by A ID Sort by I ID v View Buttons Hide Buttons Figure 2 93 Command Buttons and Context Menu 2 74 2070 2090 User Guide PAC Properties Display the detailed properties of a PAC by selecting an item in a sub tree and selecting Properties or pop up menu The following screen displays with the list of properties in the upper portion of the screen By selecting an entry in the upper list the expanded details of the entry property displays in the lower list of the screen PAC Manager nu we Tunnel CB1C8B46B84B964F87A6612 ACSPACAuthority Figure 2 94 Properties Popup To return to the main page select Ok Escape or X depending on the device Delete PAC To delete a single PAC select a leaf item right most tree item to select the PAC then select Delete or pop up menu A confirmation dialog displays To delete a group of PACs
237. ault state of the LED is off when the battery is fully charged with the exception of several initial charge cycles The LED may continually blink until the battery goes through several discharge cycles to calibrate itself This device does not have a backup battery Any data in RAM is lost when the battery is removed However the real time clock is maintained for a period of 20 minutes during a battery change Use the following accessories to charge the Li ion battery e Cradles Single Slot USB Charge Only Cradle with power supply for fast charging e Single Slot Multi interface Bluetooth Cradle with power supply powered from host slow charge Four Slot Charge Only Cradle with power supply Four Slot Ethernet Cradle with power supply e Spare Battery Charger Four Slot Battery Charger with power supply Cables and a power supply USB Client Charge Cable e RS 232 Serial Cable with power supply Use a cradle or a charge cable to charge the Li ion battery in the device Use either the four slot cradle or four slot battery charger to charge up to four spare batteries The charge cable requires a Motorola approved power supply Cradles Insert the device into a cradle See Chapter 13 Accessories for accessory setup The device starts to charge automatically The charge LED on the device flashes during charging and goes off when the battery is fully charged default See Table 13 2 for charging indications Cables
238. ave different values assigned to it Percent Decode The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode In a well designed bar code scanning system that probability should approach near 100 Glossary 6 2070 2090 User Guide Print Contrast Signal PCS Measurement of the contrast brightness difference between the bars and spaces of a symbol A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable PCS RL RD RL where RL is the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars Programming Mode The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values See Scanning Mode Q Quiet Zone A clear space containing no dark marks which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the stop character QWERTY A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards QWERTY refers to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys R Reflectance Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface Resolution The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a particular device or method RF Radio Frequency RS 232 An Electronic Industries Association EIA standard that defines the connector connector pins and signals used to transfer data serially from one device to another S Scan Area A
239. avorites and the Favorites window displays BTExplorer Favorites Device Address Rem IMASHA WRK2 COM7 CO 001060014 0 MAS Figure 2 128 New Connection Wizard Favorites Screen Add a Bluetooth Service The following Bluetooth services can be added Serial Port File Transfer OBEX Object Exchange To add a Bluetooth service 1 Onthe Favorites window Figure 2 128 use the keypad and select Device Settings Services BTExplorer Settings Delete gt Properties OK Cancel Figure 2 129 BTExplorer Settings Screen 2 98 2070 2090 User Guide 2 Select Add in Figure 2 129 and choose a service from the list Add Local Service ix Add Local Service 9 i Please select service to add Choose a service from the list above to add as Local Service then click OK Cancel Figure 2 130 Add Local Service Screen 3 In this example Serial Port Service is chosen Click OK 4 Serial Port Service is added to the list Create New Local Service ix Edit Local Service Local Service Information Serial Port Service Information Service Name Port 1 Service Security None Local Device Information com al OK Cancel Figure 2 131 Edit Local Service Screen 5 Update the fields in the Edit window as needed Click OK 6 Serial Port Service is added to the
240. bar code data up to the first unknown character The device issues an error beep end Bar Code with unknown characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with unknown characters RS 232 Interface 8 19 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 You can assign the values in Table 8 4 as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission Table 8 4 Prefix Suffix Values Code 39 EM ASCII Character 1000 U NUL 1001 A SOH 1002 B STX 1003 C ETX 1004 D EOT 1005 E 1006 F ACK 1007 G BELL 1008 H BCKSPC 1009 I HORIZ TAB Tom J LF NW LN 1011 K VT 1012 L 1014 M CR ENTER 1014 N SO 1015 0 5 1016 DLE 1017 Q DC1 XON 1018 R DC2 1013 S DC3 XOFF 1020 T DC4 1021 U NAK 1022 V SYN 1023 W ETB 1024 X CAN 1025 1026 Z SUB 8 20 2070 2090 User Guide Table 8 4 Prefix Suffix Values Continued ee yale a Code 39 ferui Character ASCII Character 1027 ESC 1028 EE 1029 GS 1030 D RS 1031 US 1032 Space Space 1033 1034 IB 1035 iC 1036 D 1037 1038 1039 IG 1040 IH 1041 1042 J 1043 IK n 1044 IL 1045 1046 1047 1048 0 1049 1050 2 5 1051 3 1052 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1055 7 7 1056 8 RS 232 Interface 8 21 Table8 4 Prefix Suffix Values Cont
241. bar start stop characters Lower Case 01h Upper Case 00h 12 50 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide MSI Enable Disable MSI Parameter To enable or disable MSI scan the appropriate bar code below Enable MSI 01h Disable MSI 00h Set Lengths for MSI Parameter L1 1Eh L2 1Fh The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for MSI to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters scan MSI One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select MSI Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select this option t
242. ble the MT20X0 continues to use Bluetooth as the bar code data transmission path Cable Priority 00h Cable Only 01h Wireless Only 02h 5 6 2070 2090 User Guide Decode Pager Motor Enable Parameter F1h 65h Attribute 265h Type Bit The 20 0 includes a pager motor which when enabled vibrates the device for a period of time when a successful decode occurs J NOTE When the pager motor is enabled and the device is in InteliStand the pager motor disables until the device is removed from IntelliStand Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the pager motor Pager Motor Disable Pager Motor Enable 01h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options Parameter Bar Code Scanning Parameter ECh To disable the decoding of parameter bar codes including the Set Defaults parameter bar codes scan the Disable Parameter Scanning bar code below To enable decoding of parameter bar codes scan Enable Parameter Scanning Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 01h Disable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 00h 5 8 2070 2090 User Guide Scan Angle Parameter BFh This parameter sets the scan ang
243. box on the Tunneled Authentication dialog or if TLS is the selected authentication type the Installed User Certificates dialog displays Select a certificate from the drop down list of currently installed certificates before proceeding The selected certificate s name appears in the drop down list If the required certificate is not in the list install it Profile Entry E Installed User Certificates E Figure 2 56 nstalled User Certificates Dialog Box 2 52 2070 2090 User Guide User Certificate Installation There are two methods available to install a user certificate for authentication The first is to obtain the user certificate from the Certificate Authority CA This requires connectivity with that CA The second method is to install the user certificate from a file that was placed on the device To install a user certificate from the CA 1 Tabto nstall Certificate and press ENT The Import Certificate dialog displays Import Certificate Select Option e Q Import User Cert from Server as Figure 2 57 Import Certificate Dialog Box 2 Select Import User Cert from Server and select OK The Install from Server dialog displays Figure 2 58 nstall from Server Dialog Box 3 Enter the User Password and Server information in their respective text boxes 4 Tabto Hetrieve A Progress dialog indicates the status of the certificate retrieval or tab to Exit and press ENT After the inst
244. bracket to STB2000 F forklift cradle Used to mount STB20XX cradle Figure 1 3 Single Slot Cradle Back 1 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Single Slot Mounting Cups Wall Mount Cup Desk Mount Cup Forklift Cup Figure 1 4 Single Slot Cradle Mounting Cups Getting Started 1 7 Four Slot Front View and Connections Ethernet Activity LEDs Ethernet Cradle cradles only Charging Battery Power Communications ChargingLED LED Contacts Battery four Charging Battery Well four Contacts Wall Latches two in each well Interchangeable Desk Wall Mount Cup four Figure 1 5 Four Slot Cradle Front 1 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Four Slot Back View Primary Ethernet Secondary Ethernet Mounting Port Ethernet port for daisy chain Mounting Hole Power Port cradle only Ethernet cradle only Hole Mounting Hole Mounting Hole Wall Mount Conversion capte Well Dial 2 Figure 1 6 Four Slot Cradle Back J NOTE When daisy chaining Ethernet cradles connect the first cradle in the daisy chain to the Ethernet hub via the primary Ethernet port connect the first cradle s secondary port to the primary port of second cradle in the chain connect the second cradle s secondary port to the primary port of third cradle in the chain etc Each cradle in the daisy chain requires its own power supply Getting Started 1 9 Four Slot S
245. cable is connected securely to both the cable and to AC power Cable is not seated correctly in the device Remove and re insert the cable into the device ensuring it is correctly seated Extreme battery temperature Battery does not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F 0 C or above 104 F 40 C Device battery is not Device was removed Ensure cable is receiving power Ensure device is seated charging from cable or cable was correctly If a device battery is fully depleted it can take up to unplugged from AC four hours to fully recharge the battery power too soon Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery Cable is not seated Remove and re insert the cable into the device ensuring it is correctly in the device correctly seated Extreme battery Battery will not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F temperature 0 C or above 104 F 40 During data Cable removed from Reattach cable to device and retransmit communication no device during data was transmitted communication or transmitted data was incomplete Incorrect cable configuration See the system administrator Communication software is not installed or configured properly Refer to the MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide Maintenance and Troubleshooting 15 15 MCL Table 15 9 Troubleshooting MCL Symptom Possible
246. can the bar code below to disconnect the device from its cradle PC host An unpairing bar code is also included in the MT2070 MT2090 Quick Start Guide Unpairing Radio Communications 4 23 Pairing Bar Code Format When the device is configured as an SPP Master you must create a pairing bar code for the remote Bluetooth device to which the device can connect You must know the Bluetooth address of the remote device Pairing bar codes are Code 128 bar codes and are formatted as follows Fnc gt where B or LNKB is the prefix XXXXXXXXXXXx represents the 12 character Bluetooth address Pairing Bar Code Example If the remote device to which the device can connect has a Bluetooth address of 11 22 33 44 55 66 then the pairing bar code is Paring Bar Code Content LNKB Bluetooth Address 112233445566 Connection Maintenance Interval NOTE The Connection Maintenance Interval only applies in locked pairing mode see page 4 21 When a device disconnects from a cradle due to a Link Supervision Timeout the device immediately attempts to reconnect to the cradle for 30 seconds If the auto reconnect process fails it can be restarted by pulling the device trigger To guarantee that a disconnected device can reconnect when it comes back in range the cradle reserves the connection for
247. can the Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters 5 1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults Parameter Parameter Nuniber Default Page Number User Preferences Set Default Parameter Set Defaults 5 4 Host Mode Fih A4h Cable Priority 5 5 Decode Pager Motor Enable Fih 65h Disable 5 6 Parameter Bar Code Scanning ECh Enable 5 7 Scan Angle BFh Wide 5 8 Adaptive Scanning F1 CD Enable 5 7 Adaptive Scanning F8h 04h B3h Ambient Light Interference 5 10 Interference Suppression Mode Suppression Auto Detection Adaptive Scanning F8h 04h DBh Wide 5 11 Interference Suppression Scan Angle Beep After Good Decode 38h Enable 5 12 Beeper Tone 91h Medium 5 13 Beeper Volume 8Ch High 5 14 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 3 5 1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number Hand Held Trigger Mode 8Ah Standard Level 5 15 Picklist Mode FOh 92h Disabled Always 5 16 Decode Session Timeout 88h 9 9 Sec 5 16 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol 89h 0 5 Sec 5 17 Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern FOh 32h Enable 5 17 Parameter Pass Through Fih 71h Disable 5 18 Decoding lllumination 2Ah Enable 5 19 Batch Mode F1 20h No Batch Mode 5 20 FIPS Mode F1h EOh Disable 5
248. caps 4 13 snapshot aiming pattern 6 6 snapshot mode 6 6 supplementals 12 10 symbologies default table 12 2 timeout between decodes same symbol 5 17 transmit code ID character 5 22 transmit no read message 5 26 transmit UK postal check digit 12 58 transmit US postal check digit 12 57 trigger mode hand held 5 15 UCC coupon extended code 12 22 postal uie oreet EE 12 57 RE Pale ed AUR 4 22 UPC composite mode 12 67 UPC EAN coupon code 12 22 suppredundanoy 12 13 12 14 UPC EAN JAN supplemental AIM ID format 12 14 supplemental redundancy 12 13 ek Ree ER 12 7 UPC A preamble 12 16 UPC A E E1 check digit 12 14 12 15 12 16 UPC E a e ERE a Rex ned 12 7 UPC E preamble 12 17 cem arent 12 8 UPU FICS 12 62 US planet 12 56 US postnet eee ede RR 12 56 USB caps lock 9 10 country keyboard types 9 8 default table 9 3 device
249. cation Authentication Type PEAP TTLS EAP FAST Description CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is one of the two main authentication protocols used to verify the user name and password for PPP Internet connections CHAP is more secure than PAP because it performs a three way handshake during the initial link establishment between the home and remote machines It can also repeat the authentication anytime after the link is established EAP GTC EAP GTC is used during phase 2 of the authentication process This method uses a time synchronized hardware or software token generator often in conjunction with a user PIN to create a one time password MD5 Message Digest 5 MD5 is an authentication algorithm developed by RSA MD5 generates a 128 bit message digest using a 128 bit key IPSec truncates the message digest to 96 bits MS CHAP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol MS CHAP is an implementation of the CHAP protocol that Microsoft created to authenticate remote Windows workstations MS CHAP is identical to CHAP except that MS CHAP is based on the encryption and hashing algorithms used by Windows networks and the MS CHAP response to a challenge is in a format optimized for compatibility with Windows operating systems Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 51 Table 2 9 Tunneled Authentication Options Continued Authentication Type Tunneled Authentic
250. ces HID Keyboard Emulation IBM Table Top USB IBM Hand Held USB USB CDC Host USB OPOS Handheld 9 6 2070 2090 User Guide USB Device Type continued Simple COM Port Emulation Symbol Native API SNAPI with Imaging Interface Symbol Native API SNAPI without Imaging Interface ActiveSync Host USB Interface 9 7 CDC COM Port Emulation When enabled the device reports a generic non unique GUID in place of its unique GUID This allows a single COM port to be allocated for multiple devices although only a single such device should be connected at any given time When disabled the unique GUID reports to the host machine and a COM port is allocated for that particular device Enable Static CDC Disable Static CDC Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type select whether to enable or disable status handshaking Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking
251. code Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the device s capability Symbologies 12 47 Set Lengths for Codabar continued Codabar One Discrete Length Codabar Two Discrete Lengths Codabar Length Within Range Codabar Any Length 12 48 2070 2090 User Guide CLSI Editing Parameter 36h Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first fifth and tenth characters of a 14 character Codabar symbol Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format J NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters Enable CLSI Editing 01h Disable CLSI Editing 00h NOTIS Editing Parameter 37h Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format Enable NOTIS Editing 01h Disable NOTIS Editing 00h Symbologies 12 49 Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop Characters Detection Parameter F2h 57h Select whether to detect upper case or lower case Coda
252. code below Unlocked Pairing Mode Locked Pairing Mode Lock Override Lock Override overrides a locked device base pairing and connects a new device In Multipoint to Point mode this unpairs any disconnected out of range device first in order to connect the new device To use Lock Override scan the bar code below followed by the pairing bar code on the cradle LockOverride 4 22 2070 2090 User Guide Pairing Methods There are two pairing methods The default method allows the device and cradle to pair connect when the pairing bar code on the cradle is scanned A second method pairs the device and cradle when the device is inserted in the cradle To enable this feature scan Enable Pair On Contacts below With this feature enabled it is not necessary to scan the pairing bar code on the cradle If the pairing is successful a low high connection beep sequence sounds a few seconds after the device is placed in the cradle See Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4 3 for other beep sequences To enable or disable pairing on contacts scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Pair On Contacts Disable Pair on Contacts Unpairing Unpair the device from the cradle or PC host to make the cradle available for pairing with another device S
253. creen ICMP Ping Tests the wireless network connection Trace Route Tests a connection at the network layer between the device and any place on the network Known APs Displays the APs in range using the same ESSID as the device Quit Exits the Wireless Diagnostics screen Each of the Wireless Diagnostics option screens includes a back button ej to return to the Wireless Diagnostics screen 2 88 2070 2090 User Guide ICMP Ping The CMP Ping screen allows testing of a connection at the network layer part of the IP protocol between the device and any other device on the network Ping tests only stop when Stop Test is selected the Wireless Diagnostics application is closed or if the device switches between infrastructure and ad hoc modes To open the CMP Ping screen select ICMP Ping in the Wireless Diagnostics screen Wireless Diagnostics 1 ICMP Ping IP 1 x Start Test size 32 AP Not Available Signal dBm Noise dBm SNR dB Total Tx 0 Total Rx Lost Last RT Time ms Avg RT Time ms Min RT Time ms Figure 2 114 Ping Screen To perform an ICMP ping 1 Inthe P field enter an IP address or select an IP address from the drop down list 2 Fromthe Size drop down list select a size value 3 Select Start Test The ICMP Ping test starts Information of the ping test displays in the appropriate fields The following statistics appear on the page e Signal
254. d CapCode Parameters Parameter Defined Width Number of pixels Height Number of pixels Format JPEG BMP TIFF JPEG quality 1 most compression to 100 best quality Bits Per Pixel not applicable to JPEG format 1 2 levels 4 16 levels 8 256 levels BMP format does not use compression JPEG and TIFF formats do Dimensions The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns The line width of the signature capture box is insignificant The thinnest element width referred to here as X is nominally 10 mils 1 mil 0 0254 mm Select this as an exact multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used For example when using a 203 DPI dots per inch printer and printing 2 dots per module the resulting X dimension is 9 85 mils Data Format The device output is formatted according to Table F 3 Symbol devices allow different user options to output or inhibit bar code type Selecting Symbol ID as the bar code type for output identifies the CapCode with letter i Table Data Format File Format Image Size 1 byte Type 1 byte 4 bytes BIG Endian Image Data JPEG 1 See Table F 1 last column Same bytes as in a data file BMP 3 TIFF 4 F 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Additional Capabilities Regardless of how the signature is captured the output signature image is de skewed and right side up A device that cap
255. d certificates in the Installed Server Certificates dialog An hour glass may appear as the wizard populates the existing certificate list If the required certificate is not listed install it Profile Entry ES Installed User Certificates nn Certificate Services Install Certificate Validate Server Certificate Figure 2 62 nstalled Server Certificates Dialog Box Server Certificate Installation To install a server certificate for authentication 1 Tab to Install Certificate and press ENT The Import Certificate dialog displays Choose Import from File cer pfx and select OK Import Certificate Select Option e Import from File cer pfx Import User Cert from Server Figure 2 63 Certificates Dialog Box Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 55 2 Adialog displays that lists the certificate files found with the default extension Manage Profiles Open Folder Folders X Type Certificates cer X ame Figure 2 64 Open Screen 3 Browse to the file and select OK 4 Aconfirmation dialog verifies the installation If the information in this dialog is correct select Yes If the information in this dialog is not correct select No The wizard returns to the Installed Server Certs dialog Select the newly installed certificate from the drop down list Root Certificate Store Do you want to ADD the following certificate to the Root Store Subject EAP ENG COM US
256. de 11 4567 3 412 89 C 4 12070 2090 User Guide Code 128 9012345678901234 123456789012345678 Codabar MSI 123456789 Interleaved 2 of 5 234567891234 Sample Bar Codes 5 PDF417 y Data Matrix Maxicode gt veux 2 SO DAC A T4 7 C 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide OR Code US Postnet ETT 0123456784 UK Postal lh ed Hg Hol he eon D LABCDIABSMX Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes 0 1 2 3 For parameters requiring specific numeric values scan the appropriately numbered bar code s 0 1 2 3 D 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide 4 5 6 7 For parameters requiring specific numeric values scan the appropriately numbered bar code s 4 5 6 7 Numeric Bar Codes D 3 8 9 For parameters requiring specific numeric values scan the appropriately numbered bar code s 8 9 Cancel In case of an error or to change the selection scan the bar code below Cancel D 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Appendix Alphanumeric Bar Codes Alphanumeric Keyboard Space p E 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 3 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued amp E 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Gu
257. dle until it clicks into place engaging the contacts in the cradle and device When inserting batteries in the cradle align the connectors on the bottom of the battery with the battery charging connectors in the cradle Push down on the top of the battery until it clicks into place engaging the contacts in the cradle Desk Mount Wall Mount Figure 13 1 nsert Device in Desk Wall Mount Cradles NOTE When inserting the device in a wall mounted cradle ensure the device s hook recesses engage the hooks on the wall mount adapter Removing the Device from the Four Slot Cradle To remove the scanner from a vertically mounted cradle remove the bottom of the scanner first then gently pull the top of the scanner out of the cradle Accessories 13 7 Sending Data to the Host Computer MT2000 Series include Ethernet cradle drivers that initiate automatically when you place the device in a properly connected four slot Ethernet cradle The cradle receives data from the device and transmits it to the host computer via the Ethernet cable Prior to inserting the device in the cradle it is recommended that you turn off the device s wi fi radio to avoid interference To turn off the radio go to the Home screen on the device and select Config Wireless Companion Disable Radio Charging To charge the battery in the device and or a spare battery ensure the correct power supply is connected then place the device battery in the cradle see
258. e IDOL Figure 11 2 PS2 Type Keyboard Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 13 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge J NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair For example if you enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan B it transmits as b J as and as Scanning outputs the keystroke equivalent of gt Table 11 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Full ASCII Code 39 ASCII Value Encode Character Keystroke 1001 A CTRLA 1002 B CTRL B 1003 C CTRL C 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRL 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRL G 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1009 CTRL HORIZONTAL TAB 1010 J CTRL J 1011 K 1012 L SABER 1013 M CTRL 1014 N 1015 80 1016 P CTRLP 1017 Q 1018 R CTRLR 1019 S CTRL S 1020 T CINE 1021 U SIDE 1022 V CTRL V 1023 W CTRL W 1 keystroke bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 11 10 Otherwise the unbolded keystroke transmits 11 14 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 11 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII Code 39 ASCII Value Encode Character Keystroke 1024 X CTRL X 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL Z 1027 CTRL
259. e Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 00h System Character lt CHARACTER lt DATA gt 01h System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE SYSTEM gt lt gt 02h Symbologies 12 19 Convert UPC E to UPC A Parameter 25h Enable this to convert UPC E zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion the data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Disable this to transmit UPC E decoded data as UPC E data without conversion Convert UPC E to UPC A Enable 01h Do Not Convert UPC E to UPC A Disable 00h Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Parameter 26h Enable this to convert UPC E1 decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion the data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Disable this to transmit UPC E1 decoded data as UPC E1 data without conversion Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Enable 01h
260. e Token Q Static Advanced ID Figure 2 68 EAP GTC Password Dialog Box Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 57 Two radio buttons are added to allow the user to choose a token or static password Choose the Token radio button when using the profile in conjunction with a token generator hardware or software The system administrator should supply the user with a token generator for use with EAP GTC token profiles A token generator generates a numeric value that is entered into the password field at connect time usually along with a PIN Tokens have a very limited lifetime and usually expire within 60 seconds The token generator is time synchronized with a token server When authenticating the RADIUS server asks the token server to verify the token entered The token server knows what value the token generator generates given the time of day and the username Since tokens expire EAP GTC token profiles are treated differently A prompt appears at the appropriate time to enter a token even if a token has previously been entered Tokens are never cached in the credential cache though the username that is entered when the token is entered is cached Choose the Static radio button the Enter Password field is enabled and a password can be entered if desired A profile that uses an EAP GTC tunnel type with a static password is handled in the same manner as other profiles that have credentials that don t expire 1 Select the Advanced ID c
261. e With this option a delay can occur when transmitting the first characters The device sounds a decode beep upon bar code scan followed by a connection a page timeout a rejection beep or a transmission error beep Select this option to optimize battery life on the device and mobile device Note that auto reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands Auto reconnect Immediately When the device loses connection it attempts to reconnect If a page timeout occurs the device attempts reconnect on a trigger pull Select this option if the device s battery life is not an issue and you do not want a delay to occur when the first bar code is transmitted Note that auto reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands Disable Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode When the device loses connection you must re establish it manually Auto reconnect on Bar Code Data Auto reconnect Immediately Disable Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode 4 18 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Out of Range Indicator An out of range indicator can be set by scanning Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt on page 4 14 and extending the time using the Heconnect Attempt Interval on page 4 15 For example with Beep on Reconnect Attempt disabled while the device loses radio connection when it is taken out of range the device attempts to reconnect silently during the time interval set by
262. e Device from a Vertical Mount Cradle Forklift or Wall Mount 1 13 Charge the Device Battery in the Cradle 0 2222 2 2012 1 13 Charging Indicator LED 1 13 Configure the Device qe 1 13 Battery Charging ee a 1 14 Battery Safety PDT HU 1 15 Security Implementation Protection From Counterfeit Batteries 1 15 Motorola Battery Safety Recommendations For 1 15 Proper and Safe Battery Disposal amp 1 15 Sending Data to ihe Host Computer gt 5 lt rtm rct ike eek 1 16 Cable aS 1 16 stage 1 16 Paing mee 1 16 Lost Connection to 1 16 Radio Hm 1 16 1 17 Suspending Powering Off the Device 1 17 Resetting the Device 1 17 Turning the WLAN Radio On and 1 17 Waking the Device eran eae enn eee Le on 1 17 Battery Removal e 1 18 Spare Battery Charging
263. e ID Character or AIM Code ID Character for Transmit Code ID Character on page 5 23 the device appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message Enable No Read 01h Disable No Read 00h 5 28 2070 2090 User Guide Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences Introduction You can program the device to perform various functions or activate different features This chapter describes imaging preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features The device ships with the settings in Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults on page 6 2 also see Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when you power down the device J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging If not using a USB cable select a host type after the power up beeps sound See Chapter 9 USB Interface and Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface for specific host information This is only necessary upon the fi
264. e Scanning Interference Suppression Mode Interference Suppression Scan Angle Update Device Configurations 07 RevA 8 2014 Additions Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Set Lengths Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter Pass Through Update Adaptive Scanning default Remove ISBT Concatenation Redundancy bar code Table of Contents Warranty saccades T iv Revision History ERI About This Guide ITFOGUGCUON E xix Documentation Set C xix Device Configurations eee XX Cradle Configurations Chapter Descriptions sistas C ccc Notational xxii Related Documents xxiii Service InfOTITIBHIOIL cusan eii ba dana abus ask YE ma ea wv dup Gad dans xxiii Chapter 1 Getting Started EUROS 1 1 Unpacking 1 1 2 1 1 C M S 1 1 STB2000 C10007R Single Slot Charge Only with ActiveSync 1 1 STB2000 F10007R Forklift Single Slot Charge Only 1 2 STB2078 C10007WR Single Slot Multi interface Bluetoot
265. e and accessories 72E 117858 xx Enterprise Mobility Developer Kit EMDK Help File provides API information for writing applications e MCL Technologies Start up guide for the MT2000 provides start up information for running MCL on an 20 0 device XX MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Device Configurations Configuration Display Memory Data Capture Operating System Keypad MT2090 ML4D62170WR 802 11 Bluetooth 320x240 64 MB RAM 1D Windows CE 5 0 21 key Color 64 MB Flash Medium Range WW MT2090 SD4D62170WR 802 11 Bluetooth 320x240 64 MB RAM 1D 2D Windows CE 5 0 21 key Color 64 MB Flash Standard Range MT2090 HD4D62170WR 802 11 Bluetooth 320x240 64 MB RAM 1D 2D Windows CE 5 0 21 key Color 64 MB Flash High Definition MT2090 DP4D62170WR 802 11 Bluetooth 320x240 64 MB RAM DPM Windows CE 5 0 21 key Color 64 MB Flash MT2070 ML4D62370WR Bluetooth 320x240 64 MB RAM 1D Windows CE 5 0 21 key Color 64 MB Flash Medium Range MCL MT2070 SD4D62370WR Bluetooth 320x240 64 MB RAM 1D 2D Windows CE 5 0 21 key Color 64 MB Flash Standard Range MCL MT2070 HD4D62370WR Bluetooth 320x240 64 MB RAM 10 20 Windows CE 5 0 21 key Color 64 MB Flash MCL MT2070 DP4D62370WR Bluetooth 320x240 64 MB RAM DPM MCL Windows CE 5 0 21 key Color 64 MB Flash Cradle Configurations Cradle Configuration Type Radio STB2000 C10007R Si
266. e can also be re enabled by using the Manage Profile screen to connect to the cancelled profile Log off the device to prevent another user from accessing the current users network privileges Switch device users to quickly logoff the device and allow another user to log into the device No User Logged In If no user is logged into the device launch the login dialog and log in to access user profiles The Login dialog varies if it is e Launched by WCS because the service is connecting to a new profile that needs credentials Launched by WCS because the service is trying to verify the credentials due to credential caching rules Launched by a user when a user is logged in Launched by a user when no user is logged in 2 92 2070 2090 User Guide Table 2 28 Log On Off Options Field Description Wireless Profile Field When launching the login application the Wireless Profile field has available all the wireless profiles that require credentials This includes profiles that use EAP TLS PEAP LEAP EAP TTLS or EAP FAST Profile Status Icon The profile status icon next to the profile name shows one of the following states The selected profile is cancelled The selected profile is enabled but is not the current profile e The profile is the current profile always the case for WCS Launched Username Password and The Username Password and Domain Name fields are used as credentials for the profile
267. e connect or disconnect Key or scan trigger press Real Time Clock set to wake up Auto Off When the automatic power off function AC power added or removed places the device in suspend mode these Cradle cable connect or disconnect actions wake the device Key or scan trigger press Real Time Clock set to wake up File System Directory Structure The device directory structure displays all of the file folders The pre installed folders are in flash file system memory aus 6 N Application Data BTExplorer My Documents Network Platform Menu Close Figure 2 142 Directory Structure Application and Platform folders are located in flash file system memory The Windows Program Files profiles and My Documents folders are composite RAM based folders generated from ROM many of these files are marked read only The Network folder is a link to file systems mapped using the network redirector The files do not physically reside on the device e The Temp and Recycled folders typically contain RAM based files J NOTE All files copied to the RAM based folders are lost after a cold boot 2 108 2070 2090 User Guide Chapter 3 Scanning Introduction This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions techniques involved in scanning bar codes general instructions and tips about scanning and decode zone diagrams Beeper Definitions The device issues diff
268. e device e g Motorola and the device does not appear in General Discoverable Mode Note that it can take longer to discover the device in this mode The device remains in Limited Discoverable Mode for 30 seconds and green LEDs flash while in this mode It is then non discoverable To re active Limited Discoverable Mode press the trigger General Discoverable Mode Limited Discoverable Mode 4 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide HID Host Parameters The device supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile In this mode the device can interact with Bluetooth enabled hosts supporting the HID profile as a Bluetooth keyboard Scanned data is transmitted to the host as keystrokes Following are the keyboard parameters supported by the HID host HID Country Keyboard Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type North American Standard Keyboards French Windows German Windows French Canadian Windows 98 Spanish Windows Radio Communications 4 9 HID Country Keyboard Types Country Codes continued Italian Windows Swedish Windows UK English Windows Japanese Windows Frenc
269. e device or battery come in contact with water Water can get into the circuits leading to corrosion If the device and or battery get wet have them checked by your administrator or contact Motorola even if they appear to be working properly Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects If metal objects stay in prolonged contact with the battery contact points the battery could become very hot Do not place the battery near a heat source Excessive heat can damage the device or the battery High temperatures can cause the battery to swell leak or malfunction Therefore Do dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a hair dryer microwave oven Avoid leaving the device in areas of high temperatures Do not drop the battery or device Dropping these items especially on a hard surface can potentially cause damage Contact your service provider or Motorola if your device or battery was damaged from dropping or as a result of exposure to high temperatures IMPORTANT Use only Motorola branded batteries and chargers WARNING Use of a non Motorola battery or charger may present a risk of fire explosion leakage or other Proper and Safe Battery Disposal amp Recycling Proper battery disposal is not only important for safety it also benefits the environment Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local regulations Contact your local recycling center
270. e device to transmit and receive data with an AP Infrastructure is the default mode Table2 5 Operating Mode Fields Field Description Operating Mode Infrastructure Select Infrastructure to enable the device to transmit and receive data with an AP Infrastructure is the device default mode Ad Hoc Select Ad Hoc to enable the device to form its own local network where devices communicate peer to peer without APs using a shared ESSID If Ad Hoc mode was selected see Channel on page 2 46 If Infrastructure mode was selected see Security Mode on page 2 47 Country Country is used to determine if the profile is valid for the country of operation The profile country must match the country in the options page or it must match the acquired country if 802 11d is enabled Single Country Use When the device is only to be used in a single country set every profile country to Allow Any Country In the Options gt Regulatory dialog box see Figure 2 99 on page 2 77 set the country to the specific country the device is to be used in and deselect uncheck the Enable 802 11d option This is the most common and the efficient configuration It eliminates the initialization overhead associated with acquiring a country via 802 11d Multiple Country Use When the device may be used in more than one country select check the Enable 802 11d option in the Regulatory Options dialog box see Figure 2 99 on page 2 77 This eliminates the need for repr
271. e error message on every attempt to transmit data E FI e nable FIPS Mod 01h ode dU Disable FIPS M 00h DPM Scanning MT2070 DP only Parameter F1h 09h Unlike bar codes that are typically printed on labels a direct part mark DPM is a symbol that is marked directly on an item s surface for permanent identification These symbols are marked using methods such as laser etching and dot peening see Figure 3 5 on page 3 6 for an example of a dot peen symbol The MT2070 DP DPM reader scans these types of symbols DPM scanning is enabled by default If you disabled DPM scanning scan Enable DPM Scanning below J NOTE When the MT2070 DP is DPM enabled the scanner reads all symbols including DPM 1D PDF 417 etc If you do not require DPM reading scan Disable DPM Scanning to ensure optimum scanner performance If you enable DPM Scanning disable Picklist Mode on page 5 16 when scanning a DPM bar code Picklist performance is not guaranteed for DPM bar codes Enable DPM Scanning 01h Disable DPM Scanning 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 23 Miscellaneous Parameters Transmit Code ID Character Parameter 2Dh A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code This is useful when decoding more than one code type I
272. e general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin start character data or message character check character if any stop character and trailing margin Within this framework each recognizable symbology uses its own unique format See Symbology Bar Code Density The number of characters represented per unit of measurement e g characters per inch Bar Height The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width Bar Width Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar Bit Binary digit One bit is the basic unit of binary information Generally eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning Bits per Second bps Bits transmitted or received Bluetooth A technology that provides a way to connect and exchange information between devices such as scanners mobile phones laptops PCs and printers over a secure globally unlicensed short range radio frequency Glossary 2 gt 2070 2090 User Guide Boot or Boot up The process a computer goes through when it starts During boot up the computer can run self diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software bps See Bits Per Second Byte On an addressable boundary eight adjacent binary digits 0 and 1 combined in a pattern to represent a specific character or numeric value Bits are numbered from th
273. e remote device and is the Master Scan Serial Port Profile Master then scan the PAIR bar code for the remote device See Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 23 for information about creating a pairing bar code for a remote device Serial Port Profile Slave Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support see page 4 6 The device connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and behaves like there s a serial connection The device accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the Slave Scan Serial Port Profile Slave and wait for the incoming connection Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support See page 4 6 for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and Master Slave definitions The device connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and behaves like a keyboard The device accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the slave Scan Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave and wait for the incoming connection NOTE 1 The device supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile For detailed information and HID host parameters see HID Host Parameters on page 4 8 2 When the device is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the device automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication For more information see Auto reconnect Feature on pa
274. e removal Stop Space Removal Scan the bar code below to remove all leading zeros Remove Leading Zeros Stop Space Removal Remove Leading Zeros Stop Zero Removal Scan the bar code below to disable the removal of zeros Stop Zero Removal 14 38 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Pad Data with Spaces To pad data to the left scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces Use Send commands to activate this parameter Pad Spaces To Length 1 Pad Spaces To Length 3 Pad Spaces To Length 5 Pad Spaces To Length 7 Pad Spaces To Length 2 Pad Spaces To Length 4 Pad Spaces To Length 6 Advanced Data Formatting 14 39 Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 8 Pad Spaces To Length 9 Pad Spaces To Length 10 Pad Spaces To Length 11
275. e right 0 through 7 with bit 0 the low order bit One byte in memory is used to store one ASCII character C CDRH Center for Devices and Radiological Health A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety This agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation CDRH Class 1 This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification This class is considered intrinsically safe even if all laser output were directed into the eye s pupil There are no special operating procedures for this class CDRH Class 2 No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit Laser operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human exposure Character A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function such as a number letter punctuation mark or communications control contained in a message Character Set Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology Check Digit A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for other symbologies Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is decoded Codabar A discrete self checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 a
276. e the remote device rejects the connection attempt the device sounds a connection reject beep sequence see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4 3 and deletes the remote pairing address If this happens a pairing bar code must be scanned to attempt a new connection to the remote device v NOTE f a bar code is scanned while the auto reconnect sequence is in process a transmission error beep sequence sounds and the data is not transmitted to the host After a connection is reestablished normal scanning operation returns For error beep sequence definitions see Beeper Definitions on page 3 1 The device has memory available for storing a remote Bluetooth address for each Master mode SPP Cradle When switching between these modes the device automatically tries to reconnect to the last device it was connected to in that mode lt J NOTE Switching between Bluetooth host types by scanning a host type bar code page 4 4 causes the radio to be reset Scanning is disabled during this time It takes several seconds for the device to re initialize the radio at which time scanning is enabled Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback When a device disconnects as it goes out of range it immediately attempts to reconnect While the device attempts to reconnect the green LED continues to blink If the auto reconnect process fails the device emits a page timeout beep long low long high and stops blinking the LED The process can be restarted by pulling the tri
277. e user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design Motorola does not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any Motorola Inc intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in Motorola products MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holding LLC and are used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Motorola Solutions Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http www motorolasolutions com Warranty The MT2000 Series is warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of 36 months from date of shipment provided that the product remains unmodified and is operated under normal and proper conditions For the complete Motorola hardware product warranty statement go to http www motorolasolutions com warranty Revision History Changes to the original manual are listed below Change Date Description 01 RevA
278. ec 2 32 Me 2 34 2 35 Scan TN 2 36 Scan NI uo oO 2 37 View aE Ea E aar eE EA OaE EEE ARE ETARE 2 38 a cn 2 38 DEIC CN N ea 2 38 Image Viewer Devices Equipped with 2 39 pes S 2 39 estie 2 39 OPEN T 2 39 o mem M 2 40 2 40 eo 2 40 Cog MT 2 41 Wireless Companion MT2090 Only 2 41 Find WING E cm 2 42 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Manage Profiles user end ins 2 42 Changing Profiles S SO SES 2 43 Creating a New dpi 2 43 4151 20 9 PR 2 44 POTS 2 2 44 hee ge 2 44 Operating WGN Sci axis de 22s oe 2 44 Operating Mode Re 2 45 Pucci
279. ecode Decode To recognize a bar code symbology e g UPC EAN and then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned Decode Algorithm A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol Decryption Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data Also see Encryption and Key Depth of Field The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum element width Discrete Code A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters intercharacter gaps are not part of the code Discrete 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars two of which are wide The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded spaces are insignificant Only numeric characters 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded E EAN European Article Number This European International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and symbology standards Element dimensions are specified metrically EAN is used primarily in retail Element Generic term for a bar or space Encoded Area Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern including start stop characters and data RS 232 ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the host ESD Electro Static Discharge
280. ecommended you use an ESD dongle with the USB cable ESD part numbers KT 8830 03R 3 piece kit or KT 8830 10R 10 piece kit Using the STB2000 Cradle and USB Cable 1 Ensure ActiveSync v4 5 or Windows Mobile Center is installed on the PC Visit http Awww microsoft com for ActiveSync downloads Connect the USB cable to the STB2000 cradle and to the PC Place the MT2000 into the STB2000 cradle ActiveSync should autodetect and make the connection To view the files loaded on the device click Explore in the ActiveSync window Using Only a USB Cable J NOTE Prior to connecting a USB cable to the device ensure an appropriate tool is available to remove the cable connected to the device Connect the USB cable to the bottom of the MT2000 and to the PC Ensure a U displays in the upper right corner of the MT2000 screen This indicates the cable connection was detected From the MT2000 Home menu click Config gt Config USB Scroll to ActiveSync and click Enter Click Close ActiveSync should autodetect and make the connection To view the files loaded on the device click Explore in the ActiveSync window Quick Startup Exercises 3 Establishing a Bluetooth BT Connection Using Open Bluetooth J NOTE This is not using BTExplorer J NOTE PC laptop manufacturers may use different screens throughout enumerator configuration The exercise below is a generic setup Exercise Follow the steps below to connect as HID slave a
281. ed Caps Lock When enabled the device inverts upper and lower case characters on the device bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard Caps Lock state Disable Simulated Caps Lock Enable Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case When enabled the device converts all bar code data to the selected case No Case Conversion Convert All to Upper Case Convert to LowerCase 4 14 2070 2090 User Guide Auto reconnect Feature When in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the device automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication This can happen if the device goes out of range with the remote device or if the remote device powers down The device tries to reconnect for the period of time specified by the Reconnect Attempt Interval setting During that time the green LED continues to blink If the auto reconnect process fails due to page timeouts the device sounds a page timeout beep long low long high and enters low power mode The auto reconnect process can be re started by pulling the device trigger If the auto reconnect process fails becaus
282. ed prior to the suspend resume within three attempts the user is disconnected from the network This option only applies when the user has previously logged in to the profile At Time Select this option to perform a local verification on an authenticated user at a specified time The time can be an absolute time or a relative time from the authentication and should be in at least five minute intervals Once the time has passed the user is prompted for credentials If the user does not enter the same credentials that were entered prior to the At Time event within three attempts the user is disconnected from the network This option only applies when the user has previously logged in to the profile Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 59 J NOTE Entering credentials applies the credentials to a particular profile Logging out clears all cached credentials Editing a profile clears any cached credentials for that profile Users who configure their APs to use the Fast Session Resume capability available with some Authentication Types e g PEAP should not check At Connect or On Resume if they wish to avoid being prompted to re enter credentials in circumstances in which Fast Session Resume would allow them not to be The following authentication types have credential caching EAP TLS PEAP LEAP e TTLS e EAP FAST Some exceptions to the credential caching rules apply for profiles where the credentials expire such as EAP GTC token
283. elongs To Set 2 Rule Belongs To Set 3 Rule Belongs To Set 4 Advanced Data Formatting 14 27 Actions Select how to format the data for transmission Send Data Send all data that follows send all data up to a specific character selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard page 14 91 or send the next X characters Note that only bar codes for Send Next 1 to 20 appear here and can be scanned multiple times to send values greater then 20 For instance to send the next 28 characters scan Send Next 20 Characters then Send Next 8 Characters Send Data Up To Character Send All Data That Remains Send Next Character Send Next 2 Characters Send Next 3 Characters Send Next 4 Characters 14 28 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send Data continued Send Next 5 Characters Send Next 7 Characters Send Next 9 Characters
284. en the Navigator xml file in Notepad and make the modifications Save the file ActiveSync the updated Navigator xml file to the Platform folder on the MT2000 D m Cold boot the device for the settings to take effect To cold boot the device press the number 2 key and trigger simultaneously until the screen refreshes twice and the characters gt gt gt display on the screen Modifying the Startup Program By default Navigator exe is the startup program for the device This program provides the Home screen view and accessibility to the demo config applications such as Scan and Scan Inventory Although these applications are very useful they may not be appropriate for the end user For this reason customizing the Vpplication Startup StartMenu Run file can alter the default startup application Exercise Follow the steps below to change the startup program from Navigator exe to Scan Item Required equipment STB2000 cradle USB cable p n CBAUO1 S07ZAR and the MT2070 1 ActiveSync to the MT2070 and navigate into the Application Startup folder 2 Copy the StartMenu Run file to the host PC and make a backup on the PC Open the StartMenu Run file in Notepad Modify the file to run Scan which is located in the Windows folder on the MT2070 Save the file ActiveSync the updated StartMenu Run file to the Application Startup folder of the MT2070 mp m Oo Cold boot the device for the settings to
285. entication This type does not establish a tunnel It requires a username and password TTLS Select this option to enable TTLS authentication This type establishes a tunnel and then based on the tunnel type uses a user certificate and or a username password Validating the server certificate is optional Tab to Next gt and press ENT Selecting PEAP TTLS or EAP FAST displays the Tunneled Authentication Type dialog Selecting None displays the Encryption dialog Selecting EAP TLS displays the Installed User Certs dialog Selecting LEAP displays the User Name dialog Tunneled Authentication Use the Tunneled Authentication Type dialog to select the tunneled authentication options The content of the dialog differs depending on the Authentication Type chosen Profile Entry Tunnel Authentication Type Provide User Certificate Figure 2 55 Tunneled Authentication Dialog Box 2 50 2070 2090 User Guide To select a tunneled authentication type 1 Select a tunneled authentication type from the drop down list See Table 2 9 for the Tunnel Authentication options for each authentication type 2 Select the User Certificate check box if a certificate is required If the TLS tunnel type that requires a user certificate is selected the check box is already selected 3 Tabto Next and press ENT The nstalled User Certificates dialog displays Table 2 9 Tunneled Authentication Options Tunneled Authenti
286. eps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connected to a new host To return all features to default values scan a bar code in Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks Indicates Default Disable Pair on Contacts Feature Option Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scan one bar code to set a specific parameter value Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter 4 2 2070 2090 User Guide Radio Communications Parameter Defaults Table 4 1 lists the defaults for radio communication parameters If you wish to change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in this chapter J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 4 1 Radio Communication Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Bluetooth Host Host Type Cradle Host 4 5 Bluetooth Friendly Name Device name and serial number 4 7 Discoverable Mode General 4 7 Country Keyboard Types Country Code North American 4 8 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay 0 msec 4 10 CAPS Lock Override Disable 4 10 Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 4 11 Emulate Keypad Disable 4 11 Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable 4 12 Fu
287. er Case 12 49 Detection MSI OBh Disable 12 50 Set Length s for MSI 1Eh 1Fh 4 to 55 12 50 MSI Check Digits 32h One 12 52 Transmit MSI Check Digit 2Eh Disable 12 52 MSI Check Digit Algorithm 33h Mod 10 Mod 10 12 53 Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 F1h 6Ah Disable 12 54 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths Fih 6Bh One Length 14 12 54 Fih 6Ch Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit F1h 6Eh Disable 12 56 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Fih 6Fh Disable 12 56 Chinese 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 FOh 98h Disable 12 57 Symbologies 12 5 Table 12 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 Fih 45h Disable 12 57 Inverse 1D Inverse 1D F1h 4Ah Regular 12 58 Postal Codes US Postnet 59h Disable 12 59 US Planet 5Ah Disable 12 59 Transmit US Postal Check Digit 5Fh Enable 12 60 UK Postal 5Bh Disable 12 60 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 60h Enable 12 61 Japan Postal FOh 22h Disable 12 61 Australian Postal FOh 23h Disable 12 62 Australia Post Format Fih CEh Autodiscriminate 12 63 Netherlands KIX Code FOh 46h Disable 12 64 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail F1h 50h Disable 12 64 UPU FICS Postal F1h 63h Disable 12 65 GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 FOh 52h Disable 12 66 GS1 DataBar Limited FOh 53h Disable 12 66 GS1 DataBar Expanded FOh 54h Disable 12 67 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN FOh 8Dh Disable 12 67 GS1 Da
288. er Good Decode Enable 01h Do Not Beep After Good Decode Disable 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 13 Beeper Tone Parameter 91h To select a decode beep frequency tone scan one of the following bar codes Low Tone 02h Medium Tone 01h High Tone 00h 5 14 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Beeper Volume Parameter 8Ch To select a beeper volume scan the Low Volume Medium Volume or High Volume bar code Low Volume 02h Medium Volume 01h High Volume 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 15 Hand Held Trigger Mode Parameter 8Ah Select one of the following trigger modes for the device e Standard Level A trigger pull activates decode processing Decode processing continues until the bar code decodes you release the trigger or the Decode Session Timeout occurs Presentation Blink The device activates decode processing when it detects a bar code in its field of view After a period of non use the device enters a low power mode in which the LEDs turn off or blink at a low duty cycle until the device senses motion J NOTE Laser scanning is not applicable in hand he
289. er support number provided Unfortunately we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above Manual Title please include revision level How familiar were you with this product before using this manual Very familiar Slightly familiar Notat all familiar Did this manual meet your needs If not please explain What topics need to be added to the index if applicable What topics do you feel need to be better discussed Please be specific What can we do to further improve our manuals Thank you for your input We value your comments Q MOTOROLA Motorola Solutions Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 USA 1 800 927 9626 http www motorolasolutions com MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holding LLC and are used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2014 Motorola Solutions Inc All rights reserved 72E 117859 07 Revision A August 2014
290. erent beep sequences and patterns to indicate status Table 3 1 defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the device Table 3 1 Beeper Definitions Beeper Sequence Indication Standard Use Low medium high beeps Power up Short high beep A bar code symbol was decoded if decode beeper is enabled 4 long low beeps Transmission error 5 low beeps Conversion or format error Low low low extra low beeps RS 232 receive error High beep The device detected a lt BEL gt character over RS 232 Image Capture Low beep Snapshot mode started or completed High low beeps Snapshot mode timed out Parameter Menu Scanning Low high beeps Input error incorrect bar code programming sequence or Cancel scanned High low beeps Keyboard parameter selected Enter value using numeric bar codes MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table3 1 Beeper Definitions Continued Sequence Indication High low high low beeps Successful program exit with change in parameter setting Macro PDF MPDF 2 long low beeps File ID error A bar code not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned 4 long low beeps Bad symbology Scanned a 1D or 2D bar code in a MPDF sequence a duplicate MPDF label a label in an incorrect order or trying to transmit an empty or illegal MPDF field Host Specific USB only 4 short high beeps The device ha
291. erver The nstall From Server screen displays Enter the user password and server information in the respective text boxes Select Retrieve to import the certificate Certificate Manager 7 1 Install From Server Figure 2 90 nstall From Server Screen Delete a Certificate To delete a certificates Select the certificate to delete Certificate Manager crt me uewe I T Root Test Lab CA H Properties Import Delete Class 3 Public View Buttons WB Root EntrustnetCd Hide Buttons Root Entrust net Secure S Root Equifax Secure Certi GeoTrust Global CA Figure 2 91 mport Certificate Dialog Box Select Delete from the menu Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 73 Manage PACs Users can view and manage Protected Access Credentials PACs used by Cisco s EAP FAST authentication protocol On the Wireless Companion menu scroll to Manage PACs and press ENT The PAC Manager screen displays Protected Access Credentials 112 ACSPACAuthority 81088468848964 Figure 2 92 Manager Screen PACs are uniquely identified by referencing a PAC Authority Identifier A ID the server that issued the and by the individual user identifier I ID The PACs display sorted by A ID default or by I ID in a tree display The PAC Manager screen contains buttons at the bottom of the screen A button might be disabled gray if the oper
292. ery charges Solid Green Battery LED Battery is fully charged Solid Blue Cradle LED Lights when power is applied off when there is no power applied Fast Green Flash Error condition 13 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Troubleshooting For detailed cradle and battery charger information see Chapter 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Chapter 14 Advanced Data Formatting Introduction Advanced Data Formatting ADF is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device Use ADF to edit scan data to suit particular requirements To implement ADF scan a related series of bar codes which begin on page 14 8 Avoid using ADF formatting with bar codes containing more than 60 characters To add a prefix or suffix value for such bar codes use Prefix Suffix Values on page 5 24 Using ADF with longer bar codes transmits the bar code in segments of length 252 or less depending on the host selected and applies the rule to each segment Rules Criteria Linked to Actions ADF uses rules to customize data These rules perform detailed actions when the data meets certain criteria One rule may consist of single or multiple criteria applied to single or multiple actions For instance a data formatting rule could be Criteria When scan data is Code 39 length 12 and data at the start position is the string 129 Actions X pad all sends with zeros to length 8 send all data up to X send a s
293. es Tab See Add a Bluetooth Service on page 2 97 2 100 2070 2090 User Guide Security Tab On the Favorites window Figure 2 128 use the keypad and select Device Settings Security BTExplorer Settings Device Info Services Security Discovery virtu BTExplorer Settings Securit O Encrypt Link On All Outgoing Connections To use PIN Code Authenticate or Authenticate Encrypt must be set on each local service To do this select Properties on a service under the Services tab OK Cancel Figure 2 134 Bluetooth Settings Security Screen To adjust the security settings for an individual service 1 Select the Services tab see Figure 2 130 on page 2 98 2 Select service 3 Select Properties 4 Select PIN Code Incoming Connection for automatic use of the PIN code entered in the PIN Code text box It is not recommended to use this automatic PIN code feature 5 Select Encrypt Link On All Outgoing Connections to enable or disable encryption Use encryption whenever possible Discovery Tab On the Favorites window Figure 2 128 use the keypad and select Device gt Settings gt Discovery BTExplorer Settings ix Device Info Services Security Discovery virtu BTExplorer Settings 9 Device Discovery Settings Inquiry Length Name Discovery Mode Automatic Discovered Devices Delete Devices Delete
294. es even when the Decode Aiming Pattern is disabled Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern 02h Disable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern 00h 5 18 2070 2090 User Guide Parameter Pass Through Parameter F1h 71h Enable Parameter Pass Through to transmit bar codes in the following format in Code 128 to the host lt FNC3 gt L lt any length data gt lt FNC3 gt B lt 12 characters of data gt Note that the special Code 128 character lt FNC3 gt must appear at the beginning of this data However if the appropriate data does not follow this as shown above it does not transmit to the host device Enable User Parameter Pass Through 01h Disable User Parameter Pass Through 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 19 Decoding Illumination Hand Held Mode only Parameter FOh 2Ah When in hand held mode selecting Enable Decoding Illumination causes the device to flash illumination to aid decoding Select Disable Decoding Illumination to prevent the device from using decoding illumination Enabling illumination usually results in superior images The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases Enable Decoding Illumination 01h Disable Decoding Illumination 00h
295. etis a eU Ku gan bed SEE 5 22 Transmit Gode ID Character SERO cs 5 22 m 5 23 Scan Data Transmission Format ir tt MEER E BUE 5 24 FN1 Substitution Values SE 5 25 Scan Data Transmission Format continued 5 25 Transmit Read Message tto ipte ute 5 26 Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences 6 EU 6 1 Scanning Sequence Examples 6 2 Errors While Scanning 6 2 Imaging Preferences Parameter 6 2 IMAGING PIBISISIICOS bte ied itis I E EUER UO bU DNE 6 4 Operational Modes cuiu dimito ue 6 4 Decode Mode M rc 6 4 Snapshot e Em 6 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Image Capture Illumination 6 5 Snapshot Mode Timeout e 6 6 Snapshot Aiming cris pr ea 6 6 limage Cropping EN E TE eee ee eee 6 7 Crop to Pixel Addresses
296. evels for decreasing levels of bar code quality As redundancy levels increase the device s aggressiveness decreases Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality Redundancy Level 1 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Table 12 2 Redundancy Level 1 Codes Code Type Code Length Codabar or less MSI 4 characters or less D 2 015 8 characters less 120145 8 characters or less Redundancy Level 2 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Table 12 3 Redundancy Level 2 Codes Code Code Length All All Redundancy Level 3 Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded The following codes must be read three times Table 12 4 Redundancy Level 3 Codes Code Type Code Length MSI 4 characters or less D 2o0f5 8 characters or less 120145 8 characters or less Codabar 8 characters or less 12 78 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Redundancy Level 4 The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded Table 12 5 Redundancy Level 4 Codes Code Type Code Length All All Redundancy Level 1 01h Redundancy Level 2 02h Redundancy Level 3 03h Redundancy Level 4 04h
297. ey Value Enable Disable 9 14 2070 2090 User Guide Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control key sequences see Table 9 2 on page 9 20 Enable this parameter to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping Simulated Caps Lock Enable this to invert upper and lower case characters on the bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard s Caps Lock state Disable Simulated Caps Lock Enable Simulated Caps Lock USB Interface 9 15 Convert Case Enable this to convert all bar code data to the selected case No Case Conversion to Upper Case Convert All to Lower Case 9 16 2070 2090 User Guide USB Transmission Speed Parameters Use the following parameters to speed USB data transmission e USB Polling Interval When using more current USB systems use this parameter to set a lower interval in order to increase data transmission speed Fast HID
298. f characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Codabar to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters scan Codabar One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Codabar Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Codabar Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Length Scan this option to de
299. f the box view and startup was selected to demonstrate the capabilities of the device and is not intended to be used by end users It is highly recommended that the view of selected programs be altered to prevent tampering The following device programs and screens can be customized default startup program Home screen shell Navigator exe view e Scan or Scan Inventory program e disable MT200X Scanner Services 7 2 2070 2090 User Guide Customizing the Startup Program By default Navigator exe is selected as the startup program This program provides the Home screen view and accessibility to the demonstration configuration applications such as Scan Item Scan Inventory File Explorer Task Manager MCL Client Wireless Companion MT2090 Only Although the demonstration configuration applications are very useful for presentations they may not be appropriate for the end user e g having access to all programs in addition to the customer designated program requirements For this purpose simple customization of the Application Startup StartMenu Run file can alter the default startup application For example to launch MCL as the default application instead of Navigator exe alter the contents of StartMenu Run by changing windows Navigator exe to Application MCL StartMCL exe The new startup application takes affect when the device restarts via a cold or warm boot Customizing the MT20X0 7 3
300. faces See the specific host chapter Z NOTE Disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the device may not recognize the new host Different cables are required for different hosts The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only The connectors may be different from those illustrated but the steps to connect the device remain the same Connecting STB2000 F Cradle 1 Insert the host interface cable into the cradle s USB host port See Figure 1 2 on page 1 4 2 Connect the forklift power supply to the cradle s power port if applicable 3 Optionally Insert the power supply cable ferrite into the support features on the cradle bottom and run the host and power cables into their respective cable grooves or use cable ties to secure them to the mounting plate after attaching it to the cradle For more information about mounting options and procedures refer to the documentation included with the cradle 4 If necessary scan the appropriate host bar code for non autodetected interfaces See the specific host chapter Changing the Host Interface To connect to a different host or to the same host using a different cable 1 Disconnect the power supply from the cradle if used 2 Disconnect the interface cable from the host 3 Connect the interface cable to the new host or the new interface cable to the existing host 4 Reconnect the power supply if required 5 If necessary scan the appropriate host
301. faults 5 2 User Preferences RR m m I 5 4 Set Default Parameter ra etti ned 5 4 poc 5 5 Decode Pager Motor 5 6 Parameter Bar Gode Scanning in epe Ou Erbe usi 5 7 Scan ANGIE fe HR 5 8 ene een en een ne ee To CO TD 5 9 Interference Suppression 5 10 Interference Suppression Scan Angle 5 11 Beep After Good Decode M 5 12 iniiae E E T E 5 13 Beeper Volume Re 5 14 Hand Held Trigger Mode Sei i 5 15 Decode Session Timeout 5 15 iv ideo 5 16 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol 5 17 Hand Held Decode Aiming 5 17 Decoding Illumination Hand Held Mode only 5 18 Mode M E 5 19 Modes of Operation d utei ee 5 19 iuis P 5 21 DPM Scanning MT2070 DP only 5 21 Miscellaneous Parameters r
302. function key F2 b is enabled A C b c when the Orange function key is enabled In alpha mode enable Orange function key the number of key presses determines the letter and case 1keypress a 2 key presses b 3 key presses c 4 key presses A 5 key presses B 6 key presses C 3 D Defaults to the number 3 when the Blue function key F3 d e f D E F is enabled D E F d e f when the Orange function key is enabled In alpha mode enable Orange function key the number of key presses determines the letter and case 1 key press d 2 key presses e 3 key presses f 4 key presses D 5 key presses E 6 key presses F F4 4 l 9 h i Defaults to the number 4 F4 when the Blue function key F4 9 h i G H I is enabled G H g h i when the Orange function key is enabled In alpha mode enable Orange function key the number of key presses determines the letter and case 1 key press g 2 key presses h 3 key presses i 4 key presses G 5 key presses H 6 key presses Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 5 Table2 1 Keypad Functionality Continued Press Blue Press Orange Key Description Key Key F5 5 J K kl Defaults to the number 5 F5 when the Blue function key F5 j k l J K L is enabled J K L j k I when the Orange function key is enabled In alpha mode enable Orange function key the number
303. ge 4 14 Radio Communications 4 5 Radio Communications Host Types continued Cradle Host Serial Port Profile Master Serial Port Profile Slave Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave 4 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Bluetooth Technology Profile Support With Bluetooth Technology Profile Support the cradle is not required for wireless communication The device communicates directly to the host using Bluetooth technology The device supports the standard Bluetooth Serial Port Profile SPP and HID Profiles which enable the device to communicate with other Bluetooth devices that support these profiles SPP the device connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like there s a serial connection HID the device connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard Master Slave Set Up The device can be set up as a Master or Slave When the device is set up as a Slave it is discoverable and connectable to other devices When the device is set up as a Master the Bluetooth address of the remote device to which a connection is requested is required A pairing bar code with the remote device address must be created and scanned to attempt a connection to the remote device See the Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 23 for information about creating a pairing bar code Master
304. gger The Beep on Reconnect Attempt feature is disabled by default When enabled the device emits 5 short high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnect attempt is in progress Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Radio Communications 4 15 Reconnect Attempt Interval When a device disconnects as it goes out of range it immediately attempts to reconnect for the default time interval of 30 seconds This time interval can be changed to one of the following options 30 seconds 1 minute 5 minutes 30 minutes e 1hour Indefinitely To set the Reconnect Attempt Interval scan one of the bar codes below Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Seconds Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Minute Attempt to Reconnect for 5 Minutes Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Minutes 4 16 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Reconnect Attempt Interval continued Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Hour Attempt to Reconnect Indefinitely Radio Communications 4 17 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode In Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave mode select a re connect option for when the device loses its connection with a remote device e Auto reconnect on Bar Code Data The device auto reconnects when you scan a bar cod
305. ght a profile on the Manage Profiles screen press ENT to display the menu scroll to Edit and press ENT Creating a New Profile Creating a new profile allows the user to configure profile name ESSID security network address information and the power consumption level 2 44 2070 2090 User Guide Profile ID Press the up or down Scroll key on the profile menu and select Add The Profile Entry dialog displays Profile Entry Profile Name ESSID Figure 2 51 Profile Entry Screen Profile Name The name and WLAN identifier of the network connection Enter a user friendly name for the device profile used to connect to either an AP or another networked device Example The Public LAN J NOTE Two profiles with the same user friendly name are acceptable but not recommended ESSID The ESSID is the 802 11 extended service set identifier The ESSID is 32 character maximum case sensitive string identifying the WLAN and must match the AP ESSID for the device to communicate with the AP Tab to Next gt and press ENT to move to the Operating Mode dialog Operating Mode Profile Entry x Operating Mode inlrasktruckure Country allow Any Country Figure 2 52 2 33 gt Operating Mode Country Screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 45 Operating Mode Select the operating mode Infrastructure or Ad Hoc from the Operating Mode drop down list The operating mode Infrastructure enables th
306. ght of the right ALT key USB Interface 9 27 Table 9 4 USB GUI Key Character Set Continued GUI Key Keystroke 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUI S 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z Note GUI Shift Keys The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key 9 28 2070 2090 User Guide Table 9 5 USB Key Character Set Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 11 5012 12 5013 1 5014 14 5015 15 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 F21 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 USB Interface 9 29 Table 9 6 USB Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 6043 6044 undefined 6045 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock 9 30 2070 2090 User Guide Table 9 7 USB Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 PgUp 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backsp
307. gle in the presence of interfering ambient light only when Interference Suppression Scan Angle is set to Medium see page 5 8 Interference Suppression Always On 01h Ambient Light Interference Suppression Auto Detection 02h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 11 Adaptive Scanning continued Interference Suppression Scan Angle Parameter F8h 04h DBh Medium Interference Suppression Scan Angle e Wide Interference Suppression Scan Angle Interference Suppression Scan Angle Medium 01h Recommended for maximum working range in the presence of interfering ambient light This is recommended for use applications where no change in scan angle is desired Reduced working range is possible on certain bar codes in various lighting conditions Using Interference Suppression Scan Angle Medium can improve working range in these circumstances Interference Suppression Scan Angle Wide 02h 5 12 2070 2090 User Guide After Good Decode Parameter 38h Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the device beeps after a good decode If selecting Do Not Beep After Good Decode the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error conditions Aft
308. h 1 2 STB2000 C40007R Four Slot Charge Only 1 2 STB2000 C40017R Four Slot Ethernet 1 2 SAC2000 4000CR Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 1 2 ACCESSOS S IINE NILUM MODI PN NEN LIE 1 2 LEHRER 1 3 Cradle Features a a AER 1 4 Single Slot Front View and Connections 1 4 Single Slat Back Me REA NOB RA EI 1 5 Single Slot Mounting 1 6 Four Slot Front View and Connections bin rete n ite Run 1 7 Four Slot Back VIEW 1 8 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Host d nz az oz RR 1 10 uo T rc 1 10 Insert the Battery 1 11 Connect the PNE 1 11 Connecting the STB20XX Cradle 1 11 Connecting STB2000 F Cradle 222 esee e ttn eren bk eaa in 1 12 Changing the Host Interface 1 12 Supplying Power to the ER Rusa pex EK rp EPIS ER EUIS 1 12 Using the USB Interface to Supply Power 1 12 Insert the Device in the Cradle eerte rere hk ae 1 13 Removing th
309. h Select this option to decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the device s capability Symbologies 12 25 Set Lengths for Code 128 continued Code 128 One Discrete Length Code 128 Two Discrete Lengths Code 128 Length Within Range Code 128 Any Length 12 26 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Enable Disable GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 Parameter OEh J NOTE Code128 must be enabled prior to using this symbology To enable or disable GS1 128 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable GS1 128 01h Disable GS1 128 00h Enable Disable ISBT 128 Parameter 54h J NOTE Code128 must be enabled prior to using this symbology ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry Scan a bar code below to enable or disable ISBT 128 If necessary the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data Enable ISBT 128 01h Disable ISBT 128 00h Symbologies 12 27 ISBT Concatenation Parameter F1h 41h Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types e f you select Disable ISBT Concatenation the device does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it encounters e If you select Enable ISBT Concatenation there must be two ISBT codes in order for the device to decode and perform concatenation The device does not
310. h Canadian Windows 2000 XP Portuguese Brazilian Windows 4 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when the HID host requires a slower transmission of data No Delay 0 msec Medium Delay 20 msec HID CAPS Lock Override Long Delay 40 msec When enabled the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows ASCII keyboard type and can not be disabled Do Not Override Caps Lock Key Disable Override Caps Lock Key Enable Radio Communications 4 11 HID Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host and an error beep sounds Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
311. heck box if advanced identification is desired 2 Tabto Next and press ENT The prompt for Login at dialog displays See Credential Cache Options on page 2 58 Advanced Identity Use the Advanced ID dialog to enter the 802 1X identity to supply to the authenticator This value can be 63 characters long and is case sensitive In TTLS and PEAP it is recommended entering the identity anonymous rather than a true identity plus any desired realm e g anonymous myrealm A user ID is required before proceeding m NOTE When authenticating with a Microsoft IAS server do not use advanced identity Enter 802 1x Identity 7 Enter Domain Figure 2 69 Advanced Identity Dialog Box Tab to Next gt and press ENT The Encryption dialog displays 2 58 2070 2090 User Guide Credential Cache Options If the user selected any of the password based authentication types then different credential caching options are available These options specify when the network credential prompts appear at connection on each resume or at a specified time Entering the credentials directly into the profile permanently caches the credentials In this case the device does not require user login If a profile does not contain credentials entered through the Profile Editor Wizard credentials must be entered when prompted either when connecting to the profile in the Manage Profiles screen or when logging onto the profile using
312. hentication encryption Open authentication with WEP 40 or WEP 128 and 802 1X authentications that use WEP128 Encryption e WPA Personal This mode allows the user to configure a WPA TKIP PSK protocol WPA2 Personal This mode allows the user to configure WPA2 PSK protocols with the Advanced Encryption Standard AES encryption method WPA Enterprise This mode allows the user to configure profiles with 802 1X Authentication that uses WPA and TKIP encryption method e WPA2 Enterprise This mode allows the user to configure profiles with 802 1X Authentication that uses WPA2 with AES encryption method Table2 7 Security Modes Authentication Security Mode Types Encryption Types Pass phrase Hexkey Configuration Legacy Pre WPA None Open Enabled User input required with pass phrase hex key EAP TLS WEP 40 40 24 configuration EAP FAST WEP 104 104 24 PEAP TKIP LEAP AES TTLS WPA Personal None TKIP Enabled User input required with pass phrase hex key configuration 2 Personal None AES Enabled User input required with pass phrase hex key configuration WPA Enterprise EAP TLS TKIP Disabled No user input required for encryption key EAP FAST PEAP LEAP TTLS WPA2 Enterprise EAP TLS AES Disabled No user input required for encryption key EAP FAST PEAP LEAP TTLS Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 49 Authentication Type Select an available authentication type from
313. ication type See Table 2 8 on page 2 49 Encryption Displays the current profile s encryption type See Table 2 11 on page 2 61 Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 85 Table2 25 Current Profile Screen Continued Field Description Channel Displays the channel currently being used to communicate with the AP Country Displays the country setting currently being used Transmit Power Displays the current radio transmission power level See Table 2 17 on page 2 68 IPv4 Status The Pv4 Status screen displays the current IP address subnet and other IP related information assigned to the device It also allows renewing the IP address if the profile is using DHCP to obtain the IP information Select Renew to initiate the IP address renewal process The Pv4 Status screen updates automatically when the IP address changes To open the Pv4 Status screen select Pv4 Status in the Wireless Status screen Wireless Status 3 IPv4 Status IP Type DHCP IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet 0 0 0 0 Gateway DHCP Server Lease Obtained Lease Expires DNS WINS MAC 00 15 70 D9 ED C6 Host Name WindowsCE Figure 2 110 Pv4 Status Screen Table 2 26 Pv4 Status Fields Field Description IP Type Displays the IP address assignment method used for the current profile DHCP or Static If the IP Type is DHCP the IP Address and other information shown is obtained from the DHCP server In this case the DHC
314. ice not paired to host connected cradle Pair the device to the cradle using PAIR bar code on the cradle Cradle not programmed for correct host interface Check device host parameters or edit options Interface cable is loose Ensure all cable connections are secure Cradle has lost connection to host In this exact order disconnect power supply disconnect host cable wait three seconds reconnect host cable reconnect power supply reestablish pairing Scanned data is incorrectly displayed on the host Cradle host communication parameters do not match host s parameters Ensure proper host is selected For RS 232 ensure the cradle s communication parameters match the host s settings For a Keyboard Wedge configuration ensure the system is programmed for the correct keyboard type and the CAPS LOCK key is off Ensure editing options e g UPC E to UPC A conversion are properly programmed 15 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 15 4 Troubleshooting the Single Slot Charge Multi interface Cradle Continued Symptom Device falls out of the cradle in the wall mount position Possible Cause Cradle has an incorrect adapter cup Action Ensure the wall mount adapter cup is installed and not the desktop cup Cradle latches are adjusted incorrectly Remove cradle from the shock absorbing plate by unscrewing 3 screws check that the position of the wall mo
315. ics screen Wireless Diagnostics 2 Trace Route Figure 2 116 Trace Route Screen In the IP combo box enter an IP address or choose one from the drop down list or enter a DNS Name and select Start Test When starting a test the trace route attempts to find all routers between the device and the destination The Round Trip Time RTT between the device and each router appears along with the total test time The total test time may be longer than all RTTs added together because it does not only include time on the network 2 90 2070 2090 User Guide Known APs The Known APs screen displays the APs in range using the same ESSID as the device This screen is only available in Infrastructure mode To open the Known APs screen select Known APs in the Wireless Diagnostics screen Wireless Diagnostics 3 Known APs Count 0 Scanning Figure 2 117 Known APs Screen Table 2 27 includes the definitions of the icons next to the AP Table 2 27 Current Profile Screen Icon Description ord The AP is the associated access point and is set to mandatory eh The AP is the associated access point but is not set to mandatory d The device is not associated to this AP but the AP is set as mandatory ga The device is not associated to this AP and the AP is not set as mandatory Select an AP to display a pop up menu with the following options Set Mandatory and Set Roaming Select Se
316. ide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued gt Alphanumeric Bar Codes 5 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued x E 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued J NOTE not confuse the bar codes that follow with those on the numeric keypad 0 1 2 3 4 Alphanumeric Bar Codes 7 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued TAM 5 6 7 NT 8 MTM 9 End of Message E 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued B D Alphanumeric Bar Codes 9 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued G H l J K L E 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued M N AMI Q R Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 11 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued 5 U TIAM V W X E 12 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued 2 b Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 13 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued f LAM g TII h DIL i E 14 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Al
317. ies Maintenance For trouble free service observe the tips that follow when using the device and its accessories MT20X0 Do not scratch the screen of the device e Although the device is water and dust resistant do not expose it to rain or moisture for an extended period of time In general treat the device as a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument Donot clean the device or expose it to rain or moisture when the battery is removed Without the battery the device is not water dust sealed Do not drop the device or subject it to strong impact Protect the device from temperature extremes Do not leave it on the dashboard of a car on a hot day and keep it away from heat sources Do not store or use the device in any location that is extremely dusty damp or wet Do not store or use the device with the auxiliary accessory cover off Without the accessory cover the device is not water dust sealed Do not use window cleaning solution Use a soft cloth dampened with a 50 50 solution of isopropyl alcohol and water Do not allow the solution to form a pool of liquid anywhere the screen or device Do not use a large amount of solution to cause the device to remain wet The display screen and scan window can often be cleaned with common office Scotch tape Apply the tape to surfaces and then peel the tape away in most cases the dirt can be removed along with the tape 15 2 MT2070 MT20
318. iewer 6 Config Menu Figure 2 32 Scan To IP Option on Home Screen Click the Setup tab Press the right soft key to display the Setup El Scan to IP Barcode Paired to host Suspend Figure 2 33 Scan To P Screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 33 Enter the Host IP address or keep the default setting Press TAB to Enter the Host port no or keep the default setting Exit program ESC Cancel changes Host Port 32661 Scanner enabled Version 1 0 4 1 Advanced Figure 2 34 Terminal Host Setup Screen Click Create pairing barcode and EU the bar code ee units can scan the monitor Advanced mode Only licensed MT2090 s Host 10 11 32 190 Host port no Note If you experience connection problems please make sure your firewall allows traffic on the selected TCP port number C Minimize Scan to IP at startup Disable update notifier Figure 2 35 Host Application PC Setup Screen 2 34 2070 2090 User Guide Scan the bar code to pair with the host PC server print and scan the bar code or for imager units scan the bar code directly on the monitor Scan to IP Scan barcode to pair with host PC server Host 10 11 32 190 Port 32661 Figure 2 36 Scan to IP Pair Bar Code The host application and the MT2090 device should now be paired The device installer can also be used to Configure the WLAN settings Conf
319. igure scanner settings Buy and activate an advanced license for additional features If you have problems or questions select FAQ at http www scan to ip com Suspend Press the left soft key to suspend the device Press any key to wake the suspended device Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 35 MCL When you select MCL from the Home screen the MCL Client loads and the MCL program which loaded on the device runs UN TECHNOLOGES MCL Client 1 1 Figure 2 37 MCL Client Load Typical View By default the MCL application on the device is a simple scanning application which performs scanning and sending bar codes to a host computer and scanning inventory with a timestamp J NOTE The MCL client is pre licensed on the MT2070 only The MCL client on the MT2090 requires an activated license to run MCL Collection is an intuitive high productivity software tool used to create integrate and deploy enterprise multimodal mobile worker applications quickly and easily From bar code scanning and data capture on devices to ODBC WMS or SAP connectivity on the host MCL Collection provides seamless integration from the computer to host application For more information refer to the MCL Technologies Start Up Guide for the MT2000 at http www mcl collection com When the MCL Client loads the Main Menu screen of the default MCL program loads On this screen select the mode Scan Transmit on page 2 36 or Scan Inventory o
320. in the Enter User Name field when you create an EAP GTC token profile then the username field in the interactive credential dialog is initialized to blank After you enter a username in the interactive credential 2 56 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide dialog it is cached as usual but it is not be used to initialize the username field the next time the interactive credential dialog is shown for that profile the username field is initialized to blank In summary the user can control whether the username field in the interactive credential dialog is initialized either with the last interactively entered username for that profile or with the username entered into the profile by whether any value is entered in the Enter User Name field during profile entry Profile Entry E E Enter User Mame Enter Domain M Skip these fields to create User Profile Figure 2 66 Username Dialog Box Password Use the Password dialog to enter a password If EAP TLS is the selected authentication type the password dialog does not display Note that if a username was entered and no password is entered Fusion assumes that no password is a valid password Enter Password L Advanced ID Figure 2 67 Password Dialog Box 1 Enter a password in the Enter Password field If an authentication tunnel type of EAP GTC is used Password dialog with additional radio buttons displays Profile Entry Enter Password
321. indicating that the keys match 5 Tabto Next and press ENT The P Adaress Entry dialog displays To enter a pass phrase key without characters hidden 1 Tabto Next and press ENT Profile Entry WEP 40 PSK Enter 4 32 characters Enter Key Passkey Figure 2 77 Keys Dialog Box 2 Inthe Key field enter the key a ForWEP 40 enter between 4 and 32 characters b For WEP 104 enter between 4 and 32 characters For TKIP enter between 8 and 63 characters d For AES enter between 8 and 63 characters Tab to Next and press ENT The P Adaress Entry dialog displays Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 65 IP Address Entry Use the Pv4 Adaress Type dialog to configure network address parameters IP address subnet mask gateway DNS and WINS Profile Entry 4 Address Type SACP Cancel Figure 2 78 Pv4 Address Type Dialog Box Table2 13 Address Entry Encryption Description DHCP Select Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP from the IP Address Entry drop down list to obtain a leased IP address and network configuration information from a remote server DHCP is the default setting for the device profile Ad hoc mode does not support DHCP Use only Static IP address assignment Static Select Static to manually assign the IP subnet mask default gateway DNS and WINS addresses the device profile uses Select either DHCP or Static from the drop down list and tab to Next gt and press EN
322. ing None as an authentication and WEP as an encryption choose to enter a pass phrase by checking the Pass phrase radio button The user is prompted to enter the pass phrase For WEP the Pass phrase radio button is only available if the authentication is None When selecting None as an authentication and TKIP as an encryption the user must enter a pass phrase The user cannot enter a pass phrase if the encryption is TKIP and the authentication is anything other than None When selecting None as an authentication and AES as an encryption the user must enter a pass phrase The user cannot enter a pass phrase if the encryption is AES and the authentication is anything other than None 2 64 2070 2090 User Guide To enter a pass phrase with characters hidden 1 Select the For added security Mask characters entered check box 2 Tab to Next gt and press ENT Profile Entry Profile Entry WEP 40 PSK Enter 4 32 characters WEP 104 PSK Enter 4 32 characters Teese s ay os Key Key Status Key amp Confirm Key Fields Match Status Key amp Confirm Key Fields Match Figure 2 76 WEP 40 and WEP 104 WEP Keys Dialog Boxes 3 Inthe Key field enter the key a For WEP 40 enter between 4 and 32 characters b For WEP 104 enter between 4 and 32 characters c For TKIP enter between 8 and 63 characters d For AES enter between 8 and 63 characters 4 In the Confirm Key field re enter the key When the keys match a message appears
323. ing Standard RS 232 activates the RS 232 driver but does not change port settings e g parity data bits handshaking Selecting another RS 232 host type bar code changes these settings RS 232Interface 8 7 RS 232 Host Types continued OPOS JPOS Fujitsu RS 232 Baud Rate Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second Set the device s baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device Otherwise data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form Baud Rate 600 Baud Rate 1200 Baud Rate 2400 Baud Rate 4800 8 8 2070 2090 User Guide Baud Rate continued VIA Baud Rate 9600 UMMA Baud Rate 19 200 Baud Rate 38 400 Baud Rate 57 600 VMI AAMT Baud Rate 115 200 RS 232Interface 8 9 Parity A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character Select the parity type according to host device requirements Select Odd parity to set the parity bit value to 0 or 1 based on data to ensure that the coded character contains an odd number of 1 bits Select Even parity to set the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1 based on data to ensure that the coded character contains an even number of 1 bits
324. ing in order to connect to that profile Enable 802 11d If the Enable 802 11d check box is selected the WLAN adapter follows the 802 11d standard It passively scans until valid country information is received from an AP It limits transmit power settings based on maximums received from the AP Profiles which use Infrastructure mode can only connect if the country selected in the profile matches the AP country setting or if the profile country setting is Allow Any Country Profiles which use Ad hoc mode are not 802 11d compliant Band Selection The Band Selection settings identify the frequency bands to scan when finding WLANs These values refer to the 802 11 standard networks Band Selection Settings 2 4 GHz Band 5 GHz Band Figure 2 100 Band Selection Dialog Box J NOTE Select one band for faster access when scanning for WLANs Not all devices support both 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz bands 2 78 2070 2090 User Guide Table 2 21 Band Selection Options Field Description 2 4GHz Band The Find WLANs application list includes all networks found in the 2 4 GHz band 802 11b and 802 119 5GHz Band The Find WLANS application list includes all networks found in the 5 GHz band 802 11 Select Save to save the settings or select X to discard any changes System Options Use System Options to set miscellaneous system setting Profile Roaming Enable IP Mgmt Auto Time Config Figu
325. inued Sale Code 39 Character ASCII Character 1057 9 5 1058 IZ 1059 1060 G P 1061 H 1062 E 1063 7 1064 LV 1065 A 1066 B B 1067 C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 i 1074 J J 1075 K E 1076 L 7 1077 1078 N 1079 5 1080 1081 Q Q 1082 R E 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U 1086 V T 8 22 2070 2090 User Guide Table 8 4 Prefix Suffix Values Continued Code 39 ferui Character ASCII Character 1087 W W 1088 X E 1089 Y 1090 7 gt 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 0 _ 1096 AWN 1097 A 1098 B b 1099 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 1103 G g 1104 1105 N i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L 1109 M 5 1110 N 1111 4O 1112 1113 0 1114 R 1115 5 S 1116 T t RS 232 Interface 8 23 Table8 4 Prefix Suffix Values Continued des Code 39 furari ae ASCII Character 1117 U 1118 V 1119 W 1120 X 1121 Y y 1122 2 1123 i 1124 1125 R 1126 96S 1127 Undefined 038 ENTER 8 24 2070 2090 User Guide Chapter 9 USB Interface Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the device with
326. ions Screen e File Specify a file type Format Specify a Text of XML file format Clear Delay The time in seconds data is automatically cleared from the display after scanning Cancel Press to cancel settings and return to previous screen Done Press to save settings and return to previous screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 31 About Displays information about the Scan nventory application Close Scroll to Close and press ENT to exit and return Home 2 32 2070 2090 User Guide Scan To IP The Scan to IP screen allows the user to scan directly to a host PC using your existing wireless network The application should be pre loaded on the Motorola MT2090 device J NOTE Scan to IP may not be loaded on older devices In this case download the application to your PC establish an ActiveSync connection run ScanTolpDevicelnstaller exe to download it to the MT2090 The host application must be installed on your PC or terminal host Setup e Install the host application on your PC or terminal host Visit htto www scan to ip com to download both the Windows host application and the device installer if necessary Runthe host application ScanTolp exe from the Scan to IP folder on the PC or terminal host To access Scan To IP start at the Home screen scroll to Scan To IP and press ENT aus Home Y 1 Scan Item 2 Scan Inventory 3 Simple Inventory 4 ScanToIP v 5 Image V
327. it Verification Parameter 31h Enable this feature to check the integrity of all 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification USS or the Optical Product Code Council OPCC check digit algorithm Disable 00h USS Check Digit 01h Transmit 12 of 5 Check Digit OPCC Check Digit 02h Parameter 2Ch Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit Transmit 12 of 5 Check Digit Enable 01h Do Not Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 00h Symbologies 12 43 Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Parameter 52h Enable this parameter to convert 14 character 2 of 5 codes to EAN 13 and transmit to the host as EAN 13 To accomplish this the 2 of 5 code must be enabled and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN 13 check digit Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Enable 01h Do Not Convert 12 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable 00h Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Enable Disable Discrete 2 of 5 Parameter 05h To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Discrete 2 of 5 01h
328. iteria actions or rules Erase Criteria And Start Again Erase Actions And Start Again Erase Previously Saved Rule Erase All Rules Quit Entering Rules Scan the bar code below to quit entering rules Quit Entering Rules 14 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Disable Rule Set Use these bar codes to disable rule sets Disable Rule Set 1 Disable Rule Set 2 Disable Rule Set 3 Disable Rule Set 4 Disable Rule Sets Advanced Data Formatting 14 11 Criteria Code Types Scan the bar codes for all code to be affected by the rule Scan the codes in succession prior to selecting other criteria To select all code types do not scan any code type Code 39 Codabar S1 DataBar 14 G GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Expanded Code 128 D20F5 14 12 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code Types continued
329. l Mount Cradle Forklift or Wall Mount To remove the scanner from a vertically mounted cradle remove the bottom of the scanner first then gently pull the top of the scanner out of the cradle Charge the Device Battery in the Cradle For best performance fully charge the device battery before using the device for the first time To charge the device battery place the device in the cradle see nsert the Device in the Cradle on page 1 13 The battery begins charging when the device LED indicator starts flashing green With the exception of several initial charge cycles the default state of the LED is off when the battery is fully charged A complete charge of a fully discharged battery can take up to four hours using external power and up to 10 hours using the interface cable Charge within the recommended temperature of 32 to 104 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 5 to 35 C ideal For information on maximizing battery life see Battery on page 15 2 NOTE The default state of the LED is off when the battery is fully charged with the exception of several initial charge cycles The LED may continually blink until the battery goes through several discharge cycles to calibrate itself Charging Indicator LED The device has on screen charging indicators as well as an LED The device s flashing green LED indicates charging activity If the device displays indicating a charging problem remove the device from the cr
330. l symbol the device decodes UPC EAN and ignores the supplemental characters f you select Decode UPC EAN with Supplementals the device only decodes UPC EAN symbols with supplemental characters and ignores symbols without supplementals e f you select Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals the device decodes UPC EAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately If the symbol does not have a supplemental the device must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12 13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental f you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options the device immediately transmits EAN 13 bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters If the symbol does not have a supplemental the device must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12 13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental The device transmits UPC EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately Enable 378 379 Supplemental Mode Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode uf NOTE f you select 978 979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes see Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 12 9to enable Bookland EAN and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 12 21 Enable 977 Supplemental Mode Enable 414 419 434 439 Supplemental Mode Enable 491 Suppleme
331. ld presentation mode Standard Level 00h Presentation Blink 07h Decode Session Timeout Parameter 88h This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 5 to 9 9 seconds The default timeout is 9 9 seconds To set a Decode Session Timeout scan the bar code below Next scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers For example to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0 5 seconds scan the bar code below then scan the 0 and 5 bar codes To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Decode Session Timeout 5 16 2070 2090 User Guide Picklist Mode Parameter 92h Picklist mode enables the device to decode only bar codes that are aligned under the laser crosshair Select one of the following picklist modes for the device Disabled Always Picklist mode is always disabled Enabled in Hand Held Mode Picklist mode is enabled when the device is out of hands free mode and disabled when the device is in presentation mode Enabled in Hands Free Mode Picklist mode is enabled when the device is in hands free mode only Enabled Always Picklist mode is always enabled J NOTE f you enabled DPM
332. lder on the device via File Explorer 2 Delete the ADCServices reg file File Edit View Favorites Tools Help pack gt C CK JO search Folders 15 gt lt Address Platform Go Name Size Type Medfied 4 Keyboard File Folder Wavalias File Folder e ADCSERVICES CPY 198 bytes File 4121 20 ADCSERVICES REG 292 bytes Registration Entries 1 1 2007 e 2 66KB File 8 13 20 AIRBEAM REG 1 20KB Registration Entries 8 13 20 AIRBEAM DEVICE 975 bytes Registration Entries 2 14 20 7 Annlication FvFeneinn odi 1 object s selected Mobile Device 2 Alternately you can also stop MT2000 Scanner Services from running programmatically by issuing the ADCAPI StopService API For more information refer to the Motorola EMDK for C version documentation Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the device with an RS 232 host Use the RS 232 interface to connect the device to point of sale devices host computers or other devices with an available RS 232 port e g com port If your host does not appear in Table 8 2 refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication parameters to match the host J NOTE The device uses TTL RS 232 signal levels which interface with most system architectures For system architectures re
333. le to narrow medium or wide Narrow Angle 10 00h Medium Angle 35 01h Wide Angle 47 02h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 9 Adaptive Scanning Parameter F1 CD The MT20X0 MML laser configuration includes the SE960 scan engine with adaptive scanning This engine uses a range finder to provide feedback on how far away a bar code is when scanning and automatically optimizes parameters to improve decode performance These parameters include bandwidth receiver gain digitizer settings and scan angle Scan a bar code below to enable or disable adaptive scanning Enable Adaptive Scanning 00h Disable Adaptive Scanning 01h 5 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Adaptive Scanning continued Interference Suppression Mode Parameter F8h 04h B3h Reduced working range is possible in the presence of interfering ambient light Recommended only if the scanner is always in the presence of interfering ambient light Disable Interference Suppression e Interference Suppression Always Ambient Light Interference Suppression Auto Detection Disable Interference Suppression 00h The scan angle changes from wide angle to medium an
334. lities lt name gt lt menu gt lt item gt lt name gt File Explorer lt name gt lt command gt Windows FileExplorer exe lt command gt lt item gt lt item gt lt name gt Task Manager lt name gt lt command gt Windows TaskManager exe lt command gt lt item gt lt menu gt lt item gt lt menu gt lt navigator gt Customizing the MT20X0 7 5 Customizing the Scan or Scan Inventory Program The demonstration applications Scanltem exe and Scaninventory exe are available through the Motorola EMDK for the MT2000 Series devices These applications use the MT2000 Series device specific assemblies and are available in both and VB NET under Visual Studio 2005 and 2008 The Motorola EMDK can be found at hitp supportcentral motorola com Select Software Downloads 7 6 2070 2090 User Guide Disabling MT2000 Scanner Services In some cases developers may choose to disable MT2000 Scanner Services which enables hand held scan and transmit operation on a Windows CE 5 0 device When disabled Scanltem exe and Scaninventory exe applications do not operate In addition connection to the STB2078 cradle the Bluetooth to computer bridge can not operate as it relies on MT2000 Scanner Services to implement the necessary communications IMPORTANT Disable MT2000 Scanner Services only when the MT20X0 is used as a mobile computing device To disable MT2000 Scanner Services 1 Access the Platform fo
335. ll to Save and press ENT to save the data to the location specified in the Options dialog Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 25 Options Scroll to Options and press ENT to configure the inventory application On this screen set the file format and the file storage location to save data The format is specified an xml file located in the folder application inventory Press the Up or Down Scroll key to move from field to field Use the keypad to enter a value in the File field Press the right or left Scroll key to change the data within all other fields aus Options File Format Text Separator Comma Grouped No Clear Delay 2 s Cancel Done Figure 2 23 Options Screen File Specify a file type Format Specify a Text of XML file format Separator Specify a delimiter comma semi colon or tab e Grouped Currently not implemented Clear Delay The time in seconds data is automatically cleared from the display after scanning Cancel Press to cancel settings and return to previous screen Done Press to save settings and return to previous screen About Displays information about the Scan nventory application Close Scroll to Close and press ENT to exit and return Home 2 26 2070 2090 User Guide Simple Inventory Similar to Scan Inventory the Simple Inventory screen allows the user to enter and transmit inventory information It differs from Scan Inventory in
336. long high beeps Remote device rejected connection attempt possibly due to an attempt to pair with a cradle that is already paired with the maximum number of devices Four long low beeps 1 Atransmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting 2 When communicating with a cradle the cradle acknowledges receipt of data If the acknowledgment is not received this transmission error beep sequence sounds Data may still have been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the bar code Five high beeps Emitted every 5 seconds while a reconnect attempt is in progress See Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 4 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Radio Communications Host Types To set up the device for communication with a cradle or to use standard Bluetooth profiles scan the appropriate host type bar code below v Cradle Host default Select this host type for device s to cradle operation The device must then be paired to the cradle and the cradle communicates directly to the host via the host interface cable connection Serial Port Profile Master Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support see page 4 6 The device connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and behaves like there s a serial connection The device initiates the connection to th
337. lows a parameter broadcast page 4 20 that clones all devices paired to the cradle so only one device needs to be programmed To select Point to Point or Multipoint to Point mode scan the appropriate bar code Multipoint to Point Mode Point to Point Mode 4 20 2070 2090 User Guide Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only In both multipoint to point mode and single point mode enable Parameter Broadcast to store parameter updates from the cradle Disable Parameter Broadcast to ignore parameter configurations that come up from the cradle In multipoint to point mode the cradle forwards parameter settings to all connected scanners each scanner decides to store the parameter or not based on the parameter broadcast setting Enable Parameter Broadcast Disable Parameter Broadcast Pairing Pairing is the process by which a device initiates communication with a cradle Scanning Multipoint to Point activates multi device to cradle operation and allows up to seven devices to pair to one cradle The cradle includes a pairing bar code To pair the device with the cradle scan the pairing bar code on the cradle A high low high low beep sequence indicates that the pairing bar code was decoded When a connection between the cradle and device is established a low high beep sounds NOTE 1 pairing bar code that connects the device to a cradle is unique to each cradle 2
338. lt Page Number Imaging Preferences Operational Modes N A N A 6 4 Image Capture Illumination FOh 69h Enable 6 5 Snapshot Mode Timeout FOh 43h 0 30 seconds 6 6 Snapshot Aiming Pattern FOh 2Ch Enable 6 6 Image Cropping FOh 2Dh Disable 6 7 Crop to Pixel Addresses F4h FOh 3Bh 0 top 0 left 1023 bottom 1279 6 8 F4h FOh 3Ch right F4h FOh 3Dh F4h FOh 3Eh Image Brightness Target White FOh 86h 180 6 9 JPEG Quality and Size Value FOh 31h 65 6 9 Image File Format Selection FOh 30h JPEG 6 10 Signature Capture 5Dh Disable 6 11 Signature Capture Image File Format FOh 39h JPEG 6 12 Selection Imaging Preferences 6 3 Table6 1 maging Preferences Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number Signature Capture Width F4h FOh 6Eh 400 6 13 Signature Capture Height F4h FOh 6Fh 100 6 13 Signature Capture JPEG Quality FOh A5h 65 6 13 Video View Finder FOh 44h Disable 6 14 6 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Imaging Preferences The parameters in this chapter control image capture characteristics Image capture occurs in all modes of operation including decode and snapshot Operational Modes The device has two modes of operation Decode Mode e Snapshot Mode Decode Mode By default when you pull the trigger the device attempts to locate and decode enabled bar codes within its field of view The device remains in this mode until it dec
339. m User Settings 3 Device Status 4 am Battery Status 15 3 About Suspend Figure 2 3 Screen Menu Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 13 User Settings On this screen make adjustments for the device s beeper backlight and time Press the Up or Down Scroll key to select an option a6 User Settings Beeper Volume 4 High gt Beeper Frequency Med Backlight Date and Time Time Zone Done Figure 2 4 User Settings Screen Beeper Volume Scroll to Beeper Volume and press the right or left Scroll key to choose a Low Medium or High beeper volume Press the right soft key Done to save changes and end the session e Beeper Frequency Scroll to Beeper Frequency and press the right or left Scroll key to choose Low Medium or High beeper frequency Press the right soft key Done to save changes and end the session Backlight Scroll to Backlight and press ENT to display the Backlight screen 4 Backlight T Brightness 4 2 Ld Battery Timeout 16 AC Timeout 0 Done Figure 2 5 Backlight Screen Scroll to the appropriate line Brightness Use the right or left Scroll key to choose a brightness level for the display e Battery Timeout Using the keypad enter a numeric value to set the seconds in which the backlight turns off when the device is exclusively using battery power AC Timeout Using the keypad enter a numeric value to set the seconds in which the
340. mbology usually including start stop characters quiet zones data characters and check characters Symbol Aspect Ratio The ratio of symbol height to symbol width Symbol Height The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row Symbol Length Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone margin adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet zone margin adjacent to a stop character Symbology The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type e g UPC EAN Code 39 PDF417 etc T Tolerance Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width U UPC Universal Product Code A relatively complex numeric symbology Each character consists of two bars and two spaces each of which is any of four widths The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States V Visible Laser Diode VLD A solid state device which produces visible laser light Glossary MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Tell Us What You Think We d like to know what you think about this Manual Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to 631 627 7184 or mail to Motorola Solutions Inc One Motorola Plaza M S B 10 Holtsville NY 11742 1300 USA Attention Technical Publications Manager Data Capture Solutions IMPORTANT If you need product support please call the appropriate custom
341. me interval 2 Enter the value in minutes in the text box 3 Select the At hh mm radio button to check credentials at a set time 2 60 2070 2090 User Guide 4 Tab to Next gt and press ENT The At Time dialog displays Figure 2 72 At Time Dialog Box 5 Enter the time using the 24 hour clock format in the hh mm text box 6 Select gt to move the time to the right Repeat for additional time periods 7 to Next gt and press ENT The Encryption dialog displays Encryption J NOTE The only available encryption methods in Ad hoc are Open WEP40 and WEP104 Use the Encryption dialog to select an encryption method This page contains the fields to configure the encryption method and corresponding keys if any The drop down list includes encryption methods available for the selected security mode and authentication type Profile Entry Profile Entry Profile Entry AES PSK Enter 8 63 characters w Enter Preshared Key PSK using Passphrase Hexadecimal Keys Key 0 Confirm Enter Confirm Key 0 Status Waiting For Confirm Key Entry For added security rl Next gt Mask characters entered Figure 2 73 Encryption Dialog Boxes Based on the encryption method and the authentication type the user may have to manually enter pre shared encryption keys or a passkey phrase When the user selects any authentication type
342. meter 29h The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC E check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC E Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UPC E Check Digit 00h 12 16 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit Parameter 2Ah The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC E1 check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 00h UPC A Preamble Parameter 22h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC A preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code 0 for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble DATA 00h
343. n Genehmigungen au er Kraft gesetzt und der Betrieb kann gef hrlich sein Cradle Features See Cradle Features on page 1 4 Battery Charging in the Cradle Single slot cradles act as power pass throughs to the device allowing the device to charge the Li ion battery in the device A complete charge of a fully discharged battery can take up to four hours using external power and up to 10 hours using the interface cable charge the device 1 2 3 NOTE To charge the battery for your device battery and charger temperatures must be between 32 F and 104 F 0 C to 40 C Connect the single slot USB cradle to a power source Insert the battery into the battery slot in the device noting the battery polarity Insert the top of the device into the cradle first then firmly press the device into place The device s green charge LED indicates the device battery charging status J NOTE When charging is completed the green LED is off default and the device can be lifted out of the cradle If the battery is completely discharged and the unit is powered from a USB or RS232 cable it may take up to two hours for the unit to power up There is no indication to the user of this condition and it may appear that the unit is not charging and or not working correctly However if the unit is placed in an STB2000 or STB2078 cradle with the 12V power supply power up is immediate The default state of the
344. n addition to any single character prefix already selected the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol Select no Code ID character a Symbol Code ID character or an AIM Code ID character For Code ID Characters see Symbol Code Identifiers on page B 1 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B 3 J NOTE f you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character and enable Transmit No Read Message on page 5 27 the device appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message Symbol Code ID Character 02h AIM Code ID Character 01h None 00h 5 24 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Prefix Suffix Values Key Category Parameter P 63h S1 62h S2 64h Decimal Value Parameter P 69h S1 68h S2 6Ah You can append a prefix and or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing To set a value for a prefix or suffix scan a four digit number i e four bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that corresponds to that value See the ASCII Character Set values in a host interface chapter e g USB Prefix Suffix Values on page 9 20 Prefix Suffix Values on page 8 19 etc for the four digit codes When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix set the key category parameter to 1 then set the 3 digit decimal value See ASCII Character Set values in a host interface chapter for the four digit codes To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 J NOTE To use
345. n page 2 37 of the MCL default scanning application 1 Scan Transmit 2 Scan Inventory EXIT OK Figure 2 38 MT2000 Default Application Home Screen Typical View 2 36 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Scan Transmit When Scan Transmitis selected on the Main Menu the Scan amp Send screen displays On this screen the user can manually enter a quantity and scan data to a computer using a tethered cable or a Bluetooth connection via the STB2078 cradle CH Scan amp Send gpl WEEN Figure 2 39 Scan amp Send Screen X Use the keypad to enter a quantity into this field Scanning is disabled when this field is highlighted Scan a bar code to enter data into this field After scanning data the quantity and data are sent to MCL Link J NOTE On the first transmit the application establishes communication with MCL link which may take several seconds Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 37 Scan Inventory When Scan Inventory is selected on the Main Menu the Scan Inventory screen displays Figure 2 40 On this screen the user must enter the location in which the inventory is scanned When a location is not entered two short beeps sound indicating an error 1 Use the keypad to enter a location and press ENT to continue Ca Scan Inventory 6 aisle 3 BACK Figure 2 40 Scan Inventory Screen 2 Upon pressing ENT the Scan screen displays
346. n that is extremely dusty damp or wet e Use a soft cloth dampened with a 50 50 solution of isopropyl alcohol and water Do not allow the solution to form a pool of liquid anywhere in the cradle Do use a large amount of solution to cause the cradles to remain wet Maintenance and Troubleshooting 15 3 Troubleshooting MT20X0 Table 15 1 Troubleshooting the MT20X0 Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Aiming Pattern 15 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Troubleshooting the MT20X0 Continued Table 15 1 Problem Aiming pattern does not appear when pressing the trigger Possible Causes No power to the device Possible Solutions If the configuration requires a power supply re connect the power supply Incorrect host interface cable is used Connect the correct host interface cable Interface power cables are loose Re connect cables Device is disabled For IBM 468x mode enable the device via the host interface Otherwise see the technical person in charge of scanning Device is disabled For IBM 468x mode enable the device via the host interface Otherwise see the technical person in charge of scanning If using RS 232 Nixdorf B mode CTS is not asserted Assert CTS line Aiming pattern is disabled Enable the aiming pattern See Aiming on page 3 4 Battery may be discharged Check the battery status If the battery is discharged 1
347. nction Key Mapping Disable 4 12 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 4 13 Convert Case No Case Conversion 4 13 Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable 4 14 Reconnect Attempt Interval 30 sec 4 15 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode On Bar Code Data 4 17 Modes of Operation Point to Point 4 19 Point to Point Multipoint to Point Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only Enable 4 20 Pairing Modes Unlocked 4 21 Pairing on Contacts Disable 4 22 Connection Maintenance Interval 15 min 4 23 Authentication Disable 4 26 Variable Pin Code Static 4 27 Encryption Disable 4 28 Radio Communications 4 3 Wireless Beeper Definitions When the device scans the pairing bar code it issues various beep sequences indicating successful or unsuccessful operations See Table 4 2 for beep sequences that occur during pairing operations Table 4 2 Wireless Beeper Definitions Beeper Sequence Indication Short low high beeps Device has paired with the cradle Short high low beeps Device has unpaired with the cradle Note When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID if a disconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after scanning a bar code check the host device to determine if it received the transmitted data The device may have transmitted the last bar code scanned after losing the connection Long low long high beeps Unsuccessful pairing attempt See Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 Long low long high long low
348. nd Control Send Control P 14 50 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Control Characters continued Send Control Q Send Control R Send Control S Send Control T Send Control U Send Control V Send Control W Advanced Data Formatting 14 51 Control Characters continued IL Send Control X Send Control Y Send Control Z Send Control Send Control V Send Control 14 52 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Control Characters continued Send Control 6 Send Control Keyboard Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send Send Space Send Send Send Advanced Data Formatting 14 53 Keyboard Characters continued Send Send Send amp TEIL Send
349. nd Serial Port Profile slave and transmit data to Notepad and HyperTerminal Required equipment MT2000 laptop with built in BT or BT dongle To connect as HID slave 1 Open Scan Item from Home menu 2 Scan Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 3 Scan Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave on page 4 5 gt Scan Variable PIN Code Mode on page 4 27 this allows the pin generated by the BT enumerator to stay the monitor long enough to enter into the MT2000 On the laptop open Discover available BT devices Click on the MT2000 and click Next The pin should be displayed Use the keypad to enter the pin code into the MT2000 and click Enter to accept The BT icon on the top left corner of the MT2000 screen should fill in green Open Microsoft Word on the laptop and use the MT2000 to scan a product bar code If the BT connection is successful the bar code value should display in Word To connect as Serial Port Profile slave 1 Scan Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 2 Scan Serial Port Profile Slave on page 4 5 3 Onthe laptop open Discover available BT devices Click on the MT2000 and click Next 4 Depending on your BT enumerator it should prompt you to enter a PIN code In the enumerator on the laptop enter 12345 View the COM port assigned 5 The BT icon on the top left corner of the MT2000 screen should fill in green 6 Open HyperTerminal and scan a product bar code G 4 12070 2090 User
350. nd six additional characters Code 128 A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements Code 3 of 9 Code 39 A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types including all uppercase letters numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters and space The code name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide while the remaining 6 are narrow Code 93 An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding density than Code 39 Code Length Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters not including those characters Cold Boot A cold boot restarts a computer and closes all running programs COM Port Communication port ports are identified by number e g COM1 COM2 Glossary 3 Continuous Code A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code The absence of gaps allows for greater information density Cradle A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for communicating with a host computer and provides a storage place for the terminal when not in use D Dead Zone An area within a scanner s field of view in which specular reflection may prevent a successful d
351. ndicate a request for signature However if an X or other markings are added in the signature box area these are captured with the signature Figure F1 CapCode F 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide CapCode Pattern Structure A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space a signature capture box a second separator space and then a stop pattern Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element the start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces A 7X quiet zone is required to the left and to the right of the CapCode pattern gl Capture Box KA l ES umm EN ES Figure 2 CapCode Structure The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide Start Stop Patterns Table F 1 lists the accepted start stop patterns The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X You must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box The type value is reported with the captured signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured Table F 1 Start Stop Pattern Definitions Bar Space Patterns 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 5 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 7 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 8 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 Signature Capture Code F 3 Table F 2 lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature Table F 2 User Define
352. ndicators Single Slot Charge Only Cradles LED LED on Device Indication Off No power applied to device battery discharged or removed device is in low power and ready to scan or battery is fully charged and device is ready to scan Note The default state of the LED is off when the battery is fully charged By modifying the BatteryLED reg file under the Platform directory on the device you have the option to enable a solid green LED on a fullly charged battery For detailed information refer to the MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide p n 72E 117858 xx Green Flash Device is charging when cradle is powered from external power supply Red Flash Charging problem or data transmission problem LED on Cradle Off Cradle is not powered or power fault on contacts Solid Blue Cradle is powered Table 13 3 LED Charging Status Indicators Single Slot Multi interface Cradles LED LED on Device Indication Off No power applied to device battery discharged or removed device is in low power and ready to scan or battery is fully charged and device is ready to scan Note The default state of the LED is off when the battery is fully charged By modifying the BatteryLED reg file under the Platform directory on the device you have the option to enable a solid green LED on a fully charged battery For detailed information refer to the MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide p n 72E 117858 xx Green
353. ndr Send s VATA Send 1 TEILT Sendu Send v Send w Advanced Data Formatting 14 65 Keyboard Characters continued Send x Send Send Send Send 14 66 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send ALT Characters Send Alt 2 Send AIt B Send AIt D Send Alt Send Alt A Send Alt C Send Alt E Advanced Data Formatting 14 67 Send ALT Characters continued Send G Send Send I DI Send Alt J Send AIt K Send L T Send Alt M 14 68 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Send ALT Characters continued D T Send AIt N Send O Send P Send Q VAAN Send Alt R Send S Send
354. ng 3 5 scanning 3 5 discrete 2 of 5 bar codes discrete 2 12 43 DPM asita nena xor ud 3 5 5 21 SCANNING d E 3 5 encryption 4 2 4 28 2 encryption options 2 61 encryption authentication matrix 2 61 error indications miscellaneous scanner options 4 1 ESD dongle 1 1 2 102 9 2 13 1 G 2 Ethernet cradle 13 2 EXGICISES Rae Rha RO SER A Ro ed G 1 exposure options illumination 5 18 6 5 Index 6 MT2070 MT2090 Set Up Guide F FIPS ce cioe tuse pra ot Ohne heal Mey 5 21 forklift torem 13 1 four slot battery 13 2 four slot cradle 13 1 four slot cradles 13 6 Ethernet charge 13 2 USB charge only 13 1 four slot Ethernet cradle 13 2 four slot USB 13 8 G GS1 12 63 GS1 databar convert GS1 databar to UPC EAN 12 64 GS1 databar expanded 12 64 GS1 databar limited 12 63 GS1 dat
355. ng into the network If the login dialog was launched by the WCS and not by the user selecting Cancel first causes a message box to display a warning that the cancel disables the current profile If the user still chooses to cancel the login at this point the profile is cancelled Once a profile is cancelled the profile is suppressed until a user actively re enables it or a new user logs onto the device Enable Disable Radio On the Wireless Companion menu press the up or down Scroll key to highlight Enable or Disable Radio and press ENT The radio is enabled or disabled depending on its current state Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 93 Settings The Settings screen allows the user to set bar code parameters on the device To access Settings from the Home screen select Config gt Scanner Settings Use the keypad to navigate through General Parameters and Barcode Settings to set the appropriate environment for the device General Parameters Barcode Settings Menu Close Figure 2 119 Settings Screen General Parameters 4 Settings Ti BeepOnGoodDecode 4 ON gt TransmitNoRead OFF BeeperVolume High Param Scanning ON Cancel Done Figure 2 120 General Parameters Screen Bar Code Settings 6 Settings Ti 3j Up Code 39 Ca UPC EAN Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Menu Close Figure 2 121 Bar Code Settings Screen 2 94 2070 2090 User Guide Rapid Deployment
356. ng to present the full 752 x 480 pixels Select Enable Image Cropping to crop the image to the pixel addresses set in Crop to Pixel Addresses on page 6 8 NOTE The device has a cropping resolution of 4 pixels Setting a pixel address of 0 for Bottom and Right with and Left set to the default 0 transfers the entire image Setting the cropping area to greater than 0 but less than 4 sets the value to the minimum 4 pixels Enable Image Cropping 01h Disable Image Cropping Use Full 752 x 480 Pixels 00h 6 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Crop to Pixel Addresses Parameter F4h 3Bh Top Parameter F4h FOh 3Ch Left Parameter F4h FOh 3Dh Bottom Parameter F4h FOh 3Eh Right If you selected Enable Image Cropping set the pixel addresses from 0 0 to 751 479 to crop to Columns are numbered from 0 to 751 rows from 0 to 479 Specify four values for Top Left Bottom and Right where Top and Bottom correspond to row pixel addresses and Left and Right correspond to column pixel addresses For example for a 4 row x 8 column image in the extreme bottom right section of the image set the following values Top 476 Bottom 479 Left 744 Right 751 To set the crop to pixel address scan each pixel address bar code below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value Leading zeros are required For example to crop the top pixel address to 3 scan 0 0 3 See Appendix D Numeric
357. ngle Slot Charge Only with ActiveSync N A STB2000 F10007R Single Slot Charge Only Vehicle Mount N A STB2078 C10007WR Single Slot Charge Multi interface Bluetooth STB2000 C40007R Four Slot Charge Only N A STB2000 C40017R Four Slot Charge Ethernet N A SAC2000 4000CR Charger Four Slot Spare Battery Charger N A About This Guide xxi Chapter Descriptions Topics covered in this guide are as follows Chapter 1 Getting Started provides a product overview unpacking instructions and start up information e Chapter 2 Operating the MT2070 MT2090 describes the device s screens and how to use the device Chapter 3 Scanning describes parts of the device beeper and LED definitions and how to scan data Chapter 4 Radio Communications provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication between devices cradles and hosts and also includes the parameters necessary to configure the device Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options describes each user preference feature and provides the programming bar codes for selecting these features for the device It also includes commonly used bar codes to customize how data is transmitted to the host device e Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences describes each imager preference feature and provides the programming bar codes for selecting these features for the device Chapter 7 Customizing the MT20X0 provides information abo
358. ning an old coupon symbol reports both UPC and Code 128 scanning an interim coupon symbol reports UPC and scanning a new coupon symbol reports nothing no decode New Coupon Symbols Scanning an old coupon symbol reports either UPC or Code 128 and scanning an interim coupon symbol or a new coupon symbol reports Databar Expanded Symbologies 12 23 Both Coupon Formats Scanning an old coupon symbol reports both UPC and Code 128 and scanning an interim coupon symbol or a new coupon symbol reports Databar Expanded Old Coupon Symbols 00h New Coupon Symbols 01h Both Coupon Formats 02h ISSN EAN Parameter F1h 69h To enable or disable ISSN EAN scan the appropriate bar code below Enable ISSN EAN 01h Disable ISSN EAN 00h 12 24 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code 128 Enable Disable Code 128 Parameter 08h To enable or disable Code 128 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 128 01h Disable Code 128 00h Set Lengths for Code 128 Parameter L1 D1h L2 D2h The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code
359. ning between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 11 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Length Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the device s capability Symbologies 12 37 Set Lengths for Code 11 continued Code 11 One Discrete Length Code 11 Two Discrete Lengths Code 11 Length Within Range Code 11 Any Length 12 38 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code 11 Check Digit Verification Parameter 34h This feature allows the device to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code The options are to check for one check digit check for two check digits or disable the feature To enable this feature scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols Disable 00h One Check Digit 01h Two Check Digits 02h Symbologies 12 39 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits Parameter 2Fh This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit s Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Enable 01h
360. nitions see Table 3 1 and Table 3 2 Aiming Imager Aiming When scanning the device projects a red laser aiming pattern which allows positioning the bar code within its field of view See Decode Distances on page 3 9 for the proper distance to achieve between the device and a bar code Figure 3 2 Aiming Pattern If necessary the device turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target bar code Scanning 3 5 To scan a bar code center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern Be sure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the cross pattern 1D bar code symbol 2D bar code symbol 2D dot peen DPM symbol Aiming Pattern Figure3 3 Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Pattern J NOTE Scanning Direct Part Mark DPM bar codes with the MT2070 DP scanner Due to the reflective nature of some surfaces used with DPM bar codes see Figure 3 3 it may be necessary to tilt the scanner at an angle relative to the target Motorola recommends 25 45 degrees For example when scanning a 15 mil dot peen Data Matrix bar code marked on an aluminum surface present the target between two and three inches from the nose of the scanner and tilt the scanner at a 30 degree angle When scanning standard non DPM bar codes with any configuration of the scanner follow the standard aiming instructions described in Aiming on page 3 4 The device can also read a bar code presented within the aiming patte
361. not transmitted after a scan and an error beep four beeps sound To access USB Config start at the Home screen scroll to Config 6 USB Config USB Config Full SS SNAP w Imaging 4 IBM Tabletop SNAPI IBM Handheld SNAPI w Imaging OPOS IBM Tabletop Simple COM EMUL Handheld Close Close Figure 2 138 Configure USB Screen Table 2 29 Configure USB Option Descriptions USB Configuration Description ActiveSync Configures the device to use ActiveSync on device only Note If connecting ActiveSync via USB it is recommended you use an ESD dongle with the USB cable ESD part numbers KT 8830 03R 3 piece kit or KT 8830 10R 10 piece kit Keyboard Configures the device to use HID Keyboard Emulation on the device and cradle SNAPI Configures the device to use the SNAPI protocol on device only Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 103 Table 2 29 Configure USB Option Descriptions Continued USB Configuration Description SNAPI w Imaging Configures the device to use the SNAPI protocol with imaging on device only IBM Tabletop Configures the device to use the IBM tabletop protocol on both device and cradle IBM Handheld Configures the device to use the IBM Handheld protocol on both device and cradle OPOS Configures the device to use the OPOS JPOS protocol on both device and cradle Simple COM Emul Configures the device to use the Legacy Symbol
362. nsmit scan data according to the following sequence The device reads the CTS line for activity If CTS is asserted the device waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for the host to de assert the CTS line If after Host Serial Response Time out default the CTS line is still asserted the device sounds a transmit error and discards any scanned data When the CTS line is de asserted the device asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for the host to assert CTS When the host asserts CTS the device transmits data If after Host Serial Response Time out default the CTS line is not asserted the device sounds a transmit error and discards the data e When data transmission completes the device de asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character The host should respond by negating CTS The device checks for a de asserted CTS upon the next transmission of data During the transmission of data the CTS line should be asserted If CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters the device aborts transmission sounds a transmission error and discards the data If this communication sequence fails the device issues an error indication In this case the data is lost and must be rescanned If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled hardware handshaking takes precedence NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state 8 12 2070 2090 User Guide Hard
363. ntal Mode Enable Smart Supplemental Mode applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with a 3 digit user defined prefix Set this 3 digit prefix using User Programmable Supplementals on page 12 13 Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 and 2 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with either of two 3 digit user defined prefixes Set the 3 digit prefixes using User Programmable Supplementals on page 12 13 Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or the user defined prefix set using User Programmable Supplementals on page 12 13 Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 and 2 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or one of the two user defined prefixes set using User Programmable Supplementals on page 12 13 NOTE minimize the risk of invalid data transmission select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters Symbologies 12 11 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals continued Decode UPC EAN JAN Only With Supplementals 01h Ignore Supplementals 00h Autodiscriminate UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 02h Enable 378 379 Supplemental Mode 04h Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode 05h Enable 977 Supplemental Mode 07h 12 12 2070 2090 User Guide Decode UPC EAN JAN Suppleme
364. ntals continued Enable 414 419 434 439 Supplemental Mode 06h Enable 491 Supplemental Mode 08h Enable Smart Supplemenial Mode 03h Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 09h Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 and 2 OAh Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 0Bh Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 and 2 0Ch Symbologies 12 13 User Programmable Supplementals Supplemental 1 Parameter F1h 43h Supplemental 2 Parameter F1h 44h If you selected a Supplemental User Programmable option from Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 12 10 select User Programmable Supplemental 1 to set the 3 digit prefix Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D 1 Select User Programmable Supplemental 2 to set a second 3 digit prefix Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D 1 J NOTE User Programmable Supplemental 1 and User Programmable Supplemental 2 are currently not supported User Programmable Supplemental 1 User Programmable Supplemental 2 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy Parameter 50h If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC EAN JAN Supplementals this option adjusts the number of times to decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission The range is from two to thirty times Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC EAN JAN symbols with and without supplementals The default is 10 Scan the bar code below
365. o decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan MSI Length Within Range Then scan O 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Length Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the device s capability Symbologies 12 51 Set Lengths for MSI continued J NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths MSI One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for MSI applications MSI One Discrete Length MSI Two Discrete Lengths MSI Length Within Range MSI Any Length 12 52 2070 2090 User Guide MSI Check Digits Parameter 32h With MSI symbols one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader The second check digit is optional If the MSI codes include two check digits scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit See MSI Check Digit Algo
366. o the MT as scanned For example it does not alphabetize or group same bar codes See page 2 26 ScanToIP The Scan to IP application allows you to scan directly to a host PC using your existing WiFi network The application is pre loaded on newer Motorola MT2090 devices and can be downloaded from the Web to older models See page 2 32 MCL MT2070 Only The MCL application on the device is a simple scanning application which performs scanning and sending bar codes to a host computer See page 2 35 Image Viewer On this screen the user can preview snap and save images See page 2 39 2 12 2070 2090 User Guide Table2 3 Home Screen Options Continued Config On this screen the user has access to the following features Wireless Companion see page 2 41 e Settings see page 2 93 Rapid Deployment see page 2 93 MSP Agent see page 2 94 e see page 2 95 Configure USB see page 2 102 Utilities On this screen the user has access to the following features File Explorer Task Manager See page 2 104 Menu This menu provides access to User Settings Device Status Battery Status and an About screen See page 2 13 Menu The Home screen Menu provides access to User Settings Device Status Battery Status and an About screen Press the Up or Down Scroll key to select an option Press ENT to display the appropriate screen 63 Home 1 1 Scan Ite
367. ode 11 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 11 01h Disable Code 11 00h Set Lengths for Code 11 Parameter 1Ch L2 1Dh The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 11 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 11 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 11 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 11 symbols contai
368. ode 39 3 mil 0 5 2 9 in 1 27 7 366 cm Code 39 5 mil 0 4 1 in 0 10 414 cm Code 39 7 5 mil 0 1 5 5 in 0 254 13 97 cm UPC 10096 13 mil 0 6 6 1 in 1 524 15 494 cm Code 39 20 mil 10 3 in 26 162 cm PDF 4 mil 0 8 2 6 in 2 032 6 604 cm PDF 5 mil 0 5 3 0 in 1 27 7 62 cm PDF 6 67 mil 0 2 3 6 in 0 508 9 144 cm PDF 10 mil 0 4 4 5 in 1 016 11 43 cm PDF 15mil 5 9 in 14 986 cm Near decode distance is limited by the field of view Decode distances are measured under ambient light of 35 5 foot candle in the plane of the farthest bar code Chapter 4 Radio Communications Introduction This chapter provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication between MT20XOs cradles and hosts The chapter also includes the parameters necessary to configure the device The device ships with the settings shown in the Table 4 1 on page 4 2 also see Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous device defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when the device is powered down If not using a USB cable with the cradle select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up be
369. odes For example to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan D 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Length Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the device s capability NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for D 2 of 5 applications Symbologies 12 45 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 continued D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length D 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths D 2 of 5 Length Within Range D 2 of 5 Any Length 12 46 2070 2090 User Guide Codabar NW 7 Enable Disable Codabar Parameter 07h To enable or disable Codabar scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Codabar 01h Disable Codabar 00h Set Lengths for Codabar Parameter L1 18h L2 19h The length of a code refers to the number o
370. odes a bar code or you release the trigger Snapshot Mode page 9 6 The SNAPI with Imaging USB interface supports picture taking Non imaging USB interfaces are invalid in snapshot mode IMPORTANT Before scanning Snapshot Mode scan the Symbol Native SNAPI with Imaging Interface on Use Snapshot Mode to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host While in this mode the device blinks the green LED at 1 second intervals to indicate it is not in standard operating decode mode In Snapshot Mode the device turns on its laser aiming pattern to highlight the area to capture in the image The next trigger pull instructs the device to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host A short time may pass less than 2 seconds between when the trigger is pulled and the image is captured as the device adjusts to the lighting conditions Hold the device steady until the image is captured denoted by a single beep If you do not press the trigger within the Snapshot Mode Timeout period the device returns to Decode Mode Use Snapshot Mode Timeout on page 6 6 to adjust this timeout period The default timeout period is 30 seconds To disable the laser aiming pattern during Snapshot Mode see Snapshot Aiming Pattern on page 6 6 J NOTE Refer to the Motorola EMDK for the Snapshot Mode API Imaging Preferences 6 5 Image Capture Illumination Parameter 69h Selecting Enable Image Capture Illumination causes
371. of key presses determines the letter and case 1 key press j 2 key presses k 3 key presses 4 key presses J 5 key presses K 6 key presses L F6 6 M 0 m n oO Defaults to the number 6 F6 when the Blue function key F6 0 is enabled N 0 m n o when the Orange function key is enabled In alpha mode enable Orange function key the number of key presses determines the letter and case 1keypress m 2 key presses n 3 key presses o 4 key presses M 5 key presses N 6 key presses F7 7 P Q R S p q rs Defaults to the number 7 F7 when the Blue function F7 9 r s P Q is enabled P Q R S p q r s when the Orange function key is enabled In alpha mode enable Orange function key the number of key presses determines the letter and case 1 key press p 2 key presses q 3 key presses r 3 key presses s 4 key presses P 5 key presses 6 key presses R 7 key presses S 2 6 2070 2090 User Guide 2 1 Keypad Functionality Continued F8 8 TL U V t u v Description Defaults to the number 8 F8 when the Blue function key is enabled T U V t u v when the Orange function key is enabled In alpha mode enable Orange function key the number of key presses determines the letter and case 1keypress t 2 key presses u 3 key presses v 4 key presses T 5 key
372. of these bar codes to select the number of positions 14 33 ahead to move the cursor Skip Back N Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions back 14 34 to move the cursor Send Preset Value Send Values 1 through 6 by scanning the appropriate bar code Set 14 34 these values using the prefix suffix values in Table 8 4 on page 8 19 Value 1 Scan Suffix Value 2 Scan Prefix Values 3 6 are not applicable Move Cursor Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character Then enter a character by scanning a bar code from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14 91 J NOTE lf there is no match and the rule fails the next rule is checked Move Cursor To Character Move Cursor To Start Move Cursor Past Character 14 32 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Move Cursor Continued Move Cursor Past Character Move Cursor Past Specific String Move Cursor to Specific String and Replace Move Cursor to Last Occurrence of String and Replace Skip to End Send Pause Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data See Pause Duration on page 14 8to set the length of this pause Send Pause Advanced Data Formatting 14 33 Skip Ahead Use the following bar codes
373. ogramming the country in Options Regulatory each time a new country is entered However this only works if the infrastructure i e APs support 802 11d some infrastructures do not support 802 11d including some Cisco APs When the Enable 802 11d option is selected the Options Regulatory Country setting is not used For a single profile that can be used in multiple countries with infrastructure that supports 802 11d including Symbol infrastructure set the Profile Country to Allow Any Country Under Options Regulatory select Enable 802 11d The Options Regulatory Country setting is not used For a single profile that can be used in multiple countries but with infrastructure that does not support 802 11d set the profile country to Allow Any Country and de select uncheck Enable 802 11d In this case the Options Regulatory Country setting must always be set to the country the device is currently in This configuration option is the most efficient and may be chosen for use with any infrastructure However the Options Regulatory Country setting must be manually changed when a new country is entered continued Tab to Next and press ENT to move to the next dialog 2 46 2070 2090 User Guide Channel If Ad Hoc mode was selected the Ad Hoc Channel dialog displays Profile Entry Ed E3 Channel fi 2412 MHz Cancel Back Figure 2 53 Ad Hoc Channel Screen Use the Ad
374. omputer to the device For more information on ActiveSync refer to the MT2070 MT2090 Integrator Guide part number 72E 117858 xx Entering Information Using the Keypad The alphanumeric keypads produce the 26 character alphabet A Z numbers 0 9 function keys and assorted characters The keypads default characters functions are printed white the alpha character functions are printed orange and the function character functions are printed blue See Keypad on page 2 2 for keypad configurations Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 9 Screen Icons Table 2 2 Icons Icon Description Battery Critical low battery lt 5 full recharge Battery fault C Battery fault AC power applied Low battery recharge 29 Low battery recharge C1 Battery is 25 full Cu Battery is 50 full Cu Battery is 75 full Battery is fully charged am Low battery charging using AC power source Cy Battery 25 full charging using AC power source C Battery 5096 full charging using AC power source Battery 75 charging using AC power source Battery is fully charged AC power source connected am 2 10 2070 2090 User Guide Table 2 2 Icons Continued Icon Description Connections Bluetooth is inactive STB2078 cradle only Bluetooth is active STB2078 cradle only RS 232 connection is active USB connection is active
375. on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 93 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 93 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Length Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the device s capability Symbologies 12 35 Set Lengths for Code 93 continued Code 93 One Discrete Length Code 93 Two Discrete Lengths Code 93 Length Within Range Code 93 Any Length 12 36 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Code 11 Code 11 Parameter 0Ah To enable or disable C
376. or national recycling organizations for more information on how to dispose of batteries Additional information on proper disposal and recycling may be found on the Web at www motorola com recycling and www rbrc org call2recycle 1 16 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Sending Data to the Host Computer Out of the box the device supports two modes to send data to a host computer via cable RS 232 or USB and via Bluetooth open paired with an STB2078 cradle Cable Mode Via cable RS 232 or USB the user interface indicates the active mode for transmitting bar code data to the host U displays on the screen when bar code data transmits via USB R displays on the screen when bar code data transmits via RS 232 Bluetooth Mode In Bluetooth mode open or cradle a Bluetooth icon displays on the screen when bar code data transmits via Bluetooth The cradle receives data from the device via a wireless radio connection and transmits it to the host computer via the host cable The device and cradle must be paired for successful wireless communication Pairing Pairing registers a device to the cradle such that the device and cradle can exchange information The cradles operate in two modes Point to Point and Multipoint to Point In Point to Point mode pair the device to the cradle either by inserting it in the cradle if pairing on insertion is enabled or by scanning the pairing bar code In Multipoint to Point mode you can
377. orm a warm boot first This restarts the device and saves all stored records and entries If the device still does not respond perform a cold boot Performing a Warm Boot To perform a warm boot press and hold the 2 key and the scan trigger simultaneously for 5 seconds During a warm boot the following three items display as text on the screen IPL OS PM A CAUTION Files that remain open during a warm boot may not be retained Performing a Cold Boot A cold boot restarts the device and erases all user stored records and entries from RAM Never perform a cold boot unless a warm boot does not solve the problem CAUTION A cold boot resets the device to the default settings and removes all added applications user preferences and all stored data Do not cold boot without support desk approval To perform a cold boot press and hold the 2 key and the scan trigger simultaneously for 10 seconds During a cold boot the following two items display as text on the screen IPL OS Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 107 Waking the MT20X0 The wakeup conditions define what actions wake up the device These settings are configurable and the factory default settings shown in Table 2 30 are subject to change update Table 2 30 Wakeup Conditions Default Settings Status Description Conditions for Wakeup Suspend When the device is set to the suspend AC power is added or removed mode these actions wake the device Cradle cabl
378. orn Lene ee 12 26 ISBT concatenation 12 27 12 28 ISBT concatenation redundancy 12 28 12 24 code 128 emulation bar codes 12 70 code 39 bar codes check digit verification 12 32 06 39 ack vibe ek ed duree eR ase 12 29 full ASCII i eid anke eme 12 33 lengtliS 24205 mE EUER urs 12 31 transmit check digit 12 32 code 93 bar codes code 99 ciao usu e eee lea dk 12 34 tigers echoes aque 12 34 code ID character 5 22 code identifiers code identifiers B 3 modifier characters B 4 Symbol code B 1 code types ADP eeu eR RC nod 14 11 cold boot c RR RUE 1 17 composite bar codes composite CC A B 12 66 composite CC C 12 66 composite 39 12 67 UPC composite mode 12 67 configuring 1 13 connecting 468X 469X interface 10 2 keyboard wedge interface 11 2 lost connection 1 16 RS 232 interface 8 2 USB interface 9 2 Contents ee LG CEU 1 1 conventions notational 2225 2555 y 9 299 E Y xxii country code
379. ort the version of software installed in the device Report Software Version Chapter 13 Accessories Introduction The MT2070 MT2090 accessories provide a variety of product support capabilities This chapter provides information about cables single slot cradles multi slot cradles and the four slot battery charger Table 13 1 Accessories Accessory Description Cradles Single slot charge only cradle STB2000 C10007R single slot charge only with ActiveSync cradle charges the device s Li ion battery installed in the device It also synchronizes the device with a host computer using ActiveSync through a USB connection Note If connecting ActiveSync via USB it is recommended you use an ESD dongle with the USB cable ESD part numbers KT 8830 03R 3 piece kit or KT 8830 10R 10 piece kit Single slot charge multi interface STB2078 C10007WR single slot multi interface Bluetooth cradle charges the Bluetooth cradle device s Li ion battery installed in the device and when the pairing bar code on the cradle is scanned it pairs with the device allowing the device and cradle to exchange information Note ActiveSync is not supported on this cradle Single slot forklift cradle STB2000 F10007R forklift single slot charge only cradle charges the device s Li ion battery installed in the device The following accessories are not included but maybe required Power Supply Use ONLY a LISTED Motorola Type no 50 14000 9Vdc 2Amax
380. oxes are selected by default Table 2 19 OP Mode Filtering Options Field Description AP Networks Select the AP Networks check box to display available AP networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks see Find WLANs on page 2 42 These are the APs in the vicinity available to the device for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks screen to display the AP networks available to the device AD Hoc Networks Select the Ad Hoc Networks check box to display available peer adapter networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks These are peer networks in the vicinity that are available to the device for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks screen to display the Ad Hoc networks available to the device Select Save to save the settings or select X to discard any changes Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 77 Regulatory Options Use the Regulatory settings to configure the country the device is in Due to regulatory requirements within a country a device is only allowed to use certain channels Enable 802 11d Infrastructure Mode only Figure 2 99 Regulatory Options Dialog Box Table 2 20 Hegulatory Options Field Description Settings Select a country from the drop down list If the Enable 802 11d check box is not selected a profile s country selection must match this sett
381. p Profile is Cancelled A Cancelled profile is disabled until a connect or login function is performed through the configuration editor e Profile is currently in use and describes an infrastructure profile not using encryption T Profile is currently in use and describes an infrastructure profile using encryption Profile is currently in use and describes an ad hoc profile not using encryption Profile is currently in use and describes an ad hoc profile using encryption Profile is not valid in the device current operating regulatory domain gt e GENS The profiles are listed in priority order for use by the automatic roaming feature Change the order by moving profiles up or down Edit existing profiles by selecting one in the list and then pressing ENT to display the menu The menu allows the selected profile to be connected edited disabled enabled or deleted Note the Disable menu item changes to Enable if the profile is already disabled A dialog displays to confirm the users desire to delete a profile if selected Changing Profiles A completed profile is a set of configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a wireless network Create different profiles to have pre defined operating parameters available for use in various network environments When the Manage Profiles screen displays existing profiles appear in the list To change an existing profile highli
382. pace Scanning a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 transmits the following 00001299 lt space gt If you scan Code 39 bar code of 1299X15598 this rule is ignored because the bar code did not meet the length criteria The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs 14 2 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Using ADF Bar Codes When programming a rule make sure the rule is logically correct Plan ahead before scanning To program each data formatting rule Start the Rule Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 14 8 Specify Criteria Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria Criteria can include code type e g Code 128 code length or data that contains a specific character string e g the digits 129 See Criteria on page 14 11 Select Actions Scan all actions related to or affecting these criteria The actions of a rule specify how to format the data for transmission See Actions on page 14 27 e Save the Rule Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 14 9 This places the rule in the top position in the rule buffer To correct any errors see Erase on page 14 9to erase criteria actions and entire rules Beeper Definitions on page 3 1 guide through the programming steps ADF Bar Code Menu Example This section provides an example of how to enter and use ADF rules for scan data An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID part number and destina
383. pad functionality described in Table 2 1 does not necessarily apply to all configurations of the 20 0 Table2 1 Keypad Functionality Press Blue Press Orange Key Description Left Soft Key ALT Defaults to the left soft key which initiates the action noted ALT N A on the bottom left of the screen usually a menu option ALT key when the Blue function key is enabled Right Soft Key CTRL Defaults to the right soft key which initiates the action CTRL N A noted on the bottom right of the screen CTRL key when the Blue function key is enabled Up Down Left Right Defaults to Scroll key allowing up down left right N A N A o navigation Tab Defaults to TAB key asterisk when the Blue function N A key is enabled Depending on the screen display TAB moves from pane to pane in the contents section of a multipane display Backspace ESC Defaults to backspace ESC when the Blue function key is ESC N A enabled Depending on the screen display Returns to the previous level in the display Closes the menu and returns to the previous screen Clears a highlighted field F1 1 special characters Defaults to the number 1 F1 when the Blue function key F1 x is enabled characters when the Orange function key is enabled 2 4 2070 2090 User Guide 2 1 Keypad Functionality Continued Description iy ei dip s F2 2 A B C a b c Defaults to the number 2 F2 when the Blue
384. parameter setting Red Input error incorrect bar code programming sequence or Cancel scanned ADF Programming Green Enter another digit Add leading zeros to the front if necessary Enter another alphabetic character or scan the End of Message bar code All criteria or actions cleared for current rule continue entering rule Delete last saved rule The current rule is left intact All rules deleted Blinking Green Enter another criterion or action or scan the Save Rule bar code Green after Blinking Rule saved Rule entry mode exited Cancel rule entry Rule entry mode exited because of an error or the user asked to exit rule entry Red Out of rule memory Erase some existing rules then try to save rule again Entry error wrong bar code scanned or criteria action list is too long for a rule Re enter criterion or action 3 4 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Scanning in Hand Held Mode IMPORTANT A scan application such as Scan ltem scanitem exe must be launched to allow scanning See Scan ltem on page 2 17 for more information Scanning with the MT20X0 When out of the IntelliStand or removed from the wall mount bracket the device operates in standard trigger mode Aim the device at a bar code and pull the trigger to decode Figure3 1 Scanning in Hand Held Mode Hold the trigger until the device beeps indicating the bar code is successfully decoded For more information on beeper and LED defi
385. pare Battery Charger Battery Battery Cradle Charging ChargingLED Power Contacts four LED Battery Well four Power Cable Groove Wall Mount Key Hole 4 Cable Well Rubber Feet 4 Power Port Figure 1 7 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 1 10 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Host Interfaces This device supports the following host interfaces through communication with a single slot multi interface cradle Standard RS 232 connection to a host Keyboard wedge connection to a host where scanned data is interpreted as keystrokes The following international keyboards are supported for Windows environment North American German French French Belgian French Canadian Spanish Italian Swedish UK English Japanese and Brazilian Portuguese see Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes on page 11 5 for a full list IBM 468X 469X hosts USB connection to a host The device autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar codes The following international keyboards are supported for Windows environment North America German French French Belgian French Canadian Spanish Italian Swedish UK English Japanese and Brazilian Portuguese see USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes on page 9 8 for a full list lt J NOTE USB interface types can also be selected via the USB configuration menu on the device
386. phanumeric Keyboard continued k Alphanumeric Bar Codes 15 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued TANI q TULIT T r 5 t u V E 16 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Ww X y AA 2 Alphanumeric Bar Codes 17 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued E 18 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Appendix F Signature Capture Code Introduction CapCode a signature capture code is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows a device to capture a signature There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form For example on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas one each for two joint filers and one for a professional preparer By using different patterns a program can correctly identify all three so they can be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly Code Structure Signature Capture Area A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box as shown in Figure F 1 Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box The box is optional so you can omit it replace it with a single baseline or print a baseline with an X on top of it towards the left as is customarily done in the US to i
387. press The default symbology type is Code 128 Menu Press the left soft key to display the Menu 0156 Scan Inventory Location 555 Quan view Inventory E Item Save Inventory Figure 2 16 Scan Inventory Screen Menu View Inventory Scroll to View Inventory and press ENT to display a list of the saved inventory items stored in the device Each row in the list includes location quantity and bar code SKU The current inventory stores in a txt or xml file located in the Applications Inventory folder If no inventory items were saved the file does not exist and no contents display If the file does exist the items display in a list view with column headers for location item and quantity The View Inventory screen has several menu options for maintaining information saved in the inventory file 2 22 2070 2090 User Guide View Inventory Menu The View Inventory menu includes several options to maintain and customize inventory data On the View Inventory screen press the left soft key to display the menu items Press the Up or Down Scroll key to select an option Press ENT to display the appropriate screen U SES X Delete Item 3 X Delete All 83 Transmit Export Save Options Figure 2 17 View Inventory Menu e Edit Ensure the item to edit is highlighted on the View Inventory screen then press Menu gt Edit On the Edit Item screen Figure 2 18 edit the inventory data as
388. presses U 6 key presses V Press Blue Key F8 Press Orange Key t u v T U V F9 9 W X Y 2 W X y 2 Home 0 space Defaults to the number 9 F9 when the Blue function key is enabled W X Y Z w x y z when the Orange function key is enabled In alpha mode enable Orange function key the number of key presses determines the letter and case 1keypress w 2 key presses x 3 key presses y 4 key presses W 5 key presses X 6 key presses Y F9 2 W X lt N Defaults to the number 0 Displays the Home screen when the Blue function key is enabled space when the Orange function key is enabled The Home key returns to the Home screen The space can be used to select clear check boxes select an item Home Note Under most circumstances pressing the Home key brings the Navigator application to the foreground However Home key functionality depends upon the current screen display This key cannot be programmed Space Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 7 Table2 1 Keypad Functionality Continued Press Blue Press Orange Key Description Key Key ENT Press ENT Enter to launch an application or select a N A N A currenthighlighted item Depending on the screen press Enter to close a display and return to the previous screen e lock in an entered quantity and highlight an item field store data from an item field
389. ps Program the correct ADF rules Refer it detected an invalid ADF rule to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide Host Host displays scanned data incorrectly Device is not programmed to work with the host Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code For RS 232 set the device s communication parameters to match the host s settings For a Keyboard Wedge configuration program the system for the correct keyboard type and turn off the CAPS LOCK key Program the proper editing options e g UPC E to UPC A Conversion vV NOTE f after performing these checks the device still experiences problems contact the distributor or call Motorola Solutions Support See page xxiii for information Single Slot Charge Only Cradle Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 15 2 Troubleshooting the Single Slot Charge Only Cradle Symptom Charge LEDs do not light when device is inserted Possible Cause Cradle is not receiving power Action Ensure the power cable is connected securely to both the cradle and to AC power Device is not seated correctly in the cradle Remove and re insert the device into the cradle ensuring it is correctly seated Extreme battery temperature Battery does not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F 0 C or above 104 F 40 C Device battery is not charging Device was removed from cradle or cradle was unplugged from AC
390. quiring RS 232C signal levels Motorola offers different cables providing TTL to RS 232C conversion Contact Motorola Solutions Support for more information Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values Indicates Default Baud Rate 57 600 Feature Option J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging 8 2 2070 2090 User Guide Connecting an RS 232 Interface Connect the device directly to the host computer Figure 8 1 HS 232 Direct Connection J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 8 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the device are the same J NOTE Connect a power supply to the cradle not shown for fast charging 1 Attach the modular connector of the RS 232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the device 2 Connectthe other end of the RS 232 interface cable to the serial port on the host 3 Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS 232 interface cable Plug the power supply into an appropriate outlet 4 Select the RS 232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS 232 Host Types on page 8 6 5 modify
391. r Certifi SSRoot GTE CyberTrust Root SSRoot GTE CyberTrust Glob WERoot GlobalSign Root CA SBRoot Entrust net Secure S Properties Import Delete Figure 2 84 Manage Certificates Screen 2 70 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Various certificate types display at one time Select the Certificate Type drop down box to filter the certificate list to display All only Root Server or only User Client certificates Certificate Manager Figure 2 85 Certificate Type Options Screen The Certificate Manager screen contains command buttons at the bottom of the screen A button might be disabled gray if the operation cannot be performed based on any selected object Certificate Manager Delete WB Root Class 3 Public v View Buttons d Buttons Figure 2 86 Command Buttons and Context Menu These buttons can be hidden to allow more space for displaying the list of certificates To hide the buttons press ENT The menu displays Select Hide Buttons to hide the command buttons To display the buttons select View Buttons from the menu The menu also allows the user to select the Properties Import and Delete commands Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 71 Certificate Properties To display the detailed properties of a certificate select a certificate in the list press ENT to display the menu and select Properties The screen displays the properties of the certificate Select a property in the uppe
392. r Characters Continued Code Option Value Option Data Matrix 0 ECC 000 140 not supported 1 ECC 200 2 ECC 200 1 in first or fifth position 3 ECC 200 FNC1 in second or sixth position 4 ECC 200 ECI protocol implemented 5 ECC 200 1 in first or fifth position ECI protocol implemented 6 ECC 200 FNC1 in second or sixth position ECI protocol implemented MaxiCode 0 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5 1 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3 2 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5 ECI protocol implemented 3 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3 ECI protocol implemented in secondary message QR Code 0 Model 1 symbol 1 Model 2 MicroQR symbol ECI protocol not implemented 2 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented 3 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol not implemented FNC1 implied in first position 4 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented FNC1 implied in first position 5 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol not implemented FNC1 implied in second position 6 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented FNC1 implied in second position Aztec 0 Aztec symbol C Aztec Rune symbol B 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Appendix Sample Bar Codes UPC A 0 WAN 5 UPC E 0 5 2 12070 2090 User Guide UPC F1 13 8 39 123ABC Sample Bar Codes 0 3 Trioptic Code 39 456123 Code 93 12345ABCDE Co
393. r changing USB host type The USB bus re established power to the device Normal when changing USB host type 15 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 15 1 Problem Device emits one high beep when not in use Troubleshooting the MT20X0 Continued Possible Causes In RS 232 mode a lt BEL gt character was received and Beep on lt BEL gt option is enabled Possible Solutions Normal when Beep on BEL is enabled and the device is in RS 232 mode BTExplorer Message box displays MT2000 Scanner Service Bluetooth Active MT2000 Scanner Services is using Bluetooth Stonestreet SDK only supports one application using Bluetooth at one time Shut down MT2000 Scanner Services or scan Cable Only host mode see page 5 5 which shuts down Bluetooth and allows BT Explorer to operate Decoding Device decodes bar code but does not transmit the data to the Device is not programmed for the correct host type Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code See the host chapter corresponding to the host type Interface cable is loose Re connect the cable If the device emits 4 long low beeps Set the device s communication transmission error occurred parameters to match the host s setting If the device emits 5 low beeps a Configure the device s conversion conversion or format error occurred parameters properly If the device emits low high low bee
394. r codes 12 71 MCL delete last ku rena hen rers 2 38 scan inventory 2 37 scan 2 36 send data 2 38 startup guide 2 35 view 2 38 microPDF417 bar codes 12 69 mode 2 45 eor 2 45 infrastructure 2 45 operating 2 45 Motorola support xxiii mounting intellistand 3 7 MSI bar codes check digit algorithm 12 53 check digits 12 52 lengths ees n be Eme ta ERR 12 50 12 50 transmit check digit 12 52 multipoint to point communication 4 19 N notational 5 xxii 0 operating mode 2 45 out of range 4 18 P 1 16 address ess E Ra 4 14 barcode sasa canda wea 4 3 bar code 4 23 beeper definitions 4 3 connection maintenance interval 4 23 cradle host asco seen exe xps 4 4 lock override 4 21 maste
395. r device when accessing the cellular system Misread Misdecode A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol MRD Minimum reflective difference A measurement of print contrast N Nominal The exact or ideal intended value for a specified parameter Tolerances are specified as positive and negative deviations from this value Nominal Size Standard size for a bar code symbol Most UPC EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications e g from 0 80 to 2 00 of nominal ODI See Open Data Link Interface Open Data Link Interface ODI Novell s driver specification for an interface between network hardware and higher level protocols It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC Network Interface Controller It is capable of understanding and translating any network information or request sent by any other ODI compatible protocol into something a NetWare client can understand and process Open System Authentication Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm P Personal area network Using Bluetooth wireless technology PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly Generally a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33 foot range Only devices within this limited area typically participate in the network Parameter A variable that can h
396. r list and the detailed information displays in the Expanded Value section Feld 7 Root server Class 2 Public Primary Certif OU Class 2 Public Primary Figure 2 87 Certificate Properties Screen Select ok Escape or X to exit depending on the device Import a Certificate Import certificates from either files or from a server machine CER file DER encrypted Root Server certificates PFX file Personal inFormation eXchange formatted file containing one or more Root Server and or User Client Certificates These files are usually protected by a password and a password prompt appears If there is no password enter nothing and select OK Server User Client certificates can be requested directly from a Certificate Authority CA on the network A User name Password optional and the Server an IP address must be provided to obtain a certificate for the User from the CA Select Import or select from the context menu The mport Certificate dialog displays Import Certificate Select Option e O Import User Cert from Server Figure 2 88 mport Certificate Dialog Box 2 72 2070 2090 User Guide Select the Import from File cer pfx radio button to import a certificate file The Open screen displays Select the file to import Certificate Manager Figure 2 89 Certificate Manager Screen Select the Import User Cert from Server radio button to import a certificate from a s
397. r slave setup 4 6 methodS 4 22 Inodes cbe scere bcr eese hw 4 2 4 20 A 2 mulitpoint to point 4 19 oncontactS 4 2 A 2 piri CODCS iex Rp o E rb RR 4 27 4 19 radio communication 1 16 SPP RP 4 4 UPA epic cU 4 22 parameter defaults radio communication 4 2 parameters decode pager motor enable 5 6 5 4 host MOUS i2 pg RR 5 5 PDF417 bar codes 12 68 code 4 27 eS 4 27 variable 4 27 point to point communication 4 19 postal codes 12 56 Australia post format 12 60 Australian postal 12 59 Japan postal 12 58 Netherlands KIX code 12 61 transmit UK postal check digit 12 58 transmit US postal check digit 12 57 UK postal irre y RE 12 57 UPU FICS 12 62 US planet 12 56 US 12 56 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 12 61 lg P 1 12 USB a iss phe et ert
398. racters up to a total of 8 using the Alphanumeric 3 Scan End of Message bar code on page 14 100 Keyboard on page 14 91 Specific String At Start Advanced Data Formatting 14 23 Specific String Any Location 1 Scanthe following bar code 2 Enter allocation by scanning a two digit number representing the position use a leading zero if necessary using the Numeric Keypad on page 14 24 3 Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters up to a total of 8 using the Alphanumeric 4 Scan End of Message bar code on page 14 100 Keyboard on page 14 91 Specific String Any Location Any Message OK Do not scan any bar code to format all selected code types regardless of information contained 14 24 2070 2090 User Guide Numeric Keypad Do not confuse bar codes on this page with those on the alphanumeric keyboard 0 1 TL 2 3 4 5 6 Advanced Data Formatting 14 25 Numeric Keypad continued 7 8 9 Cancel 14 26 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Rule Belongs To Set Select the set to which a rule belongs There are four possible rule sets See Alternate Rule Sets on page 14 3 for more information about rule sets Rule Belongs To Set 1 Rule B
399. re 2 101 System Options Dialog Box Auto PAC Settings Table 2 22 System Options Field Description Profile Roaming Configures the device to roam to the next available WLAN profile when it moves out of range of the current WLAN profile Enable IP Mgmt Enables the Wireless Companion Services to handle IP address management The Wireless Companion Service configures the IP based on what is configured in the network profile Deselect this to manually configure the IP in the standard Windows screen Enabled by default Auto Time Config Enables automatic update of the system time Network association updates the device time based on the time set in the AP This proprietary feature is only supported with Motorola infrastructure Enabled by default Use the Auto PAC Settings to configure whether to allow automatic PAC provisioning and automatic PAC refreshing when using the EAP FAST authentication protocol Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 79 Settings AllowProvisioning No AllowRefreshing Figure 2 102 Auto PAC Settings Dialog Box Table 2 23 Auto PAC Settings Field Description Allow Provisioning Select Yes from the drop down list to allow the terminal to be automatically provisioned with a PAC when using the EAP FAST authentication protocol Select No to disallow automatic PAC provisioning Allow Refreshing Select Yes from the drop down list to allow an existing PAC on the terminal to be automatic
400. rea intended to contain a symbol Scanner An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol Its three main components are 1 Light source laser or photoelectric cell illuminates a bar code 2 Photodetector registers the difference in reflected light more light reflected from spaces 3 Signal conditioning circuit transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern Scanning Mode The scanner is energized programmed and ready to read a bar code Scanning Sequence A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar code menus Self Checking Code A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol Space The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars Specular Reflection The mirror like direct reflection of light from a surface which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code Glossary 7 SPP Serial Port Profile Start Stop Character A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code Substrate A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed Symbol A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain sy
401. rithm on page 12 53 for the selection of second digit algorithms One MSI Check Digit 00h Two MSI Check Digits 01h Transmit MSI Check Digit s Parameter 2Eh Scan a bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit Transmit MSI Check Digit s Enable 01h Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit s Disable 00h Symbologies 12 53 MSI Check Digit Algorithm Parameter 33h Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit Select the bar code below corresponding to the algorithm used to encode the check digit MOD 10 MOD 11 00h MOD 10 MOD 10 01h 12 54 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Matrix 2 of 5 Enable Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Parameter F1h 6Ah To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Matrix 2 of 5 01h Disable Matrix 2 of 5 00h Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 Parameter L1 F1h 6Bh 12 F1h 6Ch The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length one or
402. rn but not centered The top examples in Figure 3 4 show acceptable aiming options while the bottom examples can not be decoded v WWE TRO ni p X 012345 Figure 3 4 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming 3 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Laser Aiming In hand held mode the laser device projects a laser line by default Ensure the scan line crosses every bar and space of the symbol RIGHT WRONG 012345 012345 Figure3 5 Scanning Orientation with Laser Aiming Pattern The aiming pattern or laser line is smaller when the device is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the symbol Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements mil size closer to the device and those with larger bars or elements mil size farther from the device The device beeps to indicate that it successfully decoded the bar code For more information on beeper and LED definitions see Table 3 1 and Table 3 2 Scanning 3 7 Scanning in Presentation Mode The optional IntelliStand adds greater flexibility to scanning operation When you insert the device into the stand s cup the device s built in sensor places the device in presentation hands free mode When you remove the device from the stand it operates in its normal hand held mode Cup Adjust Cup Angle Adjust Height of IntelliStand Figure 3 6 nserting the Device in the IntelliStand To operate the device in the
403. rst power up when connecting to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values Feature Option Indicates Default Enable Decode Aiming Pattern 02h Option Hex Value 6 2 2070 2090 User Guide Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to disable image capture illumination scan the Disable Image Capture Illumination bar code under Image Capture Illumination on page 6 5 The device issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters require scanning several bar codes See these parameter descriptions for this procedure Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults Table 6 1 lists the defaults for imaging preferences parameters Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Set Default Parameter on page 5 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 6 1 maging Preferences Parameter Defaults Parameter Parameter Number Defau
404. s 14 89 14 90 zero removal 14 37 2 ex BEM ON aa had 2 45 Ad Hoc Channels 2 46 advanced data formatting 14 1 14 1 14 27 alphanumeric keyboard 14 91 alternate rule sets 14 3 bar code menu example 14 2 Deep RE 14 47 code lengths 14 18 code 14 11 14 1 14 11 default rules 14 5 numeric 14 24 14 25 pad spaces 14 38 76 08 2 ibe seu decus danas ex ne end ae 14 42 rules exer Rer E ae 14 1 rules hierarchy 14 4 send alt characters 14 66 send control characters 14 47 send function key 14 76 send keyboard 5 14 52 send keypad characters 14 71 send preset value 14 36 setup fields 14 30 skip ahead 5 14 33 skip back characters 14 34 space 14 37 special commands
405. s not completed initialization Wait several seconds and scan again Low medium high beeps upon scanning a USB device type Communication with the bus must be established before the device can operate at the highest power level Low medium high beeps occur more than once The USB bus can put the device in a state where power to the device is cycled on and off more than once This is normal and usually happens when the PC cold boots RS 232 only 1 short high beep A BEL character is received Beep on BEL is enabled Scanning 3 3 LED Definitions In addition to beep sequences the device uses a two color LED to indicate status Table 3 2 defines LED colors that display during scanning Table3 2 Standard LED Definitions LED Indication Hand Held Scanning Standard Use Off No power is applied to the device or the device is on and ready to scan Green A bar code was successfully decoded Red Transmission error conversion or format error device malfunction or RS 232 receive error Hands Free Presentation Scanning Standard Use Off No power is applied to the device Momentarily Off A bar code was successfully decoded Green The device is on and ready to scan Red Transmission error conversion or format error or RS 232 receive error Parameter Programming Green Number expected Enter value using numeric bar codes Successful program exit with change in
406. s requiring alphanumeric values Appendix F Signature Capture Code provides information about using the device to capture a signature Appendix G Quick Startup Exercises provides exercises to familiarize the user with the device and accessories Exercises include establishing connections ActiveSync and Bluetooth customizing the Home Screen menu modifying the Startup program remapping the keypad and disabling Scanner Services xxii MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document e Italics are used to highlight the following e Chapters and sections in this and related documents Bold text is used to highlight the following Key names on a keypad Button names on a screen or window bullets indicate Action items Lists of alternatives Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential Sequential lists e g those that describe step by step procedures appear as numbered lists e Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks are used to denote default parameter settings Indicates Default Baud Rate 9600 Feature Option NOTE This symbol indicates something of special interest or importance to the reader Failure to read the note will not result in physical harm to the reader equipment or data CAUTION This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility of data or material damage may N
407. s setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows ASCII keyboard type and can not be disabled Override Caps Lock Key Enable Do Not Override Caps Lock Key Disable USB Interface 9 11 USB Ignore Unknown Characters This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize Select Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters The device issues no error beeps Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters for IBM devices to prevent sending bar codes containing at least one unknown character are to the host or for HID Keyboard Emulation devices this sends the bar code characters up to the unknown character The device issues an error beep Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Transmit Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Disable USB Ignore Beep Directive This applies only to IBM handheld IBM tabletop and OPOS devices Scan one of the following bar codes to honor or ignore a beep directive All directives are still acknowledged as if they were processed Honor USB Beep Directive Ignore USB Beep Directive 9 12 2070 2090 User Guide USB Ignore Type Directive This applies only to IBM handheld IBM tabletop and OPOS devices Scan one of
408. sends data to the host PC via the configured interface and protocol such as USB HID keyboard On the View Inventory screen press Menu gt Transmit to send data JJ NOTE Data is not deleted after transmission 2 24 2070 2090 User Guide Export Exporting formats data in a user friendly layout which can be downloaded from the device On the View Inventory screen press Menu Export The dialog in Figure 2 21 displays indicating the path of the file to be exported to the Application folder on the device The default file name and type is export txt Press ENT to export all data and return to the View Inventory screen 0996 View Inventory Yx The inventory was successfully exported to dication Inventory export Menu Done Figure 2 21 Export Dialog lt J NOTE The export format text or XML is specified in Options on page 2 25 e Save Saving data ensures that data is not lost during a warm or cold boot For example when the user inserts a new battery in the device a save is recommended prior to switching batteries On the View Inventory screen press Menu gt Save The following dialog displays indicating a successful save Press ENT to accept the save and return to the View Inventory screen 2 Save The inventory was successfully saved 2457 Done Figure 2 22 Save Dialog Options On the View Inventory screen press Menu Options Save Inventory Scro
409. software is set up properly on the host device 2 96 2070 2090 User Guide 2 Select Next Depending on the service selected in Figure 2 124 BTExplorer discovers devices in range and selects devices that provide the service selected Select Remote Device 3 Devices Remote Device Name Device Address MASHA WRK2 Use arrow keys to scroll through devices and hit enter or tight soft key Use F1 to filter the list of devices Use F2 display available actions lt Cancel bksp gt Next Figure 2 125 New Connection Wizard Select Remote Device Screen 3 Select Nextin Figure 2 125 Select COM7 as the desired service Select Remote Service 2 Object Push Service Use arrow keys to scroll through available services then hit Enter or right soft key to select the service Use F1 to Filter the list of devices Figure 2 126 New Connection Wizard Select Remote Service Screen 4 Select Nextin Figure 2 126 A Connection Summary window displays Connection Summary Explore Services on Remote Device Device Name Device Address Service Name Service Type Favorite Press the right soft key or enter to Finish or Back left to change options or cancel Figure 2 127 New Connection Wizard Connection Summary Screen Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 97 5 When the wizard completes a connection is automatically saved in f
410. sts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 9 1 USB Interface Parameter Defaults Parameter Default Page Number USB Host Parameters USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 9 5 CDC COM Port Emulation Enable 9 7 Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking Enable 9 7 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes North American 9 8 USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 9 10 USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 9 10 USB Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 9 11 USB Ignore Beep Directive Honor 9 11 USB Ignore Type Directive Honor 9 12 Emulate Keypad Disable 9 12 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Disable 9 13 9 4 2070 2090 User Guide Table 9 1 USB Interface Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter Default Page Number USB Substitution Disable 9 13 Function Key Mapping Disable 9 14 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 9 14 Convert Case None 2 15 USB Transmission Speed Parameters USB Polling Interval 8 msec 9 16 Fast HID Keyboard Disable 9 18 Quick Keypad Emulation Disable 9 18 USB HID Over the STB2000 Charge only Cradle Disable 9 19 USB Interface 9 5 USB Host Parameters USB Device Type IMPORTANT The SNAPI interface connection is supported only by a cable connection between the device and host Select the desired USB device type J NOTE When changing USB Device Types the device automatically resets and issues the standard startup beep sequen
411. t Mandatory to prohibit the device from associating with a different AP The letter M displays on top of the icon The device connects to the selected AP and never roams until e Set Roaming is selected e Set Mandatory is selected on a different AP Manually connecting to a profile from the Manage Profiles page The device roams to a new profile The device resets warm or cold Select Set Roaming to allow the device to roam to any AP with a better signal These settings are temporary and never saved to the registry Select Refresh to update the list of the APs with the same ESSID Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 91 Log On Off When the user selects Log On Off the device may be in one of two states the user may be logged onto the device by already entering credentials through the login box or there is no user logged on Each of these states has a separate set of use cases and a different look to the dialog Wireless Profile Username Password Domain Name Status 4 10 2009 10 46 AM Request for credentials Figure 2 118 Log On Off Screen User Already Logged In If already logged into the device the user can launch the login dialog for the following reasons Connect to a different profile Connect to and re enable a cancelled profile To do this Launch the Log On Off dialog e Select the cancelled profile from the profile drop down list Login to the profile x NOTE cancelled profil
412. t Power Save the default performs in the middle of CAM and MAX Power Save with respect to network performance and battery life MAX Power Save Max Power Save yields the longest battery life while potentially reducing network performance In networks with minimal latency Max Power Save performs as well as Fast Power Save but with increased battery conservation Deleting a Profile To delete an existing profile highlight a profile on the Manage Profiles screen press ENT to display the menu scroll to Delete and press ENT Ordering Profiles To change the order of existing profiles highlight a profile on the Manage Profiles screen press ENT to display the menu scroll to Move Up or Move Down and press ENT If the current profile association is lost the device attempts to associate with the first profile in the list then the next until it achieves a new association Exporting a Profile To export a profile to a registry file highlight a profile on the Manage Profiles screen press ENT to display the menu scroll to Export and press ENT The Save As dialog displays with the Application folder Manage Certificates Users can view and manage security certificates in the various certificate stores Tab to Manage Certs and press ENT The Certificate Manager screen displays Certificate Manager 3 Certificate Type fal Identifier SSRoot Thawte Server CA ySRoot Thawte Premium Ser SSRoot Secure Serve
413. t Verification Disable 12 42 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 12 42 Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable 12 43 Discrete 2 of 5 D 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Disable 12 43 Set Length s for D 2 of 5 12 12 44 Codabar NW 7 Codabar Disable 12 46 Set Lengths for Codabar 51055 12 46 CLSI Editing Disable 12 48 NOTIS Editing Disable 12 48 Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start Stop Characters Upper Case 12 49 Detection selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Page Number MSI MSI Disable 12 50 Set Length s for MSI 4 to 55 12 50 MSI Check Digits One 12 52 Transmit MSI Check Digit Disable 12 52 MSI Check Digit Algorithm Mod 10 Mod 10 12 53 Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Disable 12 54 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths One Length 14 12 54 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 12 56 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 12 56 Chinese 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 Disable 12 57 Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 Disable 12 57 Inverse 1D Inverse 1D Regular 12 58 Postal Codes US Postnet Disable 12 59 US Planet Disable 12 59 Transmit US Postal Check Digit Enable 12 60 UK Postal Disable 12 60 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Enable 12 61 Japan Postal Disable 12 61 Australian Postal Disable
414. taBar Limited Security Level Fih D8h Security Level 3 12 68 Composite Composite CC C FOh 55h Disable 12 69 Composite CC A B FOh 56h Disable 12 69 Composite TLC 39 FOh 73h Disable 12 70 UPC Composite Mode FOh 58h Never Linked 12 70 Composite Beep Mode FOh 8Eh Beep as Each Code 12 71 Type is Decoded 2D Symbologies 12 6 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Table 12 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number PDF417 OFh Enable 12 71 Micro PDF417 E3h Disable 12 72 Code 128 Emulation 7Bh Disable 12 73 Data Matrix FOh 24h Enable 12 74 Maxicode FOh 26h Enable 12 74 QR Code FOh 25h Enable 12 75 MicroQR Fih 3Dh Enable 12 75 Aztec Fih 3Eh Enable 12 76 Symbology Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level 4Eh 1 12 77 Security Level 4Dh 0 12 79 Report Version 12 80 Symbologies 12 7 UPC EAN Enable Disable UPC A Parameter 01h To enable or disable UPC A scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPC A 01h Disable UPC A 00h Enable Disable UPC E Parameter 02h To enable or disable UPC E scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPC E 01h Disable UPC E 00h 12 8 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Enable Disable UPC E1 Parameter UPC E1 disabled by default To enable or disable UPC E1 sc
415. take effect To cold boot the device press the number 2 key and trigger simultaneously until the screen refreshes twice and the characters gt gt gt display on the screen Disabling Scanner Services In some cases developers may choose to disable MT2000 Scanner Services which enables the hand held scan and transmit operation on a Windows CE 5 0 device When disabled Scanltem exe and Scanlnventory exe applications do not operate In addition connection to the STB2078 cradle the Bluetooth to computer bridge cannot operate as it relies on MT2000 Scanner Services to implement the necessary communications Disable G 6 12070 2090 User Guide MT2000 Scanner Services only when the MT20X0 is used as a mobile computing device Required equipment STB2000 USB cable p n CBAUO1 SO7ZAR and the MT2070 1 Access the Platform folder on the device via File Explorer 2 Delete the ADCServices reg file J NOTE Alternately you can also stop MT2000 Scanner Services from running programmatically by issuing the ADCAPI StopService C API 3 Cold boot the device for the settings to take effect To cold boot the device press the number 2 key and trigger simultaneously until the screen refreshes twice and the characters gt gt gt display on the screen Numerics 2D bar codes ee Wed a Na ru ea 12 73 code 128 12 70 data matrix 12 71 maxicode
416. the drop down list The options listed in the drop down list are based on the selected Security Mode as shown in Table 2 8 The authentication types other than None all use IEEE 802 1x authentication to ensure that only valid users and sometimes servers can connect to the network Each authentication type uses a different scheme using various combinations of tunnels username passwords user certificates server certificates and Protected Access Credentials PACs Table 2 8 Authentication Options Authentication Description None Use this setting when authentication is not required on the network EAP TLS Select this option to enable EAP TLS authentication A user certificate is required validating the server certificate is optional EAP FAST Select this option to enable EAP FAST authentication This type uses a PAC Protected Access Credential to establish a tunnel and then uses the selected tunnel type to verify credentials PACs are handled behind the scenes transparently to the user Automatic PAC provisioning can depending on the tunnel type require a user certificate and the validation of a server certificate Manual PAC provisioning is currently not supported PEAP Select this option to enable PEAP authentication This type establishes a tunnel and then based on the tunnel type uses a user certificate and or a username password Validating the server certificate is optional LEAP Select this option to enable LEAP auth
417. the remote device is lost Cradle Cable Contact Batch Mode The device starts storing bar code data when Enter Batch Mode is scanned Data transmission is triggered by plugging the cable into the device or inserting the device into the cradle In all modes transmissions are halted if the device is moved out of range The device resumes when it is back in range If a bar code is scanned while batch data is transmitted it is appended to the end of the batched data parameter bar codes are not stored User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Scanner Options 5 21 Batch Mode continued Parameter 544 Normal 000h Out of Range Batch Mode 001h Standard Batch Mode 002h Cradle Cable Contact Batch Mode 003h E nter Batch Mode S end Batch Data 5 22 2070 2090 User Guide FIPS Mode Parameter F1h The Federal Information Processing Standard FIPS 140 2 is a U S government computer security standard used to accredit cryptographic modules FIPS enabled 20 0 scanners and cradles offer this secure mode of operation To enable FIPS mode of operation disabled by default scan Enable FIPS Mode at any time The scanner attempts to establish a secure session with the cradle to which it is connected On success the scanner lights a yellow LED on every trigger pull to signal that all data is transmitted over Bluetooth in a secure fashion On failure the scanner sounds an audible transmission failur
418. the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria matches and therefore if the actions occur Input is modified into the data format specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds Be sure to program the most general rule first For example if the THIRD rule states When scanning a bar code of any length send all data then send the ENTER key and the SECOND rule states When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12 send the first four characters then send the ENTER key then send all remaining data and you scan a Code 128 bar code of length 12 the THIRD rule applies and the SECOND rule appears to not function Advanced Data Formatting 14 5 Note that using the standard data editing functions also creates ADF rules Scan options are entered as ADF rules and the hierarchy mentioned above also applies to them For the device this applies to prefix suffix programming in the parameter Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5 25 These rules reside in the same rule list as ADF Rules so the order you create them is also important Default Rules Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data Units with custom software may have one or more default rules burned in The rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules first then the default rules Disable default rules by entering the following general rule in the user programmable buffer When receiving scan data send all data Since this
419. tiates the transfer from the MT2000 to the host Scan Inventory is similar to the default application loaded on the P360 460 scanners 1 Pair the MT2000 to the cradle using the steps in Establishing a Bluetooth BT Connection Using the STB2070 Cradle above Open the Scan Inventory application on the MT2000 On the host PC open a program such as HyperTerminal if using RS232 host or any text programs such as Notepad Wordpad Microsoft Word etc if using HID USB host to view the decoded data Using the MT2000 scan several product bar codes Click Menu View Inventory Menu Transmit The data should appear in the opened program J NOTE In lieu of Bluetooth Scan and Scan Inventory applications operate with a USB cable connected directly to the host PC and the bottom of the MT2000 respectively Quick Startup Exercises 5 Customizing the Home Screen Menu The contents of the Home screen Navigator exe are driven by an XML file named Navigator xml which resides in the Platform folder on the device See page 7 3 for detailed information about the Navigator xml file and customizing the Home screen Using the STB2000 cradle and a USB cable p n CBAU01 S07ZAR with the MT2070 follow these steps to change the view of the Home screen Menu to only display Scan item 1 ActiveSync to the MT2000 and navigate into the Platform folder 2 Copy the Navigator xml file to the host and make a backup copy on the PC Op
420. tion code into their own Code 128 bar codes The distribution center also has products that carry UPC bar codes placed there by the manufacturer The Code 128 bar codes have the following format MMMMMPPPPPDD Where M Manufacturer ID P Part Number D Destination Code The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID CTRL M part number CTRL P gt and destination code CTRL D gt At this center the UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code The following rules must be entered When scanning data of code type Code 128 send the next 5 characters send the manufacturer ID key CTRL M gt send the next 5 characters send the part number key CTRL P gt send the next 2 characters send the destination code key lt CTRL D gt When scanning data of code type UPC EAN send all data send the manufacturer ID key CTRL M To enter these rules see the following steps Advanced Data Formatting 14 3 Rule 1 The Code 128 Scanning Rule Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication 1 Begin New Rule 14 8 High High 2 Code 128 14 11 High High 3 Send next 5 characters 14 28 High High 4 Send CTRL M 14 49 High High 5 Send next 5 characters 14 28 High High 6 Send CTRL P gt 14 49 High High 7 Send next 2 characters 14 27 High High 8 Send CTRL D 14 48 High High 9 Save Rule 14 9 High Low High Low Rule 2 The UPC Scanning Rule Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication 1 Begin New
421. to skip ahead characters Skip Ahead 1 Character Skip Ahead 2 Characters Skip Ahead 3 Characters Skip Ahead 4 Characters Skip Ahead 5 Characters Skip Ahead 6 Characters Skip Ahead 7 Characters 14 34 2070 2090 User Guide Skip Ahead continued Skip Ahead 8 Characters Skip Ahead 9 Characters Skip Back Skip Ahead 10 Characters Use the following bar codes to skip back characters Skip Back 1 Character Skip Back 2 Characters Skip Back 3 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14 35 Skip Back continued Skip Back 4 Characters Skip Back 5 Characters
422. tory was successfully exported to dication Inventory export Menu Done Figure 2 29 Export Dialog lt J NOTE The export format text or XML is specified in Options on page 2 25 e Save Saving data ensures that data is not lost during a warm or cold boot For example when the user inserts a new battery in the device a save is recommended prior to switching batteries On the View Inventory screen 2 30 2070 2090 User Guide press Menu gt Save The following dialog displays indicating a successful save Press ENT to accept the save and return to the View Inventory screen 63 View Inventory Yx 2 mEEEE Save A The inventory was successfully saved Menu Done Figure 2 30 Save Dialog Options On the View Inventory screen press Menu Options Save Inventory Scroll to Save and press ENT to save the data to the location specified in the Options dialog Options Scroll to Options and press ENT to configure the inventory application On this screen set the file format and the file storage location to save data The format is specified an xml file located in the folder application inventory Press the Up or Down Scroll key to move from field to field Use the keypad to enter a value in the File field Press the right or left Scroll key to change the data within all other fields aus Options File export Format Text Clear Delay 2 s Cancel Done Figure 2 31 Opt
423. tures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a bar code You can disable the signature capturing capability in a device Signature Boxes Figure F 3 illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes Type 2 Type 5 sil Type 7 Type 8 _ Type 9 Figure F 3 Acceptable Signature Boxes Appendix G Quick Startup Exercises Introduction This chapter provides various exercises to help the user get familiar with the device and accessories The following topics are included Establishing an ActiveSync Connection on page G 2 Establishing a Bluetooth BT Connection Using Open Bluetooth on page G 3 Establishing a Bluetooth BT Connection Using the STB2070 Cradle on page G 4 Customizing the Home Screen Menu on page G 5 Modifying the Startup Program on page G 5 Disabling Scanner Services on page G 5 G 2 12070 2090 User Guide Establishing an ActiveSync Connection The MT2000 runs the CE NET 5 0 Core OS which is supported by ActiveSync v4 5 for Windows XP and Windows Mobile Center for Window 7 and Vista An ActiveSync connection on the MT2000 can be set up with the STB2000 cradle The STB2000 cradle is an ActiveSync and charge only cradle and cannot be used to communicate via Bluetooth If an STB2000 cradle is unavailable a USB cable p n CBAUO1 S07ZAR can be connected directly into the MT2000 J NOTE f connecting ActiveSync via USB it is r
424. two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the Numeric Bar Codes on page D 1 For example to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan Matrix 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the Numeric Bar Codes on page D 1 For example to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Matrix 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then Scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Matrix 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using the Numeric Bar Codes on page D 1 For example to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Matrix 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the decoder s capability Symbologies 12 55 Set Lengths for Matrix
425. type 9 5 fast HID keyboard 9 18 HID over STB2000 charge only cradle 9 19 ignore beep directive 9 11 keystroke 9 10 polling interval 9 16 9 17 quick keypad emulation 9 18 SNAPI handshaking 9 7 unknown characters 9 11 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 12 61 variable PIN code 4 27 video view finder 6 14 batch mode 5 19 battery rk owe ated pi teas 1 13 INSCHING rs Io aed a heel 1 11 pOWO rmx pur ERE 1 11 13 3 uso da Bak 1 18 battery removal 1 18 battery usage options 2 69 beeper definitions 3 1 ure c e Rh a eli a A 4 3 Wireless nl ek EE E EPIS REG 4 3 Bluetooth esed ater e 1 16 add service 2 97 address eid REESE ede 2 15 authentication 4 26 BTEXxploret cesses meta 2 95 cradle ier acr eae ga 1 2 13 4 oncryptlon sende E RR 4 26 establish connection G 3 G 4 icon on device 2 10 pairing bar
426. unt conversion dial is set to the wall mount position reattach the cradle to the shock absorbing plate Device does not boot when placed in the cradle The device s battery is discharged Normal behavior if the battery is severely discharged The battery must charge at a reduced charge rate until the battery acquires sufficient charge to boot the device This can take up to two hours depending on the level of battery discharge This can be avoided by powering the cradle with the optional external power supply Cradle is not sending bar code data Parameter settings were scanned prior to pairing Pair device prior to scanning settings USB cable not detected Connect the USB cable prior to connecting the 12V power supply Maintenance and Troubleshooting 15 11 Four Slot Charge Only Ethernet Table 15 5 Troubleshooting the Four Slot Charge Only Ethernet Cradle Symptom Charge LEDs do not light when device is inserted Possible Cause Cradle is not receiving power Action Ensure the power cable is connected securely to both the cradle and to AC power Device is not seated correctly in the cradle Remove and re insert the device into the cradle ensuring it is correctly seated Extreme battery temperature Battery does not charge if battery temperature is below 32 F 0 C or above 104 F 40 C Device battery is not Device was removed from cradle Ensure cr
427. ut customizing the MT20X0 device for the end user Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface provides information for setting up the device for RS 232 operation Chapter 9 USB Interface provides information for setting up the device for USB operation e Chapter 10 IBM 468X 469X Interface provides information for setting up the device with IBM 468X 469X POS systems Chapter 11 Keyboard Wedge Interface provides information for setting up the device for keyboard wedge operation e Chapter 12 Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes for selecting these features Chapter 13 Accessories describes all accessories for the device e Chapter 14 Advanced Data Formatting ADF describes how to customize scanned data before transmitting to the host Chapter 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting provides information on how to care for the device and troubleshooting the device and its cradles Appendix A Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous device defaults Appendix B Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers ASCII character conversions and keyboard maps Appendix C Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric values Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes includes the alphanumeric bar codes to scan for parameter
428. vert UPC E to DPQ A 1a tuna trix iu rt ne E Mb Res 12 19 Convert bell 12 19 uu admi MET UU T 12 20 Bookland ISBN Format ta ta edens bu ans 12 21 UCC Coupon Extended Code 2 12 22 COUPON T ENE 12 22 PSI ANE F m 12 23 Code T28 M TH 12 24 Enable Disable Code mr E P 12 24 Set Lengths for Code 128 12 24 Enable Disable GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 12 26 Enable Disable ISBT 128 12 26 a 12 27 Check ISBT Table t 12 28 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 12 28 Code SO 12 29 Enable Disable Code 99 a Len S et 12 29 Enable Disable Trioptic Code 39 12 29 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 12 30 Code 32 Prefix 12 30 Table of Contents xvii Set Lengths for Code 39 C 12 31 Code 39 Check Digit Verification 12 32 Transmit Code 39
429. ware Handshaking continued None Scan this bar code to disable hardware handshaking Standard RTS CTS Scan this bar code to select Standard RTS CTS Hardware Handshaking RTS CTS Option 1 If you select RTS CTS Option 1 the device asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS The device de asserts RTS when the transmission completes RTS CTS Option 2 If you select Option 2 RTS is always high or low user programmed logic level However the device waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response Time out default the device issues an error indication and discards the data RTS CTS Option 3 If you select Option 3 the device asserts RTS prior to any data transmission regardless of the state of CTS The device waits up to Host Serial Response Time out default for CTS to be asserted If CTS is not asserted during this time the device issues an error indication and discards the data The device de asserts RTS when transmission is complete None Standard RTS CTS RTS CTS Option 1 RTS CTS Option 2 RTS CTS Option 3 RS 232 Interface 8 13 Software Handshaking This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to or instead of that offered
430. window It is recommended you leave this on for added scratch resistance Getting Started 1 19 Lanyard To install the optional lanyard 1 Insert the loop on the lanyard into the slot at the bottom of the device Figure 1 12 nsert Lanyard Loop 2 Thread the upper portion of the lanyard into the loop Figure 1 13 7hread the Loop 3 Pull the clip through the loop over the tether point and tighten into place Figure 1 14 nsert Loop into Tether Point 1 20 MT2070 MT2090 User Guide Chapter 2 Operating the MT2070 MT2090 Introduction This chapter provides instructions for using and navigating the device 2 2 2070 2090 User Guide The keypad contains alphanumeric characters scroll keys function keys and an ENT Enter key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function keys blue and orange Note that an application can change the keypad functions so the device s keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 1 on page 2 3 for key descriptions 4 way Navigation Up Down Right Left Right soft and CTRL key Left soft and Backspace and ESC key ALT key old boot trigger Tab and key Figure 2 1 MT2070 MT2090 Keypad J NOTE The device does not have a Power key To suspend the device go to Home screen press the left soft key Menu scroll to Suspend press ENT Operating the MT2070 MT2090 2 3 Keypad Functionality JJ NOTE The key
431. xport to export all profiles to a registry file and to export the options to a registry file Settings Export Options Export All Profiles Figure 2 104 Export Dialog Box To export options 1 Select Export Options The Save As dialog displays Save As Figure 2 105 Export Options Save As Dialog Box 2 Enter a filename in the Name field The default filename is WCS_OPTIONS REG 3 Select the desired folder 4 Select Save 2 82 2070 2090 User Guide To export all profiles 1 Select Export All Profiles The Save As dialog displays Options Save As Name WCS OPTIONS Type Location Application Figure 2 106 Export All Profiles Save As Dialog Box 2 Enter a filename in the Name field The default filename is WCS PROFILES REG 3 Inthe Folder drop down list select the desired folder 4 Select Save Selecting Export All Profiles also saves an indication of the current profile This information is used to determine which profile to connect with after a warm boot or cold boot Wireless Status To open the Wireless Status screen select Wireless Status from the Wireless Companion menu The Wireless Status screen displays information about the wireless connection Wireless Status Wireless Status 1 Signal Strength 2 Current Profile 3 IPv4 Status 4 Wireless Log 5 Versions 6 Quit Figure 2 107 Wireless Status Screen The Wireless

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

18チャレンジ ‐わたしたちのさぎょうしょあんない[PDF 3.9MB]  別添2≫再発・類似事例の発生状況その3(PDF:545KB)  Numark Turntable with usb audio interface  20057534 Heli Cube IS NBL  la Montagne  CyberPower CP-BC2200  DBBQ12 et RPBBQ  S800-Direct Flow.cdr    PISCINA CON ANELLO GONFIABILE  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file